Who Should You License Your Content or Course To? with April Beach (Episode 325)

    Who Should You License Your Content or Course To?


    Struggling to scale your coaching or consulting business? In this episode, we dive into the powerful strategy of content licensing. We’re talking about how you can offer your training, courses, or systems to other companies, saving them time and boosting your income. Perfect for coaches, consultants, and service-based businesses wanting to expand their reach, this episode unpacks who would want to buy your content and why. From your current clients to even your competition, you’ll learn how to transform your existing content into new revenue streams.
    By the end of this episode, you’ll be equipped with the knowledge and strategies to make your content work harder for you, opening up new avenues for profit and impact. We’ll explore four levels of potential buyers for your content, starting with licensing to your own clients. Discover how empowering them to use your processes can be a quick and easy win for both parties. Then, dive into higher levels, such as turning your competition into partners and licensing to agencies, nonprofits, corporations, universities, and government organizations. This episode provides actionable steps to align your long-term business goals with scalable growth, leveraging your expertise without burning out.
    End Results:
    • You will be able to understand who to license your content to, from clients to large organizations.
    • Learn how to transform your competitors into partners by licensing your materials to them.
    • Make a decision on which level (clients, competition, agencies, large organizations) suits your content licensing strategy.
    • Understand how to navigate the complexities of higher-level deals with corporations, universities, and government organizations.
    Resources Mentioned:
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:47] Hey you guys, thanks for tuning in. This is episode number 325 and today we are talking about and answering the question, who can you license your courses, your content, and your trainings to? If you are new here to the show, please subscribe and make sure that you share this and see because everything I share here on this suite life entrepreneur podcast are proven business strategies and trainings that you can take to the bank that other coaches will charge you thousands of dollars for.

    [00:01:12] So you can rest assured that you can actually take action on every one of our episodes. Welcome. If we haven’t met before, I’m April Beach host here of the show and founder of the SweetLife Company. And on today’s show, we’re really diving into. Who can you license your content to, and you’re going to walk away with ideas and even strategic moves that you can make moving towards licensing and scaling your business faster.

    [00:01:36] So if that’s what you’re looking for, absolutely dive into the show. All of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco. com. Are you ready? Let’s go. Okay. So when we talk about content licensing, it means we are giving another company the ability to rent or utilize or distribute your training or your course, your system, your workshop or your process.

    [00:01:59] So you’re not distributing it yourself. And I have tons of resources for you on actually what is content licensing on our YouTube channel and our podcast. So make sure you’re checking those out and you are not missing those. Now I really want to dive into specifically. Answering this question, who can you license your stuff to?

    [00:02:17] So I get this question all the time. People are like, okay, April, this is really cool concept, but who would want to buy my stuff? And so let me share with you some basic mindset strategies first with the preface of saying, I’m not a mindset coach. I’m a business strategist, but I think this is important for you to understand.

    [00:02:37] Companies identify that it’s faster to buy your trainings, courses, programs, your systems, and your processes than it is for them to create them themselves. Especially larger companies know that they probably don’t have somebody in their team that can do as great of a job as you can do by teaching your expertise.

    [00:02:58] So they know that they can actually save time and save money by bringing your content in. Other coaches and consultants know that as well. So when you have a niche specialty that you are, it’s your genius, right? And you’ve gotten people great results, whether it’s through consulting or coaching before.

    [00:03:16] Other companies want this. They know it’s very valuable to them. Increases the value of what they do. It helps deliver better results to their teams and even to their clients. So again, I have so many other resources for you on why licensing a different licensing strategy. I really want to move into who you can license it to, but I felt like that was important foundational information in case you, you haven’t tapped into our other resources before.

    [00:03:40] So now. Answering the question, who can you actually license to? So the first thing I want you to be aware of is that licensing first starts with your individual personal business strategy, your personal goals of where you want to see your personal brand, your business brand, and the content of your work in the next five, 10 and 15 years.

    [00:04:01] Licensing is a really cool process where we expand the reach of your work, but in order to decide who the best people are. Companies are to actually license your information to, we want to make sure that the strategy is right for you. So please take a moment and think about where you want to see your business, your personal brand, and your content.

    [00:04:21] And as we move into talking about this, it will give you some more clarity. So there are four different levels that I’m going to generally share with you In this training, right? In this recording that we’re doing here, this video, four different levels of buyers, and we’re going to talk through each one of these here briefly to give you some information to be thinking about if that’s a right fit for that long term strategy for you.

    [00:04:46] So number one, the first buyer, if you will, the first potential user or licensee of your content, you could consider actually licensing to your own clients. Okay. So hear me out. If you have a training or a process that you have taught your own clients, let’s say you’re a marketing coach and you have a specific way of creating, you know, content or, or doing online marketing processes, right?

    [00:05:13] You’ve taught actual individuals, even other companies, but you know, individuals how to do that. Okay. Can you, should you, do you want to actually give those individuals who have already gone through your training, they’ve already completed your process, the ability to now utilize your trainings to share in their own business with their own clients.

    [00:05:32] This is really, really a powerful option in licensing to your own clients. It’s usually one of the fastest ways that we see that we can start licensing your material without big, huge heavy sales calls or negotiations like we do in, in bigger corporations. So number one, I want you to think about. Are you in a place where you are ready to start releasing some of your processes to clients that have been through your systems before and they’re qualified to deliver it?

    [00:06:00] That’s one of the things I want to talk about too. And I, I’ll do a whole separate video on this, but just a sidebar, you know, there’s this kind of master resale license business model where people that are totally not qualified at all can actually take other people’s content and resell it as if it’s theirs.

    [00:06:15] That’s not what I’m talking about. I never recommend allowing your content to be distributed or licensed by somebody who is not qualified. So these are qualified individuals, you’ve trained them personally, they’ve been through your programs, they, they know exactly the process and you’re giving them permission to utilize this.

    [00:06:32] So let’s go back to that marketing coach example. Let’s say you are that marketing coach and you thought you taught other marketers how to create content marketing plans. Now, would you like to enable them to use your processes? Maybe even some of your recordings or your trainings in their business, whether it’s to their own teams or even distributing it to their own clients.

    [00:06:53] So that’s kind of licensing buyer. Option level one. It’s usually a quicker sale and it’s something that can really expand the reach of your work without a lot of heavy sales lifting. It’s really beneficial for you. And of course it’s really beneficial for your clients as well. Level two. Is licensing to your competition.

    [00:07:12] Okay. This is an absolute game changer. I love talking about this, how to turn your competition into your clients. So this is for those of you guys who you’re kind of done coaching or consulting or teaching on what you have been doing. You’re ready for this next level of your business. You don’t so much want to continue to do this one to group or even went to individual through your own company buyer level two are actually going and reaching out to businesses that have been your competition and giving them permission to utilize your trainings with their clients in their business.

    [00:07:48] So imagine this and oh my gosh, I have so many podcast episodes and resources on this and more videos on this If this is what you want, we can just totally geek out on this whole buy in level option But let me just leave this with you imagine Not having to compete With your competition, creating this really cool, even mastermind community collective of businesses that are doing the same things, and they’re all utilizing either all or even parts of your training and content to actually insert into to Their business so immediately they’re no longer your competition because you’re not selling that content yourself You’ve leveled up their business.

    [00:08:29] You’re making more money and you’ve completely moved yourself into a blue ocean So level number one licensing to your clients level number two licensing to what has been your competition? There’s a lot more deep business future strategy we should talk about in that, but for the sake of what we’re talking about here in this video today, it gives you a great baseline of things to be thinking about.

    [00:08:50] Okay, so now let’s go a little bit bigger. Now let’s talk about level number three. Level number three are organizations like agencies or smaller businesses. Or even nonprofit organizations. These businesses, these companies are always looking for great content. So that’s that kind of level three buyer.

    [00:09:12] And as you’re moving up these levels, I want you to know that in many cases for most of our clients, the cost of their licensed product, basically they make more money goes up. So the higher the organization and the higher the value and the more people Okay. The more people that your content is going to reach, the more money you’re going to make licensing that particular piece of content.

    [00:09:32] So at level three is think about agencies or think about other small to mid sized businesses. Think about even chambers of commerce or groups and collectives. So if there are, you know, big business associations, these are great level three buyers. And if this is the place where you’re at, you can even still continue to sell your own content and license your things to agencies.

    [00:10:01] So that’s at level 3. So level 3 is at, again, that mid size business or small to mid size business, non profit agency. And I want you to pause just for a second and imagine at least one or a couple pieces of your content and trainings and how that could benefit a mid sized business. And frankly, how it could benefit you and how many more people you could reach with your work and how many more companies you could help.

    [00:10:27] And then level four are universities, corporations, and government. And we have clients that actually license their content in all of these different levels, all the way up to universities. We have multiple clients that are licensing their courses and content into universities. And corporations and government.

    [00:10:48] And so this higher level, me be honest with you, these deals usually take longer to close, but they’re bigger deals. So just think the bigger the deal, the higher the level that you license to, the longer these deals take to close. There’s more people to talk to more red tape that you kind of need to get through.

    [00:11:05] Um, so, you know, again, As you’re watching this and you’re thinking about this strategy, you can be thinking about how fast do I want to profit or do I want to, you know, wait for these big deals to close, but that level four, these are great buyers. So universities, government and corporations are also always on the look out for your content, whether your content is an internal training for their staff to really level up their, their staff’s ability in a certain, Area or whether they’re gonna take your content and distribute it to end users so your content can be internal and it can be distributed.

    [00:11:43] And so that next level a buyer is a really great opportunity for you if you have a significant program that can guarantee results to their end users, whether it’s internally to their staff, and of course externally to their buyers. So those are four different, very general levels. And the purpose again of me sharing this with you is to help you just open up your mind to the world of all the things you can do with your content.

    [00:12:11] So that training you created that you aren’t selling anymore, maybe frankly, you’re just burned out teaching that topic. Maybe you’re ready to move on to the next level. Maybe you have been working a nine to five job and this is your area of expertise. And you have processes and systems that you have created that are out of your own intellectual property.

    [00:12:31] They aren’t owned by a company, they’re yours. And you want to start increasing your profit outside of your work. You are absolutely in a place where you can look to other companies and all these different, may not be your clients. You know, you can’t really license content to your clients if you’re working a nine to five, but other agencies and even other businesses based on your work, of course, as long as it doesn’t compete with your employment agreement.

    [00:12:55] So. Those are some things that I want you to be thinking about, and I just want to kind of share a little story with you just to wrap this up about one of the first things that I did with licensing and my thought process around this. So hopefully this helps you. So when I first got into licensing, it was late 2020.

    [00:13:13] 2008, 2009, and one of the things I realized about myself was that I really wanted to be helping other businesses, and I had all of this content that I was sitting on. In this content that I was sitting on, I had actually created it for a B2C company and my own B2C company. But prior to that, I had even been a business strategist and coach even before I created this content.

    [00:13:37] So I just knew that I wanted to work with other businesses. It’s just where I belong. And so the very first thing that I did is instead of continuing to sell my online courses directly to clients, I connected with every other coach in my industry that was trying to do the exact same thing as I was, and I gave them an opportunity to take all of my classes.

    [00:13:59] And this is the language, this is the goal that I want to give you today. This is a language I used with them. I said, Take my courses and make them your own and sell them to your clients. That’s what I said. And when we’re looking at like the cost that it takes or the time that it takes, I have a little cheese sheet note here that I always reference back.

    [00:14:22] On average, data shows that it takes 28 to 36 hours to create one hour of an employee training. That’s 28 to 36 hours to create the IP, create the actual curriculum, actually produce the training and have it ready to go 28 to 36 hours to create one hour of training. So going back to what I was offering these other consultants, I had eight courses that were created and each one was about on average an hour long.

    [00:14:55] I was literally saving them hundreds of hours by taking my own courses and making them their own and giving them permission to license my own courses. And that was to my competition. And it was an important part of my longterm business strategy for myself. So I always love sharing like real world practical stories about my clients and about how I’ve done licensing to help you really understand how you can apply this to your business.

    [00:15:18] And you can be thinking about how you want to move forward with licensing. So again, today. We covered who you can license to. We covered the four different levels of starting out with your exact clients. You can license your material to, and then you can even reach out to your competition. Then you can go to small businesses, agencies, even organizations.

    [00:15:37] And then the next level up would be corporations, government, and universities, and all of these are possible for you as long as you have amazing content that gives people transformational results. All right. That is a wrap for episode number 325 for all the resources and even the transcription and the show notes and everything that I talked about.

    [00:15:57] Cruise over to SweetLifeCo.com and you can get everything you need there. And if you’re ready for personalized strategic support, you can apply to work with us, attend one of our online workshops, or even attend one of our in person retreats. I would love to work with you and help you Again, all of it can be found over at SweetLifeCo.com I’ll talk to you soon.




    What Types of Content Can You License?with April Beach (Episode 324)

    What Types of Content Can You License?


    Are you sitting on valuable content and wondering how you can monetize it through licensing? This episode is tailor-made for coaches, consultants, and other subject matter experts who possess content that’s just waiting to be shared with a wider audience. We’re going to clarify what content is licensable, how companies are hungry for it, and why knowing this is critical for taking your business operations to new levels of growth and efficiency. If your content is collecting dust, listen up – this is not the show for you if you’re not yet clear on what content licensing is. I suggest first catching up on our previous episode about the basics of content licensing before diving into this one.
    In this chat, we unpack three lucrative types of licensable content—each with varying income potential, represented by one, two, or three dollar signs. From leveraging distribution channels with compact pieces like articles and videos, to enhancing other programs with your trainings or workshops, and even offering complete processes that other companies can use independently. I even share a personal story about how I repurposed my own courses, and how that could be a game changer for you, too. We break down these strategies into real-world applications to help you visualize the incredible potential of licensing the valuable content you already have.
    End Results:
    • Recognize short, impactful content that can be used to fill a company’s distribution channels.
    • Identify how your smaller training modules can augment existing programs to create added value.
    • Understand the goldmine that is complete programs and courses, ready for you to license.
    • Get clarity on whether your content fits better as internal training for teams or as client-facing solutions.
    • Realize the potential profitability of licensing and how it contributes to a scalable business model.
    • For all your licensing resources, free tools, and business strategies, visit sweetlifeco.com.
    • To tap into a complimentary licensing 101 video, check out licensingtools.com.
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:46] April: Hi, you guys. In this video, on this podcast episode, we are unpacking the answers to the question, what type of content can you license? And so if you are a subject matter expert, a coach or a consultant, and you have content That you’re sitting on. It’s collecting dust. And you’re wondering what is actually licensable, what a company is want, then this is the show.

    [00:01:11] April: This is the video to be tuning into. If you’re watching us on YouTube, please click subscribe and share this. And if you’re watching it, listening to us here on Apple or Spotify or all the other podcast distribution channels, thank you so much. This is episode number 324. All the resources, all of the free licensing tools, all of our business tools can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo.com.

    [00:01:37] April: Let’s dive in and answer the question. What can you actually license? What type of content can you license? So. If you’re new to the world of licensing, go back and listen to our video on what is content licensing so you can get all the nitty gritty. So this is assuming you know what content licensing is, and you’re thinking about, you know, I have these courses, or I have these trainings, or I have this material, you know, what, what can I actually release?

    [00:02:01] April: It’s a common question I get, and we’re doing an entire series here on the show about all the frequently asked questions that I receive about content licensing. So, there are three types of content that companies will line up to license from you. And if you’re new to this, I want to share with you that this is a common business practice.

    [00:02:22] April: Companies understand that it takes a lot of time to create content and it’s faster to buy yours or license yours than it is to create more content from scratch. There are especially larger companies, larger organizations, it is a very common practice for them to be looking for amazing content to bring in.

    [00:02:41] April: And so the first type of content I want you to be aware of, we’re going to go through one, two, three. One is the lowest amount of money you’re going to make. Two is the middle amount of money you’re going to make. Three is the highest dollar amount you can claim for this licensing deal. So be really upfront about that.

    [00:02:57] April: So as I’m unpacking this, I’m just going to tell you one, imagine dollar sign number one, Level two, imagine dollar sign level two, three imagine dollar, three dollar signs, right? So that’s what I want you to be aware of. So the first one is content that fills distribution channels. What is a distribution channel?

    [00:03:13] April: A distribution channel is something that’s usually public. So it’s like this podcast is a distribution channel. YouTube channel is a distribution channel. Instagram, um, newsletters. It could be, you know, email marketing is still a distribution channel. It is any place where a company distributes content.

    [00:03:31] April: Usually publicly. It can also be internal content for larger corporations and organizations as well. But level one is if you have articles, videos, um, step by step processes, these are shorter. Compact pieces of content, trainings, processes, systems, or methods that you have created that you’re sitting on, you’re not really using anymore.

    [00:04:01] April: Maybe you are using it. You can actually license that to other companies to share within their distribution channels. Let me give you a story about this, like a little case study about this so that you can be spinning your own wheels. I like with each one of these episodes to share with you a story about licensing so you can imagine how this could work for you.

    [00:04:20] April: So we have a ton of online courses. We did in our company. So at one point in time I had 56 online courses. I don’t sell these anymore. I don’t use them anymore. But some of the content in the little videos from those courses are really informative. They’re kind of business coaching 101 things that I did like Over a decade ago.

    [00:04:41] April: It’s like, what is a lead magnet? How to build a funnel? Um, you know, some really basic business type things that content. I’m not selling it anymore. I’m just sitting on it. That content. I can actually license to other companies to distribute publicly through their distribution channels. It’s written. It’s done.

    [00:05:00] April: The video is done. Everything’s there. They can just add it to their marketing manager and start distributing it, distributing it, and grow their following and increase the value they’re providing. It doesn’t fit into our marketing plan anymore because our clients are past that. We’ve already helped them.

    [00:05:18] April: Pass those, you know, basic business launch type of activities, but I’m sitting on content that can fill other companies distribution channels. So if you have content that can fill distribution channels, that is way number one. You know, I wouldn’t make a million bucks doing that. I could make a couple thousand.

    [00:05:36] April: Sure. Hey, listen, I, I’m not one to turn down a couple thousand dollars. And so think about that. What content do you have that can fill other distribution channels, either public distribution channels or internal distribution channels that can help another company just deliver better content? To their listeners or their followers or their users.

    [00:05:55] April: That’s level number one. Level number two is content that augments current programs. So this is when you have a smaller training. It can still can be like one stand alone course. But it is one piece of a training that can be added to other trainings and programs to you. Make it better or help people get better results.

    [00:06:20] April: It can complement another complete program So if you have a training a video it can be a small workshop then that is something that augments other programs and You are gonna make money by licensing that to other businesses whether they’re businesses that are your competition or not last Video I did last podcast episode 3 23 is all about how to choose what competition you’re going to license to.

    [00:06:47] April: If you miss that, go back, listen to that video. We unpacked that whole thing, but this level number two is when we take your training and program and we allow for other businesses to actually include it in what they’re already selling or doing. I have a lot of clients that are doing this. I have multiple clients with one training piece or one training program and the entire strategy is to license it into other programs.

    [00:07:13] April: How amazing is that for them when they can take what they’ve created? They don’t have to sell it anymore and they just licensed it to another consultant or another coach to augment their programs and they make a lot of money by doing that. You might be familiar with this if you’ve given away like a free workshop or a free training and added it as like a bonus in the past to other programs.

    [00:07:35] April: Technically speaking, without you knowing it, you’re licensing it, by the way, without the licensing agreement. It doesn’t mean you always, like those type of situations, they’re more of a marketing and a lead gen opportunity for you. So, uh, we value actually doing those things for free because in return you’re going to grow brand awareness, you’re going to grow your list.

    [00:07:54] April: So it’s the same activity but a different strategy. Here we’re talking about a strict licensing strategy where you actually license your program to other companies to add to their full program. And you make money doing that. Certainly you should make money doing that. And then way number three is what I call complete.

    [00:08:16] April: So we talked about number one, content that feeds distribution channels. Number two, content that augments other programs. Number three are completes. And also our clients sit in either the augmenting channels or the completes level complete is where we take an entire course, an entire start to finish process that really can stand alone.

    [00:08:35] April: And we license that to other companies to use. That is the most profitable. That is what’s really gonna drive the wheelbarrows full of money to your bank. And that is where it doesn’t even have to be built out. Again, I did multiple other videos on, you know, don’t waste time building things out first with licensing.

    [00:08:56] April: Please don’t do that. But that is where we can even take One workshop that maybe you’ve taught live before, but it’s an entire workshop. Maybe it’s a, an entire weekend virtual event that you teach live. We can turn it into a licensing offer and allow for other companies to distribute it. I know where your mind’s going because I do this.

    [00:09:18] April: Your mind is probably going, well, can I still, do I do like licensing with live stuff? Still, I will do an entire, another episode for you on that and teaching you how to do hybrid offers with licensing and live consulting. Uh, just got, just got a question about that from somebody on LinkedIn. So, um, I will make sure that we address that in an upcoming show.

    [00:09:38] April: Again, another reason to subscribe and, uh, I want you just to be thinking about this. Going back to level number three, back from that squirrel moment. If you have a complete program that can stand by itself and be distributed by another company. Then that is the number one profit maker for licensing. It doesn’t even have to be huge.

    [00:10:02] April: That standalone program can still be a three, three video or three module training. It can be a one day workshop process, hear me out, where you allow for other professionals to teach your workshop. You don’t have to be there. It’s not always a course. It’s curriculum. It’s your process. It’s your way. We license your genius, your method, your framework.

    [00:10:31] April: That’s why if you’re new to our company with new coaches, the very thing we very first thing we help entrepreneurs do is build out methods and frameworks. So if you don’t have that built yet, by the way, we have the pathway to show you how to do that. But I’m talking to those you guys. We already have that.

    [00:10:47] April: And yeah, You have your method and your framework, whether it is a live workshop or it’s a course or it’s a training or it’s a process or, you know, it’s a system and you allow for another company to actually license all of that. Now, where do they use it? Again, another video that I will do for you, but just to answer that question right now, I’m not going to leave you hanging here.

    [00:11:09] April: They will either utilize that training as internal training for their teams, For their staff, they’ll either utilize your content to put into their internal operations or, or skills building and, or they can use it client facing is part of something they sell or something they sell standalone. So your content doesn’t always have to be totally client facing.

    [00:11:37] April: It doesn’t have to have to be public. As a matter of fact, I don’t know if I guess maybe 60, 40, I would say is, is our. Clients trainings are internal for staffs and team, maybe 50 50 and then external publicly facing. So that just doesn’t matter. So don’t get hung up on those details. Right now. I just want you to be focusing on choosing the content itself.

    [00:12:02] April: So when we’re asking what can or we’re asking the question, what can you license? The answer to that question is content that feeds distribution channels, content that augments other programs or completes. And you probably have a variety of content that fits in each one of those levels, like most of our listeners.

    [00:12:25] April: You guys are solutions creators. You’re very good at what you do and you’re constantly trying to fix and solve problems. And I want to help you scale your business and make a lot of money off the problems that you’ve already fixed that maybe you aren’t even selling the solutions to those problems anymore.

    [00:12:42] April: So if that’s what you want, you’re in the right place. We are your go to strategist for licensing your courses, trainings, and content. My name is April Beach, and I’m so glad that you’re here. I’m the founder at the SweetLife company, and you can find all of our resources by visiting SweetLifeCo. com, and you can even tap into a free licensing 101 video.

    [00:13:03] April: By visiting licensing dash tools. com as well. Again, please subscribe and I will see you next week with more strategy that you can take to the bank to scale your expert coaching or consulting business through content licensing .




    Turn Your Competition Into Your Clients With Licensing with April Beach (Episode 323)

    Turn Your Competition Into Your Clients With Licensing


    Are you sitting on valuable content and wondering how you can monetize it through licensing? This episode is tailor-made for coaches, consultants, and other subject matter experts who possess content that’s just waiting to be shared with a wider audience. We’re going to clarify what content is licensable, how companies are hungry for it, and why knowing this is critical for taking your business operations to new levels of growth and efficiency. If your content is collecting dust, listen up – this is not the show for you if you’re not yet clear on what content licensing is. I suggest first catching up on our previous episode about the basics of content licensing before diving into this one.
    In this chat, we unpack three lucrative types of licensable content—each with varying income potential, represented by one, two, or three dollar signs. From leveraging distribution channels with compact pieces like articles and videos, to enhancing other programs with your trainings or workshops, and even offering complete processes that other companies can use independently. I even share a personal story about how I repurposed my own courses, and how that could be a game changer for you, too. We break down these strategies into real-world applications to help you visualize the incredible potential of licensing the valuable content you already have.
    End Results:
    • Recognize short, impactful content that can be used to fill a company’s distribution channels.
    • Identify how your smaller training modules can augment existing programs to create added value.
    • Understand the goldmine that is complete programs and courses, ready for you to license.
    • Get clarity on whether your content fits better as internal training for teams or as client-facing solutions.
    • Realize the potential profitability of licensing and how it contributes to a scalable business model.
    • For all your licensing resources, free tools, and business strategies, visit sweetlifeco.com.
    • To tap into a complimentary licensing 101 video, check out licensingtools.com.
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:



    Hey guys, welcome back to the show. We are talking about should you license your trainings and courses to April?

    [00:00:52] Other coaches and your competition. As a matter of fact, in this episode, in this video, we’re unpacking the strategy about how to actually turn your competition into your clients. It’s a game changer. And I’m so glad that you are here. If you’re watching us on YouTube, Please subscribe and like this video.

    [00:01:10] And if you are listening to this episode, I’m so glad that you’re here. It is episode number 323. Let me validate this with my notes. Yep. We’re at 323, you guys, and I just appreciate you listening here on the Suite Life Entrepreneurial Podcast for the last seven years, we’ve been cranking out proven business and trainings, proven business strategies and trainings that you guys can take to the bank in this series.

    [00:01:36] That we’ve been doing is all about content licensing. First of all, if you aren’t familiar with what content licensing is, go back and listen to episode number 320. These are short power packed episodes that are highly valuable delivered to you in a short period of time where you’re going to walk away with your mind absolutely blown about how you can scale your consulting business, coaching, speaking, writing business through content licensing.

    [00:01:59] So today, First of all, I’m going to share a tool. If you want to learn more about content licensing for free, you can cruise over to licensing tools. com and you can watch a free video about all about content licensing, even case studies about how I’ve licensed my content and how our clients license their content so you can get your wheels spinning.

    [00:02:21] So. Definitely go tap into that as well. So I want to talk about how to turn in your competition into your clients. This seems like really catchy when I do a, an Instagram or a LinkedIn post about this. I just get so many clicks because like, Ooh, that sounds so great. It does sound great, right? But let’s talk about the strategy of this and who this is for.

    [00:02:44] So this is for those of you guys who are established consultants, coaches, Subject matter experts, speakers or authors, and you have the trainings, you have programs, you have content, systems, methods, or frameworks that are your intellectual property. You own them and these, this content has gotten your client’s results in the past.

    [00:03:08] So you’re good at what you do. Last week’s episode, we talked about who is actually qualified to license. So if you’re wondering that, go back and listen to the previous episode here. You have this content and you’re thinking about delivering it in a licensing format, meaning you’re going to allow other companies to distribute your content or include your content in their trainings or their programs.

    [00:03:34] And the strategy here, really the question that I want to help you address is should you actually license? To your competition. So to answer that, I want to take you through a scenario here and then I’m going to share with you a story about how I did this in the past to help you even think more about it.

    [00:03:54] So the first question you need to ask yourself is, do I want to sell this myself still? And it doesn’t even have to be no. We’ll talk about that in a minute. But the first thing is with this, we’ll call it a course for the sake of this strategy here. With this course, do I want to keep selling this through my own business as you know, that one of our programs, one of our products.

    [00:04:22] If you do, that’s great. We’ll talk about that pathway in a second. If you don’t, let’s say it’s a training that you’re not even using anymore. You guys are probably sitting on so many trainings, courses, and programs here. They’re not marketing. It’s not part of your future growth of your business. They’re collecting dust on shelves, even if they aren’t even built out yet.

    [00:04:42] Like how many notebooks full of training programs, uh, have you created? So if you don’t want to sell it anymore, your business is moving in a new direction. Then this is like slam dunk. Imagine what allowing other consultants or coaches in your space would look like to actually to actually deliver your program and include your program in what they deliver to their clients.

    [00:05:10] Imagine what that would do for you. If you are no longer selling it, it doesn’t matter anymore. It’s not the future of your business. It’s not what you want to be known for anymore. One of the fastest ways to grow your network, to build amazing, mutually beneficial relationships, frankly, to build an entire network.

    [00:05:31] Which I’ll share with you about how I did this years ago of coaches and consultants in the exact same niche in the exact same space where you’re the head of that group. That’s what we’re talking about here. Imagine what that could do for your business and how you could actually scale your business by allowing your competition to license your trainings, courses, processes, systems, or methods.

    [00:05:59] If that sounds good to you, sounds good to me. I did it. Sounds good to a lot of our clients. They’re doing it. So let me tell you a story about that and then we’ll go to the other side of it for those of you guys that still want to sell it and we’ll workshop how to do that. So how I did this, let’s flashback years ago, almost 20 years ago, I feel like I’m aging myself here, especially in the, in the coaching and consulting space.

    [00:06:24] I’m like, I ran darn Nash forever. I am. One of the creators of the parent coaching industry. Okay. You guys would never know that. I know we could do a whole nother show on how we keep building and reinventing ourselves. So back in the day I helped create the baby planning, maternity concierge industry, wrote the scope of practice for it and all this stuff.

    [00:06:48] However, prior to that, I was a business strategist and coach. So I was a business coach for years, all the way back into the nineties. And then I had this, then I had what usually happens to us. Then I had three babies and I realized there needed to be a coach for new parents and that everybody was just giving me their opinion and not giving me just facts and made me mad.

    [00:07:07] So I created an entire industry called the baby planning industry. And in the process, I opened up The first fully comprehensive maternity consulting firm in the world. And it was great, you know, I was making money. I was coaching new parents, but I’ll be real honest with you guys. You know, I developed courses and trainings and programs.

    [00:07:30] I. I’m not a parent coach. It’s like the way I parent. If you guys follow me on Instagram, it’s usually totally rogue compared to the way most people parent. And I actually hated coaching other parents. I’m a business strategist. I’m a business coach. So I had this short stint and instantly I realized, Oh my gosh, I’ve done this.

    [00:07:49] This is, this is so great, but I have all these trainings and programs and courses and I don’t want to do this anymore. And of course, other parent coaches because then the industry was growing. I mean, we have Baby planters and parent coaches like all over the world now, they were coming to me for business coaching and that’s what I wanted to do because frankly, that’s what I’m good at and I wanted to consult them from a business strategy to help them build their business like I had created my first company.

    [00:08:16] Anyway, long story short, I realized that they would have been my competition, but instead what was right for me was I wanted to turn them into my clients. And so I licensed them everything, you guys. I licensed them all of my courses, all of my processes, all of my worksheets. It was an entire business in a box.

    [00:08:39] They had a parent coaching business in a box. And imagine what that did for my sales. Okay, so instead of me delivering courses and services to parents, which I really didn’t want to do, I was, you know, been there, done that. That was not who I’m made to be. Yes, I was very proud of, of the foundation of that industry and literally creating an entire coaching industry from scratch.

    [00:09:04] Very proud of that. But that had nothing to do with our parents. That was business strategy. That was my jam. And I wanted to get out of there as quickly as possible. And at the time, because the industry was so new, I really wasn’t making a ton of money coaching parents, but my company was very well known.

    [00:09:20] Right? So the money was in the going B to B, not B to C. And I knew that. And so I turned. Those people who think heavens are coming to me for help, but I turned what would have been my competition into my clients by literally licensing them all of the processes in the content that I had so that they could grow their business faster, serve their clients better and make more money and in the process.

    [00:09:46] What did I get to do? Made more money, increased my free time, went back to business strategy and consulting. As a matter of fact, what I did is I actually made so much money doing this that I was able, and I’m just going to share this because I want you guys to be thinking about the potential of what you can do.

    [00:10:05] I was able to form a non profit. I’m also an environmental non profit founder. Which again, you probably would never know unless you’re listening to this show, but I share that with you because it made me so much money that I was able to work a little bit in business strategy, license all my stuff and go f k myself.

    [00:10:22] Form a nonprofit and work with, you know, companies like the environmental working group and surf writer foundation and all these like cool environmental ocean saving groups that, you know, I totally geeked out on. I got to work with people like Mark Ruffalo, Mark Ruffalo, the actor wrote an article on me and the work that we were doing in our nonprofit.

    [00:10:43] And our nonprofit was founded by Patagonia, right? Like, or was funded by Patagonia. I share this with you because this is the power of what licensing can do. And all I did was create great content and I turned my competition into my clients and I gave them everything that I had and it was the best thing I ever did, not only for me, but for them too.

    [00:11:09] And frankly, I was really interested in growing the Parent coaching industry and I knew my services processes systems and content could also help do that on a global scale And so that’s what I’m talking about I’m talking about taking things you’ve already done if you don’t want to do them anymore It can be just one course or you can license out your whole business like I did And grow your reach exponential, exponentially, make more money and free up your time.

    [00:11:42] So that’s bucket number one. That’s if you don’t want to do it anymore. That’s a slam dunk. If that is you, I would love to help you do what I did, what I help many of our clients do. Hit me up over at SweetLife Co. com. I will help you do exactly what I did. So now let’s talk about the other side of it.

    [00:11:59] Let’s say you either still want to sell it or you’re not really sure. You know, you’re not really sure if you want to give it away yet. You don’t want to make that final decision. Totally fine. Here’s what I want you to think about. If you are going to still sell it yourself. Don’t license it to your direct competition, instead, license it to other companies that have the same end user as you.

    [00:12:23] So if you are a public speaking coach, you’re not going to license your training to another public speaking coach, but you could license it to, let’s say, a publishing house who needs their authors to know how to be confident public speakers. You could license it to a PR firm that needs their, their people, their representatives to show up confident.

    [00:12:45] So if you want to license your content confidently on TV, think about who else, what other businesses serve the same clients that can benefit that your content can actually augment their current content and elevate their current content, license it to them, not your direct competition. And if you do want to license it, so I’m going to give you just a part three.

    [00:13:05] And by the way, many of our clients do this, they kind of sit in this space for a couple of years while they’re ready to actually, you know, kind of retire some of their own content and fully, fully allow other companies to distribute it. And then number three is if you do want to keep it yourself and you want to license it directly to your competition, don’t give them the exact same thing.

    [00:13:25] I want you to keep the gold standard for yourself because I want you to be that end all be all. You’re going to charge more for it because I mean, let’s, let’s be honest, like even with licensing, nobody can replace you. You know, we’re trying to duplicate you as best as we can. We’re taking your IP, your genius, your processes, allowing other companies to distribute it, but nobody’s you.

    [00:13:49] They’re the best. You came up with it. It’s you’re a genius. So if you want to license it to competition, but keep it yourself, make sure you’re charging more, make sure you keep the best of the best of the content, and then maybe you take some pieces of it. And allow other companies that are your competition to actually take pieces of it, not the whole shebang.

    [00:14:12] So let’s recap what we talked about here. We’re talking about how to turn your competition into your clients through licensing. Number one, and I shared with you the story about how I did this way back in 2008 where I took my entire business, all my trainings and programs and allowed other coaches to utilize it.

    [00:14:34] You don’t have to give them all that you can give them just one whole course. I don’t care It doesn’t have to be the whole thing. I mean, I really hated parent coaching you guys. It just was not me Okay, so like I knew I wanted to get rid of the whole thing, right? I couldn’t wait to get back to business strategy and consulting So yeah, you have to really know if you’re gonna give away and license your whole business, right?

    [00:14:57] So whether it’s just one course or a couple of processes or a couple of trainings, you know, if you’re not going to use it anymore, awesome. That’s way number one that I’m so excited for those of you who are ready for that yet, but if you’re not ready for that, it’s totally cool. We can get you started here at way number two, where you’d license out your trainings, your processes, not to your direct competition, but to other businesses that serve the same clients.

    [00:15:22] That’s option number two. And then option number three, if you do want to keep it yourself, we’re not going to give them all of it. We can give them pieces of it. Parts of it to include in their offers your direct competition in their offers. Am I the only one like excited about this? When I talk about this, I feel like sometimes I’m sitting here in my office recording, my boys are in their rooms and my dogs are out back and I’m sitting here like so excited all by myself.

    [00:15:50] Because I know what this can do for you guys. My goal is to open up the world of content licensing for you so that you can get to do what I got to do, that you can actually choose your own adventure of your life because you’re making money of content you’ve already created. That’s what I want you to be able to do.

    [00:16:13] And that’s what we coach our clients to do. If you would like strategy consulting, if you would like to access our entire licensing project plan, every single thing from, even if you don’t have an idea of what you want to license yet, even if you’re not sure, by the way, That’s a big part of what we help our clients figure out is your strategy.

    [00:16:33] Don’t wait to ask for help for your strategy. My job is to help you navigate all the options and pick the best strategy. That’s what we do with our clients. Don’t wait for the strategy. I’ll be doing another episode on the problems of waiting for a strategy, and you can certainly subscribe and tap into those other episodes.

    [00:16:52] But please don’t, because that’s a mistake, and you can move forward and make a mistake that you can’t take back. All right. It’s been a pleasure connecting with you here today. Again, if you’re watching this on youtube, let me just be honest We’re really trying to grow our youtube channel I haven’t really tried hard before but we are now so if you could please subscribe to this I would really appreciate it and even share this episode Uh with your friends and if you’re listening on apple or spotify, thank you so much for being a listener of this show We really appreciate it All of our licensing resources can be found by visiting SweetLife Co.

    [00:17:27] com, including kickstart trainings and free videos that I would love for you to dive into. All right. It’s been fun hanging out. I will talk to you guys on the next episode. Bye for now.




    Can I Sell My Trainings to Other Companies? with April Beach (Episode 322)

    Can I Sell My Trainings to Other Companies?


    Course Creators: License Your Way to Growth. In this episode, we’re diving into the major question that’s on many of your minds: Can I license my course, training, or content? If you’re a coach, consultant, author or speaker with valuable trainings and content looking to license to other companies, you’ve come to the right place. We’re peeling back the curtain on the prerequisites for licensing to help you gauge if your content is ready for the next step. This isn’t for newbies still finding their footing – we’re looking at established business owners who are already good at what they do. If you’re wondering how to leverage your expertise and extend your influence, then this is for you.
    We cover the key ingredients that make your content license-ready. You might be surprised to learn that your program doesn’t need to be fully built before licensing— in fact, it’s better if it’s not. Save yourself time and adopt a strategic mindset to turn your proven methods into licensing gold. I share insights on positioning your business for the future and discuss how important it is to think about how licensing will shape your brand in the long term. Plus, you’ll hear an inspiring case study about a client who licensed her yet-to-be-created course for a whopping seven-figure sum!
    End Results:
    • You’ll be positioned to start considering if licensing is a suitable growth strategy for your business.
    • Understand the necessity to provide predictable, transformational, measurable results through your content.
    • Gain insight into the strategic foresight required for long-term thought leadership and brand positioning.
    • Discover the potential to turn your expertise into a licensed program, even if it’s not fully developed.
    • Learn from real-life success stories to inspire your own journey in content licensing.
    • Resources Mentioned:
    • Free licensing business growth tools: visit sweetlifeco.com
    • Licensing 101 Video: licensing-tools.com
    • Million Dollar Licensing Offer Masterclass: For those who need guidance in curating their curriculum for licensing.
    Resources Section:
    – Access free licensing business growth tools, strategies, and worksheets at: https://www.sweetlifeco.com
    – For a Licensing 101 video and immediate resources, head to: https://licensing-tools.com
    – Million Dollar Licensing Offer Masterclass for curating your curriculum: Learn more through our resources at sweetlifeco.com. 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:46] Hey there. Welcome back to the show. Today we are answering the question. Can I license my course? Yes. Training for content. And so if that’s what you’re looking for, you are in the right place. I’m April Beach host here at the Sweetlife Entrepreneur Podcast and CEO of the SweetLife Company. And I’ve been teaching experts, coaches, and consultants to license our content for over a decade.

    [00:01:09] And I want to unpack who this episode is actually for. So if you are a subject matter expert, we’re Coach consultant, you may be an author or a speaker and you have trainings and content that you’re interested in licensing to other companies. I want to unpack some prerequisites for licensing here to help you identify whether or not your content is ready.

    [00:01:32] So if that’s what you’re looking for, this is episode number 322. You can find all of the resources and tap into our free licensing, business growth, business tools, videos, strategies, worksheets by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. All right. So this is for those of you guys who are established business owners. So.

    [00:01:54] Let’s take a little hint from that. The idea here is that you need to be good at what you do. So prerequisite number one, you need to be able to deliver results. If you are a brand new coach, a brand new consultant, welcome to the world of coaching and consulting. It is growing rapidly. It has been growing rapidly, especially over the last decade.

    [00:02:16] And we want to make sure that before you give another company permission to actually utilize it, that you have a proven record of getting people results. So prerequisite number one is, do you have a system, process, curriculum, an outline, a methodology, a framework? Do you have a way of taking people from one place to another place?

    [00:02:45] Or businesses from one place to another place. We’ve talked about this on shows over the years. We actually teach this when we teach million dollar offer engineering. But the key phrase I want you to ask yourself is, does my program, content curriculum, whatever it is, deliver predictable, transformational, measurable results?

    [00:03:10] Are you capable of doing that? Now, one of the things I do want to say is number two is you actually don’t even have to have a thriving, established coaching and consulting business. And I’m going to share with you a case study of one of our clients who was very good at what she did, but she didn’t even have her consulting business launched.

    [00:03:29] She wasn’t even in her own independent business space. She was just very good at what she did based on her professional background. So I don’t want you to think, Oh my gosh, I don’t have a business. I don’t have all these followers, by the way, followers do not equal the value of what you deliver. Those are vanity metrics.

    [00:03:47] We don’t even look at those. The reality is, is can you deliver companies or individuals reason results and, and have you done that in the past? That is the most important thing. Now, number two, and this is probably going to surprise you and I’m going to save you time. I’m hoping to save you time. Your program does not have to be built all the way out.

    [00:04:09] As a matter of fact, and I will be doing more podcast episodes about this, so make sure you’re subscribed and we can hang out together. I can keep pouring into you. As a matter of fact, taking the time to build your program out could greatly hurt you, which I will be unpacking why that is in other episodes.

    [00:04:26] It doesn’t have to be built into a place. As a matter of fact, when we talk to new clients that are considering working with us to help them build out their licensing packages and in pricing and sell them, oftentimes I hear, well, I just keep need to work on it. I need to build it first. That is absolutely not the case.

    [00:04:46] So if you do not have a course built or a training built yet, I But you still have a proven method for getting people results. You can totally move into licensing and I actually don’t want you to wait. You know, there are so many different strategies when we talk about scaling, coaching and consulting businesses.

    [00:05:05] There’s so many different strategies about selling something before you build it. I have to say that I am usually not an advocate of that. In that coaching and consulting space, I at least want us to be frameworked out to have a built in an LMS to understand the user experience and in the client experience and the transformational benchmarks.

    [00:05:27] If we were just talking about building and growing your coaching and consulting business on the B to C side. Normally, I’m not a huge advocate about totally winging it, pulling something out of the air. Actually, I’m never an advocate of just pulling something out of the air. And selling it. But a lot of coaches say to do that on that side of the business, and I’m sure they have their reasoning and strategies.

    [00:05:49] Normally, I’m not that person, guys. Okay? I’m just going to be honest. But, now we go over and we talk about content licensing and whether or not you are able to release your content. Now we’re talking about the fact of selling a proven method, curriculum, strategy or process that can be built out later, according to who you license it to.

    [00:06:13] So number one, you have to be really good at what you do. Number two, you don’t have to have it built yet. As a matter of fact, please don’t take the time to build it, because time is money. Is money, especially when we’re talking about content licensing. If you’re thinking about doing this, you’re thinking about getting into it and you’re like, Oh, well, I don’t really have the time and I don’t, you know, I’m not really ready to start in it.

    [00:06:35] You are absolutely losing money. Thousands and thousands, if not hundreds of thousands of dollars. Okay. So just be mindful of that. And you know, the other thing, and this is number three, I’m going to share with you here on this particular show, I told you these are going to be high value short time, so you can binge them and move on to the next one.

    [00:06:54] The other one is something that I really want you, if you can take away anything from today’s show, please take away this in order to license your content. We need to know what you want your next five to 10 years of your business and life to look like. And oftentimes that seems like so big, especially if you are new into an industry like licensing, like most people are, because it’s still this best kept secret.

    [00:07:23] It’s one of those things that with licensing, We can’t take it back, okay? So let me expand on that a little bit. If you were to launch a course, or a training program, or a retreat, or a mastermind, and you do it, and you go through the process, and maybe you liked it a couple times, and you got burned out on it, and you just, you can stop.

    [00:07:45] You can stop selling it. When you license, And you give permission to another company to distribute your content. It’s for the term of a license agreement. And so once you put it out there, you can’t take it back. And so let me tell you why this is important for the context of, of what we’re saying here today.

    [00:08:02] And, and I don’t want to scare you away from this, but I want to be fully honest with you. Because a lot of coaches, consultants, and experts come to me for help licensing something that they did not get coaching on before, and they made a lot of mistakes and they can’t take them back. And that’s one of the reasons why I decided to do this podcast series, because I want to save you from these mistakes.

    [00:08:27] Okay? And so here’s what I want you to take away from this show. I want you to ask yourself, what do I want to be known for in regards to this training or content for the next five to 10 years? If you’re in a place like frankly, many of our clients are, let me give you a little bit of behind the scenes here where you’ve been in business and you’re looking for your next level business model, you’re looking to free up your time and increase your profit and truly scale, then licensing is a great opportunity for you.

    [00:09:02] But here’s the question. What you license, or I should say, what will you license? Because what you license. We don’t get to take back and I want you to be thinking about how well known you want to be for that content Are you okay with the thought of another business? Distributing your training and content if this is the mountain you’re gonna die on and you want to become the thought leader And you want to be the end all be all company to directly deliver that particular training B2C then who you license it to Matters We’re not going to license it to your competition.

    [00:09:44] And so those are just some of the things that I want you to be thinking about. When clients come in to work with us for licensing, the very, very first thing, phase one of our licensing plan is positioning. And that’s what I’m sharing with you here today on this show. I want you to understand the importance of how you want to position yourself in the next three steps.

    [00:10:04] Five, 10, 15, 20 years. How do you want your thought leadership to be positioned? How do we want your brand to be positioned? We can do it any way you want. I’m not saying you’re going to lose it all. As a matter of fact, we build thought leaders through licensing. Let me say that again. We build thought leaders through licensing.

    [00:10:25] I want you to sit with that, but what we give away, what you’re thinking about extending out to others will be affected based on your personal professional goals in your company goals. And so those are the three things I wanted to unpack on this show. Who can license their content, right? So number one, you have to be good at what you do.

    [00:10:49] You have to have a methodology, content, framework, training, course, or process. Whether it’s built or not, that gets people, remember these three words, predictable, transformational, measurable results. If you don’t have that yet, even if it’s not built out, but if you don’t have your content, your method, your process, your curriculum built out, cruise over.

    [00:11:16] We are happy to help you. We have our million dollar licensing offer masterclass where we actually teach you how to curate your curriculum to build your licensing offers. It’s called offer engineer. That’s where you should be. And that’s where you are. Awesome. We are here to help you. But if you already have that, you’ve had that for years, you’re an expert in your space, then great.

    [00:11:38] Well, you know, skip to step number two, don’t worry about guessing where it needs to be built out. You just take what you have, whatever the structure of that looks like. And then we get to take it into step number three, which understanding how you want to position yourself as a thought leader in the future, that’s going to help you package up your material to license it.

    [00:11:57] And so those are the three steps I want you to be processing, and I can’t overestimate how important your understanding of your strategy is in, in this whole process. If you want to be known for your work, thinking about that, and we can make you as known as known can be, or we can make you a ghost and still make hundreds of thousands of dollars through licensing your content.

    [00:12:22] But it’s up to you. And the point I’m making to you is once you decide that, we can’t. Really take it back. And so those are the things I want you to be thinking about. And that’s why I am recording this show in this video for you. If you are finding us on YouTube, our new YouTube channel, I’m so stoked that you’re here.

    [00:12:39] Please subscribe to this. We would love to continue to pour into you. Now, let me tell you. Go ahead and share with you a case study like I promised I would about one of our clients who didn’t have a consulting business and didn’t even have a course built. As a matter of fact, her case study, um, she just closed.

    [00:12:59] Two of our first licensing deals in this past week of recording this show, but I did do a whole 30 minute interview with her where she shares her process. She went through that also can be found cruise over to our YouTube channel as well, where you can really hear behind the scenes and the details. But I just want to share this story with you so that you are aware.

    [00:13:18] So this particular client was a professor. Okay. So she did have an established area of expertise. She’s been a teacher. She has her doctorate. You know, she has been in the corporate world for a very long time. So she’s worked with companies. She’s developed plans and processes in curriculum within companies.

    [00:13:39] So she, she was great at it. And she just licensed her course, That’s based on her intellectual property, but it’s not yet built anywhere to multiple universities. And her first check is 142, 000. Her licensing deal for one university is over a million dollars for one course that she hasn’t even built yet that’s based on her expertise.

    [00:14:07] And if you want to tap into her case study, and she’s not the only one. I mean, it seems ridiculous. As a matter of fact, I was saying this in one of our live streams where I was like, I can’t even share this case study. People are going to think this is absolute bullshit. Like this is crazy to take a course that isn’t even built, but from established IP and license it for over a million dollars.

    [00:14:28] She’s a single mom. She’s a professional. She’s awesome. And frankly, she’s just like you. And so those are the things that can happen with licensing. You don’t have to have it built yet. You just have to have content that is proven, even if it’s from your own brain and your own teaching and your own workshops and your own expertise, maybe it’s from your book.

    [00:14:49] Many of our clients, we turn their books into a license program. We turn their signature talks into a license program. Maybe it’s from one of those places, but you don’t have to have a built out yet. And that’s what I want you to walk away with. That is the mind blowing that I want you to gather when we’re talking about content licensing.

    [00:15:10] So if you want to know more about content licensing, cruise over to our website at SweetLifeCo. com where you will find tools and resources to get started with content licensing totally free. You can also cruise over to licensing co. com. Tools dot com. And it’s going to take you immediately to a licensing 101 video.

    [00:15:33] You can put me on fast forward where I’m going to go through case studies to get your wheels spinning even more about different ways that you can take your content, whether or not you’re even selling it could be content you’re selling or contents collecting dust, and we can license it to other companies and expand your reach.

    [00:15:51] And I’m not going to be the police here on who’s ready to license our content and who isn’t. I want to be, I’ll be honest with you. We’ve seen, this is a, this is a little raw April beach here. If you’ve been following this podcast, you know that I’ve just kind of say what’s on my mind in the history of the coaching and consulting space, especially as it’s grown online.

    [00:16:09] We have seen a lot of coaches that frankly are not good at what they do. Uh, we’ve even seen some opportunities where people are releasing something called the master resale license, where they’re teaching people how to do their thing. And then giving them like a business in a box. And these people are in most cases, not very qualified to do that.

    [00:16:26] You know, you’ve probably seen some of these things coming around. That’s not what we do. That’s not what we as a company do with content licensing. We work with established experts to license their content out to other companies, nonprofits, corporations, other coaches and consultants, universities, and not all here in the United States, across the world.

    [00:16:47] And that’s what we can do for you too. So please subscribe to this YouTube channel and follow us on Instagram and DM me on LinkedIn. I am always available to answer your questions because I geek out on this stuff because I know it can do for you and your business. Thank you so much for tuning in here to the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast.

    [00:17:07] This is episode number 322, and we’re going to be continuing our series where I’m answering the most common questions I receive about how to license your content to scale your business. All right. Bye bye for now.




    Why is Content Licensing The Fastest Way To Scale? with April Beach (Episode 321)

    Why is Content Licensing The Fastest Way To Scale?


    Free asset link   How to License your Content to Scale your Business & Increase Profit 


    Why is content licensing one of the fastest ways to scale? If you’ve been establishing your expertise in your domain and possess a trove of valuable content that other businesses could benefit from, this episode of the SweetLife® Podcast is curated with your needs in mind. What we’re talking about today isn’t just an opportunity to broaden your business horizons—it’s a transformative approach that can substantially enhance your profit margins and free up your time. I share insights that are particularly important for subject matter experts, coaches, consultants, speakers, authors, and leaders who are looking to upscale the dissemination of their knowledge without increasing their workload.

    In this podcast, we unpack specific strategies that fundamentally change the traditional growth model. From sharing firsthand how I licensed a single course and exponentially multiplied its reach, to discussing the potential of licensing your content to other companies who can then market your intellectual property. We cover the successes of content licensing, the practical steps in the process, and how I have helped clients in the past decade, utilize these strategies to reduce their effort while massively scaling up their businesses. My experience and the case studies we dive into serve as a testament to the substantial impact that wisely implemented content licensing can bring to your enterprise.

    Key Takeaways from Today’s Episode:

    • Get to grips with the actual mechanics of content licensing and how it can act as a catalyst for rapid business scaling.
    • Hear inspiring stories and case studies that demonstrate the successful implementation of content licensing from my clients and me.
    • Discern specific strategies for using content licensing to multiply your reach without proportionally increasing your effort, time, or costs.
    • Discover who is best suited for content licensing — it’s aimed at established professionals armed with content ready for wider distribution.
    • Learn how one course or training can be licensed in various ways, from individual trainers to large organizations, for broad-reaching impact. 
    • Content licensing isn’t just a buzzword; it’s a robust business model that can augment the reach and profitability of your content. We’re talking about a strategic movement that could revolutionize the way you think about and engage with the growth of your business.

    Free asset link   How to License your Content to Scale your Business & Increase Profit  https://www.sweetlifeco.com/email-capture-501e66ad-8462-482e-96b3-f755e65c0f9d

    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:28]  Hey there. In this episode, number 321, we are answering the question. Why is content licensing one of the fastest ways to scale? Welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I’m excited to dive in with you. First of all, who is this show for? It’s for established subject matter experts, coaches, consultants, speakers, and authors. You guys are really good at what you do.

    [00:01:07] You have trainings and programs and processes and models and content that can be useful for other businesses. And we’re diving into why is content licensing such a magical, fast, scalable. Business opportunity. If you aren’t familiar with what content licensing is, go back and listen to episode 320 where I unpack the actual definition of content licensing for you.

    [00:01:32] So in this show, we’re going to unpack here. Why is content licensing a fast scalable option and who it’s for? I’m also going to share with you stories. I promise you guys in this entire series we’re doing on content licensing that I want you to hear stories from my clients and And for me about how we have licensed their content, because there is no cookie cutter way.

    [00:01:55] And the purpose of sharing you stories with you short stories and case studies is that I want you to be able to think in your own mind, Oh my gosh, this could work for me. Or what about a variation of this? And that’s how it could work for me as well. And so. Everything that I want to pour into you here is all strategy and it’s proven regarding my experience over the last decade, consulting subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants about how to scale your business through content licensing.

    [00:02:25] So now let’s go ahead and dive in. First of all, what is scaly, right? So I have other podcast episodes on the dish on the difference between growth and scale, and I feel like it’s important to actually do a basic definition of that here. So. Growing is where we increase our investments. We usually increase our costs, but also we’re increasing our profit.

    [00:02:46] So we’re investing more, whether it’s more time or more money or more teams or more ad spend in order to actually grow the profit. Scaling is where we are not increasing our costs. We are not increasing our time. Scaling is where that is staying the same. And we’re going to talk about the magic of content licensing, because that actually goes down while we’re increasing our profits.

    [00:03:09] So in order to truly scale, I know that word is thrown around a lot in the coaching and consulting space, but in order to truly scale, this actually means thinking about what is this strategy where I can increase my profit, actually decrease my workload while increasing my free time and the It doesn’t require me to spend a whole lot more time and money to do that.

    [00:03:32] So, If that’s what you’re looking for, stay with me here. So let’s talk a little bit about the history of the coaching and consulting space I’ve been coaching coaches for 27 years with an area of expertise and specialty to online coaches and consultants since 2006 so really low time. I don’t even know how long that is.

    [00:03:51] It’s 2024 right now. So With that being said, initially, like the really big buzz around scaling was going from one on one to one on group, and that is a very important way to scale. We work with our clients all the time to actually model and grow their consulting programs in that way, right? But I just, I want to define what we know about scaling as far as the majority of the knowledge of the coaching and consulting space so far.

    [00:04:18] So we know that going one on one to one on group is a really great and powerful way to scale. We also know that doing things like pre recording trainings and putting them on demand. So evergreen online courses is another really great way to scale. So basically you’re, you’re teaching the same content, but too many people at a time.

    [00:04:38] That is a very powerful way to grow your business. So let’s kind of leave that sitting here on this beautiful platter because that is scaling, coaching and consulting businesses. Now I want to elevate a different dining room table, if you will, and I want to open up the opportunity for something that will blow your mind when terms of scaling from that first platter.

    [00:05:07] If you have an established course. Training, content, process, methodology that you have been teaching to people, whether it’s one on one, you don’t even have to have scaled it on that side of the business. Imagine now allowing for other companies to teach it for you. Imagine allowing other companies to actually distribute that content and training for you.

    [00:05:40] Imagine what that would do because even in a traditional scaling model, you’re still the one doing it, or if you did advance to the point that you have somebody on your team doing it, that’s awesome, but it’s still coming from the effort of your company. Okay, so it’s still coming from the effort that is put into the service, the consulting, the product, whether it’s on demand or it’s live being delivered from you or your team or your company.

    [00:06:10] And let’s just be really honest with all the marketing in the world, you’re only going to affect so many people. What are you going to have, like 8 billion students in your online course, right? That’s just. That’s a silly thing to say, right? It’s totally impossible. So there is only so much you can do, even with all the ad spend and all the marketing and all the reach and all the partners and all the Instagram followers and all the YouTube subscribers.

    [00:06:37] There’s only so much you can do because it’s still coming from the effort of your company. Whereas with content licensing, now imagine, so you’re selling it here. Let me go back to the other side first. You still have to sell it to each one of the individuals. Who’s going to be in there, whether they’re one on one or one on group.

    [00:06:54] It’s still your sales process. Now imagine selling it one time to another company and they turn around and either sell it or distribute it to all of their people. You only have to sell it or license it once and they get to flood your intellectual property All of their people. They’re the ones that do the effort to sell it to enroll people into it.

    [00:07:24] That is the power of content licensing. Imagine taking that same course that you have been teaching in whatever format that was or that same training or that same live workshop that you’ve been going into organizations and delivering this workshop. Maybe that same process that you’ve been taking other teams through and rather than you doing it, imagine another company enrolling people into it, selling it, getting the buy in and delivering your processes and trainings and programs on your behalf.

    [00:08:00] We can go sell one to one and fill up a training program with 100 people in it. Imagine what selling one to one company would do when you are going to reap the benefits of 100, 500, 1000, or 10, 000 people receiving that training. That is the ultimate exponential scalability. That’s what we’re talking about here with content licensing and it’s so big sometimes like the potential of the reach is so huge that you might feel like, Oh my gosh, I just, you know, I’m not ready for this and I’m going to be sharing other podcast episodes with you on who’s ready, who’s qualified to do this, but just here in this space with me today.

    [00:08:46] Just give yourself a minute to absorb that instead of enrolling students, clients, people into your training one on one, even if it’s scaled, even if you’re teaching in a group format, imagine selling it to one business business, one company, whether it’s a huge organization or a coach, just like you who enrolls their students into it.

    [00:09:08] And that is the power of content licensing, and that’s why I want to share with you. It is truly one of the fastest ways to scale because we have all these other strategies that work well. Again, I’ve been teaching clients how to do it for years and years, but this, this is the one way where we know that we can duplicate you faster while reducing your time and in the end of it, extending the reach of your work because that’s what people want.

    [00:09:35] That’s what everybody wants. And so, I promised you that I would share stories and case studies about my own experiences with licensing and our clients experiences with licensing. So, here’s your story of the day. Alright, so, in the last episode, I shared a story about how I licensed one training program.

    [00:09:55] And I licensed that one training program to one brick and mortar and then a group of brick and mortar businesses. Now, I’m going to tell you what happened next, which is so cool. I took that same course. Listen to this and I licensed it to 10 other coaches just like me all around the United States and then it gets even better.

    [00:10:20] And then I charged for sponsorships of that course to product manufacturers. I kept the money for that. And then the course was promoted with huge media outlets, like at the time, um, Whole Foods Market, not a media outlet, but Whole Foods Market sponsored the class. Um, the Bunk, the Bunk. com magazine sponsored the class.

    [00:10:43] The Environmental Working Group sponsored the class. I had huge sponsors where my company was able to keep the sponsorship money. And I was able to profit by licensing the opportunity to be able to teach my course across the country by other coaches. They paid me for that. Imagine what that can do for your business.

    [00:11:03] You guys, this is from one course. One course that was well engineered, that was a sought after training, I was able to license it to other consultants, let me say that again, and sell sponsorships into that class. I did nothing. I did nothing but sell the sponsorships, release the content, release the content license agreement, and away they went.

    [00:11:27] And I, at the time when I did this, I had three baby boys. I was working from home like I still do, and my boys were at the time probably six, four and three years old. You can imagine what my house was like, how crazy it was. I was literally sitting in my office on the other side of the wall. They were like building Legos and.

    [00:11:50] Probably throwing each other down the stairs. It didn’t require me to be some strategic licensing expert. It was so much easier than you think. And I just want to open up the world of licensing to you. Imagine that because before I had done that. Again, I had been teaching my trainings and courses one on one to clients and yes, I did have online courses at the time.

    [00:12:13] Yes, we had online courses back in 2007 and 2008. Imagine what this could do for your business. Imagine what that life would look like for you. And that’s what I want to share with you on today’s podcast, taking one course, one training and imagine what you can do with it. And that’s the power of content licensing.

    [00:12:34] And that’s exactly what we teach our clients to do so that you can do the same thing that I did and many of our clients did. So if you’re interested in learning more about scaling through licensing and you want to work with us, you can cruise over to SweetLifeCo. com. Certainly subscribe to our YouTube channel.

    [00:12:53] I’m always releasing content and strategies that are proven that you can take to the bank. And if you want to tap in, we have an actual free licensing 101 video where I actually break out the four different case studies about how I got started in licensing. This is one of four other ways that are going to blow your mind, not because I’m great, because it’s going to blow your own mind about your own ability and your own potential to do this yourself.

    [00:13:20] And I’m so excited for you to experience this and just to be able to open up the world of licensing to you and certainly to be able to hold your hand and guide you through it. So if you want to tap into that video, cruise over to licensing dash tools. com. And there’s a free licensing one on one video where I unpack case studies that will blow your own mind for yourself.

    [00:13:41] That’s what we want for you. This is episode 321 here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast. I’m April Beach. If we’ve never met before, shoot me a message on LinkedIn. I’d love to connect with you. You can also follow us on Instagram. We are always here to answer your questions. Thanks so much for listening to the show and I will talk to you in the new episode.




    What is Content Licensing? with April Beach (Episode 320)

    What is Content Licensing?
    Episode Bonus: Video on HOW TO LICENSE YOUR CONTENT TO SCALE YOUR BUSINESS & INCREASE PROFIT.  To watch visit https://licensing-tools.com/
    We’re starting a new series focused on the transformative power of content licensing – a strategy to scale your business, increase profits, and gain more free time. If you’re an established business owner adept in your field and curious about content licensing, this episode is specifically curated for you. However, if you’re new to the business world, I suggest revisiting our past episodes to build your foundational knowledge first.
    In this episode, we dive into the nitty-gritty of content licensing. What is it, exactly? How can it be a pivotal part of your business growth? I’m here to unpack these questions, offering clear insights and strategies. Content licensing isn’t just a concept; it’s a viable option for expanding your business reach. We’re going to discuss how leveraging the courses, trainings, and content you’ve already developed can open doors to new opportunities. Through real-life examples and case studies, you’ll see how content licensing has been a game-changer for many, including myself and my clients.
    Key Takeaways from Today’s Episode:
    1. Deep Dive into Content Licensing: Get a comprehensive understanding of what content licensing involves and how it can be a turning point for your business’s growth.
    2. Real Business Cases: Learn from stories and case studies that illustrate the successful application of content licensing in various businesses.
    3. Strategies for Scaling Up: Discover specific strategies for using content licensing to not only enhance profits but also to assert your expertise and thought leadership in your niche.
    4. For Whom It’s Meant: This episode is tailored for those looking to significantly upgrade their business operations. If you’re not yet at this stage, our previous content will be more suited to your current needs.
    5. Exclusive Insights and Tips: Benefit from the direct experiences and advice I share, grounded in proven success and practical application.
    In this episode, we’re talking about leveraging what you’ve already created to add value to other businesses and, in turn, to your own. It’s about understanding the strategic importance of content licensing and how it can radically change the way you do business. So, let’s get started on this exciting journey to unlocking the full potential of your content!
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:50] Hey, you guys. Today we are starting a whole new series. series that we’re going to be diving into regarding the power of content licensing. That is how to license your courses, contents, trainings to scale your business, increase your profits, and actually also increase your free time. I’m so glad that you’re here.

    [00:01:06] If you are not an established business owner, this whole new series moving forward is based Probably a little bit too far ahead, a little bit too far advanced for you. Please pause and go back and binge all of our seven years of suite life entrepreneur podcast episodes. You can actually sort all of our episodes by topic on our website found at suite life code.

    [00:01:25] com to get what you need. Today we are diving into what is content licensing. So this is specifically for those of you who you’re very good at what you do and you want to scale your business and you’re wondering how or if content licensing is an option for you moving forward. So I’m going to unpack exactly what content licensing is for you so that you know if you want to keep moving forward with us.

    [00:01:49] In our strategy, in our show, in our content, and possibly in our consulting, if we can help you move in this direction at the end of this, you are going to be able to spin your wheels and say, wow, yes, I want to learn more. This is a really cool opportunity for me because content licensing is one of those things that is shh.

    [00:02:08] Nobody knows a lot about, and so I’m going to unpack actually what it is, and I’m going to share with you stories and case studies from myself and my clients over the course of podcast episodes in videos with you. So you can not only hear the strategy and understand the strategy, but see how the model of content licensing can work for your business.

    [00:02:30] These are all very short, compact videos and episodes that you can dive into and binge. And so let’s go ahead and dive right in. First of all, little disclaimer, I am not an attorney. And so you should definitely seek legal advice from an attorney for all of your legal contracting needs. The consulting and advice that I’m giving you here is for general educational purposes for you to use.

    [00:02:54] And I’m going to be sharing with you stories that you can apply to your business. Now with that being said, the things I’m sharing with you are absolutely strategic and they are proven and they work from a business strategy standpoint. So let’s go ahead and dive in. First of all, What actually is content licensing?

    [00:03:12] Content licensing is giving another company the ability to use or distribute your content. So it’s not selling it to them. You’re not giving them ownership of it. It’s like renting your content to another organization. And what does that actually look like for you? So if you are sitting on courses, trainings, content, content that you’ve created, Systems, methods, processes, frameworks, then you are in a prime position to allow other businesses to utilize it.

    [00:03:43] So picture this. How long did it take you to develop those processes and trainings and programs? How many years did you put into the development of your course? And how many thousands of hours did you put into establishing yourself potentially as an expert in your space? Other businesses, they don’t have the time or capacity.

    [00:04:05] And frankly, they’re smart enough to know that they don’t want to start from scratch. They don’t want to create something that you already have the solution to. So other companies are constantly looking for different opportunities to bring your trainings in to either. their employees, their staff, their users, and even to include in their own trainings and programs externally to their own clients is actually selling it as a separate product or selling it as a product suite.

    [00:04:35] So you’re probably familiar with music licensing and imagery licensing. You probably use pictures or you’ve licensed stock photography before, you know, here, It in the intro to our suite life entrepreneur podcast, there’s some music that we had to license to be able to use. That is pretty common. Most people are familiar with that, but what we do at the suite life company is totally different.

    [00:05:00] We help our clients actually license your intellectual property, the content in the processes and the trainings that you’ve created. And so that’s what content licensing is. And so this is a power packed episode just to open up the world of licensing to you. So when our clients hear about licensing, it usually comes across their plate in a few different ways.

    [00:05:23] Either a company approaches them and says, wow, you know, that was a really great talk or really great training or an individual, um, CEO of another company says, Oh my gosh, I want your training and our program for our clients. Those are usually the ways that people actually come into the world of licensing because it isn’t so widely known that most subject matter experts don’t go out there and go, Hmm, I think I’m going to just start licensing my stuff that I would say about 80 percent of our clients have actually entered the world of licensing because they’re so good at what they do and they have such great trainings that they have an audience that is asking for their content.

    [00:06:03] If you’ve ever been in a place. Where let’s say you have a partner, it’s another coach or another consultant, maybe somebody that runs masterminds or as somebody of a CEO of another company that says, wow, how much would it cost me to bring your training in, to use it for our clients? So most people in the coaching and consulting space consider that, Oh, well, it’s just a bonus to their training or, you know, I’m just gonna, I’m just going to add it in there and, and maybe generate leads from it.

    [00:06:32] But the technical term for that is licensing. That means you are giving them permission to actually rent and replay your content, to distribute your content within another program. And. Most businesses don’t have the right agreements in place for that because it’s like a spit in a handshake. And sure, I’ll give you a training to, to use as to use in your program.

    [00:06:51] And sometimes that’s totally fine. Especially if it’s just a one time thing, no big deal. But what I’m talking about here with content licensing is where we take your whole program or your whole course or a significant part of your course and actually allow other companies to add it and augment their current programs with it or to sell it as one of their own trainings And that’s when licensing really becomes a game changer.

    [00:07:18] Yes, you can absolutely do what a lot of my friends call embedded partnerships, where you just add a little piece of content into their training program, or you can take it to the next level and you can develop a licensing business model that you’re not just doing that with one business or one buddy and their program.

    [00:07:35] You are actually inserting your program into multiple training programs across the world. And that is the power of content licensing. And so my goal here in this podcast is just to open up the potential for you. First of all, so do you know the difference between licensing and selling? We are not selling.

    [00:07:57] You’re only giving somebody permission to rent and distribute your content per the terms of the agreement that you set forward. And then secondly, it is usually for a term that you can continue to offer renewals. And frankly, the goal of this is to expand the reach of your work. There’s no way, and we’re going to be talking about this in, in future episodes.

    [00:08:22] I’m asked, I’m answering all of your licensing questions here on the Suite Life Entrepreneur Podcast and on LinkedIn and YouTube. There’s no way you can actually expand the reach of your work to the point. With your marketing it yourself with your own teams. I don’t care how much money you have to put into ads, how many partners you have.

    [00:08:43] Expanding the reach of your work through content licensing gives you exponential results. And if you are like, frankly, most of our clients, one of the most important things to you is actually expanding the reach of your work and helping more people and helping more businesses and being significant in making the deep, true impact for other companies.

    [00:09:03] And they’re individual users. That’s what we’re talking about with content licensing. And it’s absolutely my joy to open up the world of content licensing for you. I have a free video that you guys, if you’re watching this and you want to dive in more and hear case studies and really start your wheel spinning, cruise over to licensing tools.

    [00:09:24] com. com that’s licensing tools. com and you can binge our licensing 101 getting started video totally free. It is going to blow your mind. So let me share with you a story about one of the ways I got started with content licensing. I had this amazing course. And it was a course that I had developed to work one on one with my clients and I shared it with them virtually.

    [00:09:51] This is back in 2007, you guys, long time ago, and I was selling it as an on demand online course as well. And so I had that set up and I was using it with my own business and it within my own tools. And I had a friend who had a brick and mortar retail store and she said to me, wow, April, I would love to have your course for my staff members to teach.

    [00:10:15] In person to increase foot traffic into our brick and mortar store. So she identified that I had a course. It was just one course, you guys, and it was valuable in that having my course or permission to teach my course in her brick and mortar store here in Denver, Colorado was a big deal. A great way for them to start marketing more, increasing foot traffic.

    [00:10:38] And so one of my first licensing endeavors was giving that brick and mortar store permission to teach my class. It seems very simple, right? But think about the beauty of this. It was a class I’d already created. Number one, number two, this particular business was not in competition with me. So then teaching my class was really beneficial for them and it wasn’t hurting my business whatsoever.

    [00:11:02] We had the same audience, but different businesses and different business purposes. And I was able to make money off somebody else teaching my course without ever having to show up and do it myself. On top of that, I also got the credit. Everybody knew it was a course by me. So when these people went to the course, they recognized me and my company as a thought leader in this space.

    [00:11:29] It was a win win for everybody. So let me recap this. I had a course that I was still using in my business to consulting business, both with clients one on one and selling it on demand for clients. As an online course. Number two, another company asked if they could use it. Absolutely. Yes. Number three, it was in no competition with me whatsoever.

    [00:11:51] And it was a benefit to this brick and mortar store as well as a benefit to their end users, as well as a benefit to me. So I ended up making money by licensing my course. to this brick and mortar store. And let me tell you what happened after this. After this, I went on to license my course, this particular, this one course to brick and mortar boutique retailers all over the country.

    [00:12:19] As a matter of fact, I had one chain that had 15 stores that licensed my course in all of their stores. So that is one of many licensing stories I want to share with you so that you can start thinking about, Hey, would this work for my business? Is this something that would be really a great opportunity for me to scale my reach and increase my profits while, like I said, increasing my free time and increasing your thought leadership through licensing?

    [00:12:49] That is one of the ways that content licensing can benefit you. And over the course of the next couple of weeks and months here on this show and all of the resources that our company is actually focusing on for you is all around content licensing. We are your go to strategists and consultants to understand how to package in price in model up your licensing offers to sell them to other small businesses just like you.

    [00:13:18] All the way up to universities, the government, corporations, and nonprofits. Those are all of the places that our clients license their content and their curriculum into. So thank you so much for listening to this show. I promised you power packed episodes. I want you to leave listening to this super excited about the potential that licensing can play for your business future and having resources that you can start rolling with.

    [00:13:42] Of course, please subscribe to this show on YouTube and And on all of your podcasts, listening devices, you can visit us. If you already know you need help immediately, you can go to suite life co. com and you can apply to work with us or join one of our licensing courses. We are always here for you and I can’t wait to help you see the future with this.

    [00:14:02] It is an absolute game changer. All right. This is episode number 320. You can visit that in the show notes as well. Take care guys. Talk to you soon.




    10 Ways To Make 50K In The Next 6 Weeks with April Beach (Episode 319)

    10 Ways To Make 50K In The Next 6 Weeks
    Episode Bonus:
    Licensing Launchpad™ – Use code “PODCAST” to access free   https://www.sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide
    Download Ultimate Guide To Online Offers and Business Models – https://www.sweetlifeco.com/licensinglaunchpad
    This episode is a treasure trove for established coaches, consultants, subject matter experts, and service-based entrepreneurs who’ve been serving clients and are ready to take things up a notch. We’re delving into 10 innovative strategies to boost your revenue by $50,000 in the next six weeks. It’s all about actionable advice, proven systems, and strategies that April Beach has refined over 27 years as a business coach. However, if you’re just starting out, this might not be the episode for you just yet. Remember, this is about matching your dedication with the right strategies to build a profitable consulting and coaching business with integrity.
    In this episode we’re diving deep into specifics. Expect to learn about personalized mentorship and the unique advantages it offers, like connecting deeply with your clients and sharing your hard-earned wisdom. VIP days, another gem, provide an intensive, focused experience that can significantly uplift your business. And let’s not forget about course licensing “quick sales” – an ingenious method to extend your reach and earnings without the heavy lifting of delivery. We’re also unpacking 7 more powerful ways you can bring in extra money like planning retreats, launching new programs, and effective cost-cutting, and more. All are designed to elevate your business swiftly and effectively.
    1. Enhanced Revenue Strategies: Learn techniques to significantly increase your income in a short time frame, specifically designed for established professionals in coaching and consulting.
    2. Business Growth Insights: Gain insights into unique and practical strategies, such as personalized mentorship, VIP days, and licensing your content, to expand your business reach and enhance client engagement – plus 7 more options to choose from. 
    3. Operational Efficiency: Discover ways to optimize your business operations, including revisiting past programs and smart cost management, to maximize profit fast. 
    Licensing Launchpad™ – Use code “PODCAST” to access free   https://www.sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide
    Download Ultimate Guide To Online Offers and Business Models – https://www.sweetlifeco.com/licensinglaunchpad
    Additional Resources: 
    Connect with April on LinkedIn https://www.linkedin.com/in/aprilbeach/
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    And welcome to episode number 319. Today, we are digging into 10 different ways.

    [00:00:53] Okay. To help you make 50, 000 in your coaching business in the next six weeks. So let’s talk about who is this episode for and exactly what you can expect. And let’s make sure that you are in the right place. First of all, you’re listening to the suite life entrepreneur podcast. As the intro said, thank you so much for being here.

    [00:01:11] My name’s April beach. I’ve been a business coach for 27 years and every single one of the trainings that we deliver to you here on this show are proven. This isn’t a fly by night show. As a matter of fact, the purpose of this show is to deliver proven systems, strategy, coaching and trainings that other business coaches and strategists will charge you thousands of dollars for.

    [00:01:33] This has been our mission for the last seven years to make sure that these proven trusted trainings get in the hands of all the entrepreneurs that are out there that are really dedicated to building a profitable consulting and coaching business with integrity. So if that’s what you want, yeah. You are in the right place.

    [00:01:48] Again, this is episode number 319. And if you’re a new listener to the show, let me share with you the structure of how these shows actually work in the very beginning here. I’m going to tell you exactly who this episode is for, and I’m going to share exactly who it’s not for, because I don’t want this to be a shiny object and I don’t want it to be a waste of your time.

    [00:02:06] So at the beginning of every single one of our episodes, this is what you’re going to expect, who it’s for, who it’s not for. If this show, isn’t for you. Awesome, right? I believe time is more valuable than money. You can cruise over to our website at SweetLifeCo. com and you can actually search our shows by topics and actually level a business to find the shows that are right for you.

    [00:02:26] So, in today’s show, How to increase 50, 000, make 50, 000 in the next six weeks. This is for established coaches and consultants. If you are a new coach to the space, if you are here and you’re trying to launch a business and make 50 grand in six weeks, this show is not going to help you do that. So if you’re brand new to the coaching and consulting space, please don’t listen to this episode and think that you’re going to be able to get results from it.

    [00:02:52] This is for established coaches, consultants, subject matter, experts, service based entrepreneurs that have already been delivering amazing results and services that are already making money and have already been serving clients. So I just want to be really upfront. On who this episode is for. And all of our show notes can be found by visiting suite life co.

    [00:03:13] com. Simply clicking on the podcast. And this is episode number 319. And there are two bonuses I’m going to give to you upfront so that you have these, you can go navigate to these, to grab these, and then we’re going to break down these 10 different ways. The two bonuses are totally free. And the first one is our licensing launchpad.

    [00:03:32] This is actually a training that we sell normally with this episode. I’m giving you complete access to our licensing launchpad training totally for free cruise over to our website and you can use the coupon code. Podcast to get into that free. And then the other one, the other bonus, if you’re not really ready for licensing yet, and you’re just growing a consulting or coaching business, I also want you to get access to our ultimate guide to online offers and business models.

    [00:03:59] It’s a 19 page guide that breaks down all these different products and offers that you can create and sell. And actually who it’s for, who it matches, what lifestyle and basically helps you save 10 years building the wrong kind of offer and the wrong kind of business. You can also grab that by going to the show notes, cruise over to SweetLifeCo.

    [00:04:18] com, simply click on the podcast and both of those bonuses will be found in the show notes for you. So today 10 different ways that you can make 50, 000 and increase it in your business. We’re also going to dive into. Why are we even needing to have this conversation? So before I dive in and give you the 10, we’re going to certainly seriously, seriously have a conversation about why do we need to make 50 grand?

    [00:04:43] What are some things in our businesses that might not be going right where we’re struggling right now and saying, Oh my gosh, I’ll shoot. I need to bring in 50 grand. So we’re going to talk about this, certainly the solutions and the strategy, but also avoiding this. So you’re not in a place where you’re struggling to increase profit in a short period of time.

    [00:04:58] We want you to build profitable. Predictable businesses past seven figures here. And so let’s go ahead and dive into this show. Again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco. com. I am so glad you’re here. Let’s dive in. All right. Diving into what we’re talking about here today. First of all, let’s have a conversation about, you know, what could be going wrong in your business before us to need to have a conversation about how to increase business.

    [00:05:22] 50, 000 dollars or, or maybe what could be going right? And you just want to make 50 grand. So one of the things I want to talk about and why this episode is important is because right now we’re recording this here in the spring of 2024 right now, it’s really important time to be selling your coaching and consulting services.

    [00:05:39] Businesses just like yours are looking to grow. People are still looking to grow. They still have that beginning of the year, a ramp up, and they wanted to improve whatever that is, their life, their health, their wealth, their business. And so now is a really important time to be bringing money into your business.

    [00:05:57] As a matter of fact, if you have been tapping in with me and we’ve been hanging out together for years and decades, you know that how we actually plan the profit of our business here at the Suite Life company is we bring a lot of our sales in, in the springtime because me and my team, we travel. And we vacation almost all summer long.

    [00:06:18] So what that means is when we are in a time of the year where we need to have sales come in, it’s planned that way in advance. So if you find yourself here that you need to increase sales now, cause you travel like I do awesome. Or you may find yourself in this place where you’re listening to me and you’re thinking, oh my gosh, I really need to bring in sales right now.

    [00:06:38] So whether you’re listening to this in the spring or at Christmas time, whenever it is, it’s going to be an important episode for you to listen to. But the number one tip is understanding when is the right time to sell based on your industry. So if you’re in the coaching and consulting space, the right time to sell is now.

    [00:06:53] And so that’s why this episode is very timely for you. And one of the things I want to say before we get into giving you the actual 10 different ways that you can increase your sales by 50 K is that the rule here. Is it? I don’t want you to overthink it. One of the things with sales and building up to sell and increase your profit is way too much happening in your head from wondering how the wording and the messaging should go out to all these different things that we really do want to have a strategy for.

    [00:07:24] But in the case of what we’re talking about on today’s show, You just need to take action. Okay. So the rule here is don’t overthink it and definitely take action. Rule number three is taking action and making those sales calls, following up with old leads, connecting with people that you haven’t talked to in a while.

    [00:07:45] You do have to do the work. So yes, I’m going to give you the strategies to increase your sales by 50 K, but if you don’t go out there and actually do the work. It’s not going to work for you. And so that’s one of the things I wanted to be really upfront about before we dive in here. I do not believe there is magic bullets to business.

    [00:08:02] I believe that when the strategy is right, it flows right. And you make money, right? But sometimes we do have to, you know, dive in and get you a high profit in a short period of time. And so. That’s what we’re talking about here on the show. So let’s go ahead and dive in. I’m going to cover each one of these 50 different ways where you can increase sales in the next six weeks.

    [00:08:22] And as you’re going through, certainly you can go back and listen to the show notes, but be thinking about which one or two of these would work for you in some of these. Yes, you can just do one of these ways. And when we execute it correctly, Can increase your sales by much more than 50k, but you may feel like there’s two or three of them.

    [00:08:45] As a matter of fact, you may listen to this and feel like, wow, I can do nine of the 10. Don’t be that person. At least just pick one. If the most of them pick two, because we do want to execute these one or two things very, very well. Promise. Scouts honor, whatever that is. Okay, there you go. Alright, so, let’s dive in.

    [00:09:03] Number one, you’re a coach, consultant, subject matter expert. The number one way, well, I can’t even say these are in order of operation. Number one of the ten is to sell, Personalized mentorship. Now let’s talk about why this is, you know, uh, a gold arrow for you. We have with scaling, scaling, coaching and consulting businesses, everything scales, everything’s a group program.

    [00:09:30] Everything is even things that are customized or cookie cutter to a certain extent, and there is a system and a process and a method which you always need to have, but it, the system is systematized. With mentorship, let’s talk about the difference between actually what mentorship is. And I have other podcast episodes that totally geek out on this if you’re interested in those, but there’s a difference between a coach, a consultant, and a, and a mentor.

    [00:09:55] And this is. True mentorship, where you can bring in coaching and consulting and strategy. But the people that want this, they want to have a relationship with you. The people that will pay for mentorship wants to connect with you, wants to mentor with you. And that is what they’re, that’s what they want to experience.

    [00:10:15] They want to learn from your wins and your mistakes. So selling one on one mentorship, you only can sell a couple of them. All right. So it’s really important that you price it correctly according to your credibility, your level of area of expertise, you know, how long you’ve been doing it, your value of what you deliver, but what they’re really paying for is, is a personal relationship with you.

    [00:10:35] And so private mentorship. In a lot of cases for our clients starts at no less than 10, 000. Many of our clients have private mentorship offers over 50, 000. So you can, if you’re structuring it correctly and you are willing to offer private mentorship to just a couple of people, we can. easily get you to that 50 K in the next six weeks because of the nature of why this offer is so powerful.

    [00:11:05] Again, it’s not a group program. It’s completely customized to them and you’re not only teaching them what you know, you’re not only consulting or coaching them, you’re sharing the ins and outs and your personal experiences and your personal thoughts and you’re dealing with mindset issues and emotional issues and you are.

    [00:11:23] In it with them, rolling up your sleeves with them. There’s frankly nothing like private mentorship. And that’s why I wanted to lead with that. So if you’re, you’re listening to this still because you’re established in your coaching and consulting space, if you’ve never sold private mentorship before, this would be one I really want you to lean in on and consider doing, you know, we’re not in this episode going to talk about the length of time and how often you meet.

    [00:11:47] That is something that we cover in part two. Our other episodes, obviously we build that out with our clients. If you’re interested in working with us for the sake of this episode, I don’t care. Pick it yourself, meet with the person and listen to them, create it perfectly for them. We’re talking about bringing in extra money for you in order to do it.

    [00:12:05] We need to create and deliver offers that people really want to pay for. So number one is private mentorship. Huge advocate of this. Um, I only I do private mentorship for clients. It’s quite expensive because here’s the thing. And here’s a little warning about that. With my clients that I mentor, I’m like thinking about him when I’m in Costco and when I’m on the side of my kids across field and talking to my husband about them at dinner, you know, Clients that you mentor, they, they consume you.

    [00:12:32] They become part of your life. So the, the only thing I’ll say, and then I’ll be quiet about this is just make sure you really like the people and that you love them and their business, actually, that you’re willing to do mentorship with. All right. So number one. One on one mentorship. Number two are VIP days.

    [00:12:47] We talk about VIP days all the time. My friend Amy Yamada has been on the show. We’ve talked about VIP days before, just actually a couple episodes ago, we talked about how to structure VIP days. I love VIP days. You probably love VIP days. These can be online days or they can be in person days. VIP days are days where usually the morning time is structured for Understanding and listening to what somebody needs in the afternoon is structured to actually give them the strategy and the outcomes they’re looking for.

    [00:13:15] People love high value, short time. And so for VIP days, I recommend you don’t sell any VIP day for under 10, 000 and they can fly in, you serve them lunch, you meet at a hotel or a beautiful destination place, or you can do an online virtual, uh, VIP day. If you are going to do the online version, And I want you to remember, I said, minimum 10 K for VIP day.

    [00:13:40] I would love for you charging, you know, 000 for VIP days. Then if it’s online, let’s make sure that you curate something really amazing so that you have lunch delivered to their house or their office. Um, you know, you send them a coffee mug, you know, with, with coffee in a freaking coffee grinder that they can grind to, to get through the day.

    [00:14:01] whatever that is, um, fermented mushrooms. I’m a big fan of fermented mushrooms. I think they’re like a game changer, not the psychedelic mushrooms, fermented mushrooms. Although there are arguments, great arguments for the psychedelics too. I just don’t send my, my clients psychedelics, but anyway, whatever that is for you, just figure it out and make it so good that they really feel like that very important person.

    [00:14:23] And they have a hundred percent of your attention VIP days. Number two, I want a list for increasing your sales in the next six weeks. The third one is licensing. We talk about licensing a lot on this show. I’m a licensing strategist. Basically, if you don’t know what licensing is, what it is, it’s taking your courses and your programs and your trainings and allowing other companies to distribute them, whether it’s within their own courses or trainings or allowing them to actually sell to their audience.

    [00:14:52] So basically we’re taking the same product that you’ve built and we’re allowing other people to sell it or distribute it. Licensing is. For sure, the way to skyrocket your business, especially those of you guys who have established trainings. And so let me share with you how with licensing, because some licensing deals actually take a long time to close.

    [00:15:09] So the bigger the deal, the longer it’s going to take to close. So here, for the sake of this show, I’m not talking about the licensing deals that some of my clients have that are closing for three. 300, 000 a half a million or even over a million dollars. I have some clients with pending agreements on the table for one course for over a million dollars.

    [00:15:29] That’s not what I’m talking about here. I’m talking about what’s called a licensing quick sell. That is a training program that you already have. We know it’s fantastic and you can sell it to another coach or consultants. We need to make sure your agreements are right. This isn’t like just giving them a bonus training to add to their training because we’re increasing your profit.

    [00:15:50] Not just giving somebody away. Something nice. This is actually where we take your established training program and we actually license it to another consultant or coach or another business that’s similar to yours, or at least a totally different business that serves the same audience licensing.

    [00:16:05] Quicksales are a really. Great way to increase your profit fast. The reason why I actually love this one is unlike mentorship and unlike VIP days, licensing quick sales, you just need to sell it and then you get to walk away. You don’t have to do anything. You don’t have to deliver it. You get to actually release your training and the company is responsible for delivering it.

    [00:16:25] So third way is a licensing quick sell. One of the bonuses that I mentioned in the beginning of this is free access to our licensing launchpad. It’s like this little teeny mini launchpad. 43 minute training with like five different videos on who you can sell your stuff to and how to get started. It’s a great training.

    [00:16:42] You can cruise over to our website at SweetLifeCo. com forward slash licensing launchpad and use the coupon code podcast to get into that for free. So if you want to know more about that, go grab that over there. Number four is opening old programs. So And we’re going to talk, this kind of goes through like the, the, this one, number four and five kind of fit into the same thing.

    [00:17:05] So opening an old program. So if you have an audience that used to be fans of programs you used to sell that you aren’t even using them anymore, maybe they aren’t even part of your marketing strategy. You can open up old programs like the Disney vault. Okay. How many of you guys have kids that are my age now they’re like in their teens and early twenties.

    [00:17:27] And do you remember when. They had the, we had the Disney DVDs and you only could go buy these DVDs is brilliant for Disney. Like you only could go buy these DVDs and access them when the Disney vault opened, right? So like when the Disney vault opened up like the old school Cinderella and whatever, we would all go buy it because like we didn’t have Disney plus and we didn’t have things on demand.

    [00:17:51] So it’s taking that same concept. It’s opening the vault of old trainings. I don’t care how big they are. And you can open up one training from your old vault and just say, Hey, listen, it’s open right now. You know, I want you to go ahead and grab into it. If you missed it in the past, here’s access to it.

    [00:18:09] Now that has been really, I mean, obviously it’s proven Disney did it. They make millions of bucks, but it’s been proven to help businesses where your audience might have changed. So if you’re serving a different audience or maybe your audience is You know, in a bunch of different places or a bunch of different levels, opening your vault of old trainings can serve a certain sector of your audience that maybe you’re just not currently marketing to, or maybe isn’t something that might be part of the future of your business.

    [00:18:38] But they’re still hanging out and they still love you and they want access to your stuff. So opening up your vault of old trainings is is one really really great way and that’s like a one time open Close. All right, and then number five is we’re going to take that same vault concept But this is going to be different now I want you to think about opening up your vault of not just one training But opening up your vault of all of your old trainings now Let’s, let’s, let me say the word old in a different way.

    [00:19:08] They can’t be out of date. They can’t be crappy, right? They have to be really great, but maybe you just don’t sell them anymore. It’s not part of your marketing strategy. Maybe you’re sitting on a bunch of trains that we never really got into a launch plan. And so it was a great idea and you wanted to build it, but it just turned out that it wasn’t the right timing or whatever.

    [00:19:29] Those are the trainings I’m talking about. So I want you to think of if you have a collection of trainings, opening up your vault of trainings, and then turning it into a membership. Okay? So people can get into your vault of trainings, and they can access all All of your gold and all of the assets that you’ve previously sold that are amazing.

    [00:19:54] And they can be part of a membership program. Now the deal with the 50 K in the six weeks is that this is going to be something that you can generate the sale of 50 K to be collected over like a 12 month period of time. Usually these vaults of older trainings don’t sell for like as much as your mentorship is going to sell for.

    [00:20:12] But we can invoice out and we can project sales for 50 K for a period of time for over, you know, six months or a year. So yes, we can generate 50 K in sales, but it’s a difference between like projected income and collectible income. You’re going to be collecting that over a period of time. Okay. Want to make sure we’re honest about that.

    [00:20:31] But again, this was great for those of you guys that have an established fan base. Maybe you’re not actually selling to them actively in the future, but you can take instead of just one training and opening it up, you can take up a vault of trainings. And if you really want to sweeten the deal, And really get people, cause we want people to register for it over the next six weeks.

    [00:20:52] Okay. The rule of that is those registrations total up 50 K in that period of what, if it’s a 12 month membership or a, or a six month membership, however you want to do it, I would do 12 months. So we need an, we need to do the math to say how many people at, let’s say a monthly membership of a hundred bucks.

    [00:21:10] Do I need to get to register for this over the next six weeks so that I have projected. You know, future income. So make sure you’re doing your math correctly in with that. You are going to have to sweeten the pot, right? We might think about running some ads to it, to get some paid traffic as well. And just using those conversions.

    [00:21:28] But what can you do as far as extra bonuses, live support that you could add on to them for that vault of trainings that. You’re just sitting on waiting to make money on. So let me recap where we are so far. So we talked about one on one mentorship VIP days Licensing we talked about opening one old program that used to be like if you have like an old gold standard program Everybody loved you became known for that.

    [00:21:54] You can open up that for a very short period of time You can release it on demand or live. The number five is opening up your vault of all of your resources All of your assets. If you’re like me, literally you have decades of assets that you’ve created for people that frankly, you can’t even fit it all into your marketing.

    [00:22:11] You’re just not enough time in the year to even sell all that you’ve created. That’s what I’m talking about. That’s really valuable. And then let’s kind of switch gears a second here. Number six was totally different. Number six is literally planning a retreat. And taking deposits for that retreat. So if you’ve been thinking about planning a retreat and you want to increase sales in a short period of time, now’s a great time to do that.

    [00:22:36] People are booking retreats for the middle and even the end of the year. I, by the way, literally put my deposit down for another surfing retreat in Costa Rica. You guys are totally going to laugh at me. But you won’t laugh at me if you’ve been listening to this show, you know, this is totally me. I booked two retreats for myself already for 2025.

    [00:22:55] Number one, I’m going back. It’s not even a retreat. It’s just a trip, but still I had to pay my deposit. I’ll be surfing in Costa Rica again, next February, 2025, and I’ll be surfing in Barbados in October of 2025. Those are two things I already paid for you guys. I already paid my deposit for a year and a half away.

    [00:23:15] So there are crazy people like me. They even, if you can’t have the retreat this year, if your retreat is so good, it’s so amazing, it’s exactly what they’re looking for. They will pay you a deposit like me because we’re planners and we like knowing, I like knowing I get to surf. Okay. So those are some of the things.

    [00:23:33] If you want to increase sales and you want to have retreats, yes, you have to choose the dates and get all the details, but you can book a retreat. You can go ahead and start selling to that and you can take deposits right now for a retreat that. You don’t even have to host for, like, it’s, I don’t even know how far away October of 2025 is.

    [00:23:51] It’s over a year and a half away, you guys, I paid for a retreat. Okay. Uh, number seven is launching a new program with deposits to hold the date. Okay. So obviously you can make 50k. I’m not going to sit here. You’re listening to show and be like, well, do a launch. That’s not what this is about. Right? And if you’re like me, you hate live launches anyway.

    [00:24:11] So it doesn’t fit what you want to do. What I’m talking about here is. Telling everybody that you’re building a new program or you’re launching something could be even later in the fall and taking deposits for that right now. So let me give you an example. We have another 30 day licensing accelerator coming up in September.

    [00:24:32] I already know we have it. We have the dates and there’s a bunch of people that couldn’t get into our accelerator that we’re hosting this month in March. And so we have already sent out emails saying, Hey, listen, if you want to be part of it. For next fall. And you want to lock in the dates for the one you missed right now.

    [00:24:48] You can pay for it now and you can be part of it in the fall. So launching a program, but taking the money now to either lock in a current rate or lock in a future rate, or maybe it’s just a deposit. So that’s number seven. And I wanted to make sure I was explaining that in the context of what we do for our business, because I know that helps people understand.

    [00:25:08] Number eight affiliates. We talk about affiliates a lot. I love partners and affiliates and. We have many podcasts on how to build your business and how to increase sales with affiliates. And I really believe that affiliates and collaborations are the way of the future. And it’s one of the best ways to bring in sales.

    [00:25:30] So if you haven’t either created affiliate yet or whatever that looks like for you, please go and create affiliate partnerships. So reach out to other people. Other businesses that serve your same clients and ask them to, you know, sell your program for you, give a percentage of sales to these people. One of the best ways and the fastest way is my friend, Kathy Hahn used to say this, that, you know, we grow your business is, you know, by borrowing somebody else’s audience.

    [00:26:00] And so that is partners and affiliates. So don’t ever look affiliate launches. Don’t ever look affiliate partnerships. And, but I also don’t want you to overthink this. I, you promised me that you would be here listening to this show. If a member of where I was like, you can’t ever think it, you just got to do it.

    [00:26:15] So I’m not talking about some big, huge affiliate structured program right now. We just need to bring in 50 K for you in the next six weeks. So literally. Send people emails or pick up the phone and be like, Hey, can we set up a time to have coffee? Literally do it. Old school grassroots reaching out to people.

    [00:26:32] It doesn’t have to be this big, huge affiliate launch with all this stuff. I don’t even care in this case if you have an affiliate software. If you have 10 affiliates and we set up how people register for your program correctly, We can track where, where people come from. You know, there’s other ways to track that.

    [00:26:51] So please don’t overthink the affiliate thing. Reach out to people that you know. Reach out to people that you might not know and you wanna know, and give them a percentage of sales for selling into your program. So number eight is affiliates. Number nine. I love this one. Number nine is outside of the box.

    [00:27:11] I should do a whole episode in this and we don’t talk about this enough. It’s building collaborative offers with friends. So you could, so that same affiliate person we’re talking about, what if the two of you guys get together and do like a short term, super special, Oh, what? And there’s another word we could think about for it.

    [00:27:32] Like super special, limited time, you know, behind the scenes access, exclusive blah, blah, blah thing that you do. And it’s not just your audience. You pick one amazing partner and the two of you together build a collaborative offer that you launch in the next six weeks. It’s only for this short period of time.

    [00:27:54] Like if you don’t buy it now, we’re never doing this again. And you build a collaborative offer with somebody else, you pool both of your audiences, you pool the collective genius of collaboration, and that is just a really, really great way that you can increase sales in a short period of time. And so let me kind of catch you up on what we’ve talked about so far.

    [00:28:16] We talked about number one is mentorship. Number two is VIP days. Number three is licensing quick sales. Four is opening an old program. Five is opening a vault of old programs. Six is planning a retreat and taking deposits. Seven is launching a new program, but you don’t have to actually launch it yet.

    [00:28:37] You’re just having deposits to hold the date of, you know, when it’s coming in the future. Seven, I don’t even know if I have my numbers, right? Uh, no. Eight is affiliates in actually having this affiliate sell your programs for you. I’m looking at my notes while I’m talking to you. Nine is building a collaborative offer with a friend.

    [00:28:57] And then the last one, I know it’s like super not sexy, but we have to be honest here. The last one is just cutting your costs. How many things have you invested in that you are not using that are shiny objects that you spend a ton of money on? How many different programs have you purchased? How many different subscriptions do you have?

    [00:29:18] You can probably cut a significant amount of costs on crap that you had just bought that you thought was. Important for you to buy at the time. Maybe it was maybe maybe it was a great purchase. Maybe you needed that. Extra whatever 10 K and software, you know, maybe you needed to join a different program.

    [00:29:41] Now, granted, do not ever default on a program. That’s a terrible thing to do. Don’t be that person. If you promise to pay for something, obviously we need to pay for what we promise to pay for whether or not you’re using it. We’re all adults here. That’s a choice that we make when we go into somebody else’s mentorship or business program, right?

    [00:29:57] So I’m not advocating for you to, you know, yeah. Be a bad person and not pay for things, but what have you paid for that? You’re still paying for that. Maybe you don’t need, do you have teams that are doing activities, but maybe you aren’t delegating well, maybe you need to put them on a little bit of a hiatus because maybe they aren’t doing that much work and it’s something that.

    [00:30:20] Um, you know, we want to, uh, save that and help increase sales so that you can pay them again. Whatever that looks like to you, but really when was the last time you looked at your operational costs? Um, I tried to do this. I have a money day on my calendar and honestly my money day is on my calendar every single month.

    [00:30:38] It’s the last Wednesday of every single month and it literally says money day and there’s a little bag of money emoji next to it. What the money day is is that’s my day. To say, okay, where are we with our finances? Did we reach our financial goals this month? What are we spending money on? Is that still a good use of our money?

    [00:30:56] And, you know, basically like, where are we at with our numbers? You can save thousands of dollars. I mean, frankly, even just going through the subscriptions on your, your Apple. Subscriptions that come through every single month and save literally hundreds of dollars might not be 50 grand, but how much are you paying for that?

    [00:31:17] You really shouldn’t be paying for. I think if we’re at this place where we’re having this conversation and we want you to increase and bring in 50, 000 in the next six weeks. We need to be really serious about what that looks like. And regardless of what you do, please look at the money you’re spending and where you’re bleeding out anyway.

    [00:31:37] That’s one of the first things that we want to do. And then go back and pick one or two. I’ll give you a pass that the saving money and cutting on subscriptions can be like a third one. Then pick two other ways that may work for you and your business. And the beautiful thing about this is it doesn’t have to be forever.

    [00:31:55] You know, this is only for a short period of time. And you may find that some, this strategy of, you know, selling a little bit in this period is selling a lot in this little short period of time is something that you actually love and it works really well for you and your audience. And you may totally love that.

    [00:32:12] You may find that, Hey, we’re going to, we’re going to do this type of a, a launch strategy here a couple of times a year, but right now I want to help you increase sales because you’re listening to this podcast because you seriously need to increase sales for some reason. And, uh, I want to help you do that.

    [00:32:27] And there’s my children calling me right now from their places of being, and because they always interrupt me in my podcast. So welcome to behind the scenes here of our life. If you guys don’t know me, if we’ve never met, um, you know, my husband and I own five companies. I travel seven months a year and I own two international consulting firms.

    [00:32:47] One of the things that’s very real here on the podcast is I have like dogs barking outside. And my kids are calling because they have an emergency breakthrough and their, their phone always rings to mine. It never goes silent. Um, so welcome to our world, but my commitment to you is that every single thing that you get here from us on this suite life entrepreneur podcast, and in our business coaching and services is totally designed to help you be more successful in what you have chosen to do at your contribution to the world, whether it’s to individuals or to businesses, that’s our commitment to you.

    [00:33:19] So I’m so glad that you’re here. Thank you for joining me. Please share this episode. I deny advertisers because I hate advertising listening to it on podcast episodes. So I refuse advertisers. So we totally rely on you sharing this show. Again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.

    [00:33:34] com. Simply click on the podcast. This is episode number 319. So you can search and find this episode, all the show notes, that bonus to get into the licensing training, the ultimate guide, everything we have there is designed to help you be successful. No strings attached. All right. Have a great day. Thanks for being here.

    [00:33:54] I’ll talk to you guys on the next episode.





    Navigating the Leap from B2C to B2B Effectively with April Beach (Episode 318)

    Navigating the Leap from B2C to B2B Effectively

    This episode is tailored specifically for you if you’re an established subject matter expert, coach, consultant, strategist, service provider, or if you’re deeply entrenched in the B2C model but feel the pull towards transitioning to B2B. April Beach, a seasoned business strategist with over 27 years of experience, guides you through this critical juncture in your career. This episode is crucial because it addresses a common yet challenging pivot point: shifting your business model while leveraging your expertise and maintaining a balanced life.
    April Beach delves into the intricacies of transitioning from a B2C to a B2B business model. You will learn about:
    • Recognizing when you’re ready for this shift and how to initiate the move.
    • Strategic questioning to align your future business goals with personal aspirations.
    • Techniques to repurpose your existing B2C offerings for a B2B audience, such as through licensing and embedded partnerships.
    • Exploring high-level strategic consulting for B2B, to understand and cater to the new audience’s needs.
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    This episode is a deep dive into how you can redefine your business model while keeping true to your expertise and creating a work-life harmony.
    1. Self-Reflection is Key: Understand the importance of your legacy and how you want to be known in your industry. This will influence how you transition and what parts of your business you carry forward.
    2. Designing Your Future Work-Life: Consider who your new clients will be in a B2B context and how this will change your work dynamics, from daily interactions to the nature of your engagements.
    3. Leveraging Existing Assets: Explore how your current B2C offerings can be transformed into B2B solutions, such as through licensing or partnerships, allowing for a smoother transition.
    4. Embracing Strategic Relationships: Engage in high-level consulting in your new B2B sphere to build relationships and gain clarity on what these clients need and value.
    5. Simplicity and Impact: Learn how transitioning to B2B can often simplify business processes and amplify your impact, potentially leading to more significant results with less direct effort.
    By the end of this episode, you’ll have a clearer vision of how to navigate the shift from B2C to B2B, making strategic decisions that align with your long-term goals and lifestyle aspirations. Tune in to uncover insights and strategies that will empower your journey into a new realm of business.
    Connect with April on LinkedIn https://www.linkedin.com/in/aprilbeach/
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:46] Hi guys. This is episode number 318 and together. Today, we are going to talk about that point in your business where you feel like it’s time to transition from a B2C audience to a B2B audience. So this episode is for you. If you are an established subject matter expert, consultant, strategist, service provider, or a coach, and you’ve been doing what you’ve been doing for a really long time, you’re probably very, very good at it.

    [00:01:14] And you’re wondering. What is next? You might be feeling like you’re a little tired of continuing to consult or deliver the programs you’ve been delivering. And you’re just sitting here at this place in your business season and in your life where you’re thinking, guy, how do I actually transition? Out of this business model, what comes next, especially if you are a coach or a consultant and you are so immersed in that space, sometimes you aren’t even aware of what’s possible or even how to move into that next level.

    [00:01:45] And so in this episode, I’m going to unpack for you considerations to think about knowing when you’re ready for this and actually how to get started moving in that direction. If that is a direction that you feel like the timing is right, so if that is you, you are definitely in the right place. This is number 318, so episode number three 18, and I’m April Beach.

    [00:02:08] If we don’t know each other yet, I have been a business strategist and a consultant to people just like you for over 27 years, and here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. We deliver coaching and trainings and strategies for you to think about that are going to move the marker for your business.

    [00:02:24] And frankly, for your personal life as well, because you are probably like me and you know, that business and life should be designed in harmony, all of the show notes and everything that we’re talking about here can be found by visiting sweet life. co. Dot com, simply clicking on the podcast and it’s so great to meet you.

    [00:02:45] Thank you so much for tuning in. Let’s go ahead and dive into this week’s show. All right, so let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. Today I am talking to you. If you are an established coach or a consultant and you’ve been doing the work, you have been delivering the strategy, you have been leading the teams, you have been leading the students and the clients.

    [00:03:04] You are the product. It’s your genius. Even if you’ve put them into programs, systematize them, basically you are the one, you are the program, you are the product and your business is doing really well. You have delivered amazing results and you’ve helped other people or other companies get results in whatever your area of expertise is that that you consult or coach on.

    [00:03:28] Now, you then may reach a time in your business where you want the way you work to look different, but you might not know what that could be. Like what comes after the launches? What comes after the masterminds? What comes after the VIP days? What comes after I relaunched my new program and I have all my partners and my affiliates?

    [00:03:53] What else? Does your life look like in terms of your way of working? And so I’m really excited to record this episode because this is one of the primary areas that we help coaches and consultants transition from Is from that b2c over to a b2b business model and so I wanted to record this episode To help you think about what their transition could look like, and just to help open up the world of could come next for you to start understanding and to start considering your options.

    [00:04:23] So right before I recorded this episode, I actually had a phone call with a friend of mine and she’s been a very well established coach in her space for over a decade. She has her things she does. She has her programs that she launches and she’s just feeling She’s kind of done with that. She’s done always being the one delivering the coaching.

    [00:04:46] Now that doesn’t mean she doesn’t absolutely love it. It doesn’t mean it doesn’t fire her up every time she leaves a strategy session with a group of clients. She absolutely loves what she does. But here’s the difference. She’s ready for a different way of working. She’s ready to do more in her mind.

    [00:05:11] What she thinks is something next, something higher level, uh, more strategic. And she’s kind of done And I want to, I don’t want to say getting tired, but maybe you are getting tired with it. So this relates to you with her current way of working and she has made a lot of money. She’s a seven figure entrepreneur.

    [00:05:32] She’s made a lot of money and she’s just wondering what is next and. I have this conversation with our clients all the time. So I want to have this conversation with you. And that’s what we’re talking about here on the show. What is next? What does that next level of business look like for you? What could it look like for you?

    [00:05:52] And I, I’m going to unpack some suggestions here, or maybe not even suggestions because I can’t give you specific suggestions. We’re not actually in a personal conversation here, but I’m going to unpack some options based on what our clients do. And to help open up the doors for you just to be thinking about, but first, I want to start out with some very, very important strategic questions for you to ask yourself.

    [00:06:15] And this is the one thing I think that either stops you from moving forward, either not taking time to answer these questions, or it may direct you to move forward in the wrong way. So the reality is, is when you are to this point in your business and you are ready to build this next level business model, you want to be doing business different.

    [00:06:39] You want to be reaching more people. You want to be making more money, but you really don’t want to be working as much as you probably have in the past. So there are some important things. That we want to think about because this next level of business is very strategic and it needs to be right for you.

    [00:06:57] You’ve put in the time, you’ve put in the effort, you’ve put in the marketing, you’ve put in the content creation. So as we’re moving forward, I really want for you to make sure that this is going to be the right. Next level business design. And so here’s some strategic questions that I want you to think about.

    [00:07:16] And the answers to these questions are going to help you to identify what are those next level opportunities that you could walk into. Basically, what are you going to do next? What does this work life look like next? So the first thing I want you to ask yourself is how important is it to you That you are known for your area of expertise and the answer to that, there isn’t a right way.

    [00:07:43] There isn’t a wrong way. I was just coaching a group of clients in our licensing accelerator this morning about this same question, meaning that it is totally okay if you want to be known as the end all be all as a creator of these things that you have been doing in the past. That’s important. It’s important to identify that you want to be known for that in order to clearly build the next level of what you’re doing.

    [00:08:07] If you don’t need or want to be known for that, and you want to go in a different direction, that’s great for us to know as well. So, question number one is just for you to be thinking about, you know, what, how important is it to me that everything I’ve done in the past is well documented and it’s a legacy and I’m going to bring this with me into the next level.

    [00:08:28] We can still leave that there. All your footprint, all of what you’ve been known for, we can even continue to help that B2C side of your business continue to make money without you. But when we’re talking about this B2B transition or this next level business transition, basically how much of that is coming with you?

    [00:08:47] Does it just simply need to be repackaged in a different type of a way? Or do we leave that in an established business? And are we building maybe a next level brand or a next level business? It’s absolutely based on how you want your life to function five and 10 years from now. So question number one was, how important is it for you to be known for the work that you’ve done already?

    [00:09:09] Is it important for you to bring the awareness of your creation of that IP with you? Or are we building something totally separate? The answer to that will determine what you do with your established offers and how you move forward in your next level of business design. The next question I want you to think about is what do you want your cadence and your work to look like in five and seven and 10 years?

    [00:09:34] Basically, who do you want to be working with? Who do you want to be talking to? Do you want to be talking to these people on a daily basis, a weekly basis, a monthly basis? Do you want those conversations to happen in person? Do you want them to happen virtually? Where are you sitting when those conversations happen?

    [00:09:52] Are you on the beach at a resort in the Bahamas? Are you at home in your home office? Are you in a structured office space with a team? Ask yourself, what is going to light you up in the way that you work? This is all about the way that you want to work because the way that you want to work, we can build any business model around that, but it starts with identifying and giving yourself permission to think about.

    [00:10:22] How do you want to work? What is the way that you want to work? What do you want to be doing? Who do you want to be doing it with? Where do you want to be doing it? All of those things are very, very important for you processing this transition into a B to B side of your business. So again, what do you want to be known for?

    [00:10:42] What is the way that you want to work in the future? And that’s going to help you gain clarity in your business model. And don’t worry, I’m going to give you some tips and different things that our clients build out. As they move into this transition. But then the last thing I want you to be thinking about is, who now are your clients?

    [00:10:59] So let me just say that again. Who now are your clients? In the past, in a B to C side of the business model, your clients are the end users of your products. You have always sold to the one that is utilizing your tools and your trainings and your systems within their own business or their own life. So in the past, the audience, your audience was the actual end user.

    [00:11:25] Now as you move to B2B and consulting businesses in a different level, who is your audience? Is your audience the actual end user still? And if so, what does that business model look like? In fact, usually when we transition businesses out of B2C, you’re letting go of courses, trainings, workshops you’ve taught in the past, or at least we’re restructuring how they’re done without you involved.

    [00:11:56] And we’re moving you over to speak on more stages, write a book, consult at a different level. You are having a different audience for a different reason. You might be teaching your thought processes rather than your step by step SOP end result solutions. What part of what you want to be known for are you bringing in and actually teaching and delivering to that new B2B audience?

    [00:12:25] These are choices you get to make and as you go through and you give yourself permission and that’s the purpose of this episode and you can actually be thinking about, wow, you know, these thoughts that have already been, I already know this, by the way, if you are here and you’re thinking about transitioning to B2B, I already know that at least some of these thoughts have been floating around in your mind, probably with zero structure, just kind of popping into your mind and you have been already processing some of these.

    [00:12:51] And we already know that because you are smart, you are an established business. And so then therefore these are the smart next questions that you are automatically processing and thinking about. What are you going to sell? What are you going to do? Who are you going to do it for? Why is it going to be important to them?

    [00:13:07] So again, think about what does it actually look like and what are you wanting to deliver to that B2B audience? Because they’re no longer the actual, or they probably are no longer the actual end users of the, the training or the strategy or whatever it is you’re delivering, because then you’d still be in B2C, but instead we’re designing a next level business model for you.

    [00:13:33] And you’re going to be doing probably. Speaking on the same exact area of expertise, but how you’re going to do it, like how we’re delivering it is going to be different for different people for probably a different, higher level, higher in more strategic purpose. And so those are just some foundational strategies before I even give you some suggestions on how you can move forward in this and different things that you can create in a B2B business model.

    [00:14:06] I just want you to give yourself permission to process those. Many more conversations need to be had around those processing them here with me on the podcast. This is like. A little drop in the bucket. And here is why your strategy moving forward. We want to make sure it’s right. And I already alluded to that in the beginning of this.

    [00:14:24] We, if we’re building and we’re designing the next level of your business, we need to make sure we’re doing it strategically, right. Based on what you want, based on your future business goals and strategies. It’s very, very important. I don’t want you to have to be in a position where you’re rethinking this.

    [00:14:40] And where you might want to, you know, totally scratch it and start over again. Let’s do it right the first time because time is our most valuable asset that we have. And I hope to give you as much time freedom as possible with the strategies that we deliver here on the podcast. I know we do that for our clients at the Suite Life Company.

    [00:15:00] That’s what I want you to get out of this. So now let me give you some suggestions about different things that you can do. you can move into this B2B side of your business. So the first thing is, look at those offers that you’ve been selling B2C, those trainings, programs, even workshops that you’ve been doing on the B2C side.

    [00:15:26] Can you, or are you interested in still continuing to do them? Are you still going to keep that B2C side of your business? Frankly, most of our clients say yes. There is this tipping point. We have to tip the scales. So before we can move all the way into this next level of business model, there’s a transitionary period.

    [00:15:46] And so let’s say you’re like most of our clients. Yes. You’re going to be working through the B2C sides of your businesses, and you’re going to be continuing to profit on the B2C side of your businesses. And we can keep scaling that. That’s awesome. But then ask yourself, are there pieces of those trainings and programs that I can actually now, instead of delivering them myself directly, that I can actually allow other companies to deliver them.

    [00:16:12] That you can allow other companies to distribute them. So here is an example. If you have one sort of training or solution or workshop that you teach that you have sold, maybe you’ve done a launch around, whether it’s a PLF or running ads to it and webinars and whatever that is, can we actually allow for other companies to embed that into their current programs?

    [00:16:37] That is the easiest way, the smoothest and the most entry level way that we help our clients transition into that B2B business model by taking the current trainings and programs that you’re used to delivering yourself and allowing for other companies to deliver them within their programs. That is also a term that people throw around called like an embedded partnership.

    [00:16:59] Really the, the true term for that is called licensing. We talk about licensing a lot here on this podcast. It’s not just like a spit in a handshake. There are some parameters around that that need to be done correctly to protect your IP and to make sure that it’s a win win situation for everybody. But just talking about the model of it, do you want to take trainings that you are used to delivering yourself and now you can sell them and license them and release them to other companies to include in their programs?

    [00:17:30] Immediately, we can take you out of being the one to deliver them and we can benefit other businesses and their end users by allowing them to utilize and share your content. It’s a really powerful thing and it’s a very simple transition. So we’re taking the same product, but we’re just releasing it to a different audience.

    [00:17:55] We can take your same. Trainings and programs, but instead of you selling them to the end user, we sell them to the person who has access to all of the end users. Today in our profitable licensing accelerator, when I, when I was talking about this and I was helping our clients unpack what their CAD that we were going through their assets and all of the potential of all of the different trainings that they could put into these licensed embedded partnerships.

    [00:18:25] And we were going through these and, you know, one of the, one of my clients asked, they said, gosh, you know what, if I really was a comment, she said, I gosh, if, you know, if, if I realized that I could actually touch so many more people by selling it in this way to the person that already had access to my whole office audience, then by trying to find my audience myself, I would have done this years ago.

    [00:18:49] So it’s not only a great business model for when you are ready to phase out of that B to C in actually doing the work, it is a very smart, profitable business model because by doing this, you can actually reach more people with your work with actually less work for you. So that’s the first thing. That’s one of the primary areas that we work with.

    [00:19:12] Our clients on at the Suite Life company is creating those sort of partnerships and licensing their content. But there is another area that I want to share with you that maybe if you aren’t ready for that and you’re just kind of tipping the scales or playing with the B to B to B to C side of business and you’re not really sure how to go through this transition, then I want to let you know that you can actually go back to some high level strategic consulting for B2B.

    [00:19:40] So if you’re trying to figure it, you’re not really sure what you want to do yet. You’re not really sure how you want to spend your time. You can very simply start doing some consulting with what would be your new audience and you literally win. Build relationships with them, you pour into them, you take your expertise and what you’ve been doing for years and you start building trusted relationships with that new audience, whether it is going in and meeting with them one on one or meeting with them virtually or providing insight in the purpose of this is to Twofold number one is to build trusted relationships.

    [00:20:18] Like I said, with that new audience, but number two, it helps you to gain confidence and it helps you to get clarity on the different types of programs that you may want to start creating on a B to B business level. So when you’re looking to actually transition and stop selling directly to your end user, but serve other businesses who then serve your end user, they have different needs and you probably have amazing solutions to their different needs that are only a few degrees away from your actual assets and your products.

    [00:20:52] I want to encourage you that. Moving into those relationships and just having conversations with these companies is also a really great way to gain clarity on what you’re going to be happy doing in the next level. And frankly, what this new audience might need and want from you, you’ll find it as you move into this B2C space, that’s, it’s actually really, really simple.

    [00:21:16] Whereas in B2C we have complicated funnels, even the guy that emails me all the time in my inbox saying, get rid of the complicated funnels, buy my short funnel, whatever it is, right? It’s still a funnel. It’s still a marketing strategy. When you move into B2B in a way that you’re flowing in your zone of genius, you’re in flow state, you’re utilizing the assets and the resources that you have absolutely already created.

    [00:21:42] You have developed results for other people. And you’re moving forward in a way that is a different type of relationship to work with and partner with these other businesses in a way that helps their end users and makes both of your companies more money, then that is going to be the right direction for you as long as it aligns with your zone of genius, it opens up your time in your life the way that you want it.

    [00:22:05] And you’re literally building a different cadence of work, how you work, the re the assets you release is different. So you can start just by taking the current programs you you’re selling B2C and now allowing other businesses to sell them. Or you can can start by meeting with and networking, consulting those other businesses first, and then creating new level packages and programs that are appropriate for them.

    [00:22:29] When you do this. What all of our clients have found is that opens up a massive amount of time for them to fill in other passion projects. And let me just end with a story. This is A mind blowing story and I can’t say that i’ve ever been able to share this case study Because I have literally never had a client come to me and tell me these results before so i’ll end this podcast with this Last friday.

    [00:22:57] I had a conversation with a client named cheryl And we helped her move from teaching workshops into licensing and it was, she was very successful at it because she has amazing programs. And so when you have a great program, it’s easy to move from B to C and to be into B to B. But she literally said to me on the, on the phone call, she’s like, It, I can’t believe how easy this is to sell and I have so much time on my hands in such a short period of time.

    [00:23:28] So fast. I have so much time on my hands that I’m just not really sure what to do with it. I have never ever in 27 years of business coaching had a client call me to tell me I’m making so much money and I have so much time. I’m not exactly sure what to do. So I tell you that story because frankly, I mean, to be really honest, it blew my mind to have somebody call and tell me that.

    [00:23:51] It’s an incredible case study. It’s definitely not the norm. Not everybody gets into this business model and all of a sudden, three months later has so much money in time that they just are at a loss for what to do. Um, so I’m glad it worked. It has worked out that way. Certainly not the, not the average result.

    [00:24:10] It does take more time to transition into this B2B business model for the rest, the rather 99 percent of our clients. And I, but I just want to share with you that when it’s right, when you give yourself permission to figure out what you want that to look like, when designing this next level of your business is done intentionally.

    [00:24:32] And you have the ability to work through the strategy. It actually is that simple might not happen that fast, but it is that simple because this next level of business that we’re sitting here talking about in this podcast episode is your next level of life. It’s your next season of life. And you’re here listening to this episode because you need it to be simple.

    [00:24:54] Because you want it to be simple because you’re tired of the complicated this in the constant working in the constant coaching and the constant doing in the constant hands in the mess. And so I want you to ask yourself, what does that simple look like to me? What do I want to be doing with my time?

    [00:25:12] What do I want to be doing with my work cadence? What do I want my profit to look like in the next 357 to 10 years? Thanks. And that is what I wanted to talk to you about on this show. How do you actually transition out of that B2C into the B2B? And I want to make sure you know that these are the things that I want you to be thinking about as you move into those decisions.

    [00:25:38] Because these strategic decisions, first of all, you have earned the opportunity to be here to be having this conversation. You would not still be here 23, four or five minutes later into this podcast listening to me if you didn’t know you were ready for this. So congratulations. for being to a point in your business of doing great work where you get to be thinking about this for yourself.

    [00:26:00] I’m really, really excited for you. And I can tell you this next level of business will open up so much time for you as long as you do it right. And as long as you give yourself permission to think about what you want it to look like, because as I always say, the We can build any business model to achieve any time and lifestyle goal that you want, but it starts with you deciding what you want.

    [00:26:25] All right. Well, that is a wrap. I hope that you found this show, this particular episode beneficial. Certainly if you need help strategizing your B2C over to B2B transition, you’re wondering what to build, what programs to sell, how to move into B2B, we would love to support you in doing that. You can visit us at SweetLifeCo.

    [00:26:46] com. You can also find me on LinkedIn at SweetLifeCo. April beach. And I’m happy to answer any questions for you. All of the show notes, the transcription for this and all of the resources and assets we have available to you can be also found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. We appreciate you being here, listening to this show, and I will talk to you guys next week.

    [00:27:06] Thanks so much.




    How To Add A Train The Trainer Program To Your Course with April Beach (Episode 317)

    How To Add A Train The Trainer Program To Your Course

    Who This Show is For and Why It’s Important
    You’re in the perfect spot if you’re a subject matter expert, coach, consultant, speaker, author, or leader contemplating or already developing a Train the Trainer program. Whether you’re looking to license your content to other companies or elevate your existing certification program, this episode is a goldmine for you. April Beach, the founder and CEO of the SweetLife® Company, brings her expertise directly to your journey of expanding the reach and impact of your work. With a focus on strategic content structuring, this episode is not just about creating a program but ensuring it is profitable and impactful.
    What We Cover and What You Will Learn
    In this episode, April Beach delves deep into the intricacies of building an effective Train the Trainer program. You’ll learn how to structure your content strategically to facilitate success for other trainers. This includes providing the necessary materials, such as outlines, speaking topics, benchmarks, training agendas, and the core content like PDFs, slides, and workbooks. More importantly, you will understand how to infuse your unique thinking and genius into these materials, elevating the trainers to deliver the content as effectively as you would.
    April doesn’t stop at just content delivery; she also explores the importance of communication skills, the creation of a learning roadmap, user management, and internal marketing techniques. These insights will help trainers not only present the material effectively but also engage and inspire their audience, leading to a more impactful learning experience.
    Key Takeaways
    1. Content Foundation: Understand how to break down your program into manageable parts, focusing on both the core materials and the high-level strategic thinking behind each segment.
    2. Communication and Facilitation Skills: Equip your trainers with the necessary skills to handle sensitive topics and foster engaging, productive discussions.
    3. Visual Learning Roadmaps: Create visual aids to help trainers and learners track progress and understand the journey through the program.
    4. User Management Strategies: Learn to manage and track attendees effectively, ensuring a streamlined and accountable learning experience.
    5. Internal Marketing for Buy-In: Develop materials to help trainers advocate for your program, ensuring engagement and enthusiasm from participants, particularly in scenarios where they don’t have a choice in their participation.
    This episode is more than just a guide; it’s an empowerment tool for you to elevate your program, making a profound impact while freeing you up to pursue your passions. Tune in to transform your Train the Trainer program into a dynamic, effective, and profitable venture.
    Join our elite business consulting programs for support building your Train the Trainer program, licensing courses, or creating a certification https://www.sweetlifeco.com/amplifyphase
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    April Beach (00:01.258)
    Hey there, this is episode number 317. And in this show, we are breaking down how to actually structure the content for a Train the Trainer program. So if you’re a coach or a consultant, you are a subject matter expert or service provider, and you are building an actual Train the Trainer program, you’re wondering what actually goes into that, what are some of the things that I could think about? We are gonna break all of that down for you in this particular podcast episode.
    My name is April Beach, if you and I don’t know each other yet. And I am the founder and CEO of the SweetLife® Company and host here on the show for the last seven years. Thank you so much for listening to this show. We’re super glad that you’re here and we are known for delivering business trainings and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for. If you are in a place where you are building your certification program or a train the trainer program.
    or if you’re ready to start licensing your content, your trainings, your courses, and your curriculum to other companies, you are in the right place. Visit us at SuiteLifeCo.com and you can apply for our Amplify licensing accelerator, or you can immediately get into our entry-level but powerful licensing launch pad training by visiting lice
    April Beach (01:20.55)
    In that training, I even break down for you exactly what the top 10 industries are looking for when they are out there hunting down programs just like yours to bring into their organization. So in this show, we’re talking about how to actually build the components and just different ways that I recommend you think about strategically delivering your content in the train, the trainer capacity.
    If you have any questions about this show, when it drops live, I will be off grid surfing for 10 days in Costa Rica, but you can always email my team at hello at sweetlifeco.com. If you find yourself in an urgent situation with a licensing opportunity, or if you would like to learn more about our upcoming 30 day licensing accelerator, it’s kicking off in March. I am so excited about it. It’s a first ever thing.
    then visit us at sweetlifeco.com and we will save you a seat in there. So for this particular show, as promised, you are gonna walk away understanding some of the different assets that you can deliver in a Train the Trainer program and the pros and the cons of each. We’re gonna unpack this for you. I’m gonna do a 360 degree view of all of the different.
    Content that you may want to deliver in a train the trainer program and also some of the reasons and considerations for each one Now your program is going to be completely unique here on the podcast I’m not able to hear what you have to say and actually personally pour into you like I am able with our clients So this is going to be a little bit more of a strategic high-level overview, but
    I know it will be powerful. I get questions about this all the time. And so stick with us here and we’re gonna dive in and I’m gonna share with you all of the nuances of how to build a Train the Trainer program successfully. That’s gonna be profitable for you and valuable for the people you’re delivering it to. All right, here we go.
    April Beach (00:01.142)
    All right, so congratulations, first of all, because you have a program that is so great, now you’re leveling up to the next stop and you are bringing other professionals in to understand how to deliver your unique intellectual property, your unique content, your program. And so we need to create a way to help others facilitate your work. And we do that by creating what can be considered as a train the trainer program. Now, depending on what you’re specifically working on,
    What we’re talking about today is not gonna fit into a perfect box probably for you, but I want you to walk away with really good considerations of how you can package up that Train the Trainer program and what actually makes sense to include for you based on the relationship that you have with the trainers. Now, if you have a huge organization you’re working with and they have elected a few people to become trained on your materials,
    because perhaps we are licensing your training into that organization, or maybe you’re just bringing it in as a workshop, then you aren’t gonna actually be able to pick who those people are. So if you’re in a position where you don’t get to pick who the trainers are, that really helps us to understand what more are we gonna wanna give to this individual or this group of individuals in a way that’s gonna make you feel really, really good about these people being the projectors and the facilitators of expanding the reach of your work.
    Or if you’re in a place where you can choose who will be the facilitators of your material, then that is awesome as well. So let’s go ahead and start with foundationally, what do you need to deliver to these people to set them up for success? The first is the actual content itself, okay? This isn’t rocket science, but you need to deliver the actual materials of your content.
    whether it is a program or a course or a curriculum or a step-by-step process or a workshop that they need to facilitate the delivery of, you need to give them the materials that they need. So think about how you created this training yourself when you were delivering this B2C. When you first started delivering this on your own, which is how most of you guys started in this place, which is great,
    April Beach (02:19.566)
    because we hashed out all the issues and now we know we can really level it up, right? And it’s ready to go. How did you deliver that? You had slides. You probably had an outline of the training. And so first of all, identify what did I need when I was teaching this directly myself? And then the next step to the foundational materials is, what is somebody else going to need to be able to deliver this well? And here are examples of some of what we recommend our clients.
    building when we’re building a train their trainer program. So the first one is an actual outline in speaking topics for every single benchmark in the program. Of course, you’re gonna ask now, what is a benchmark? A benchmark is a word that I use to define a different section or part of the program. It may not be a module. A benchmark could be a section of time in a whole workshop.
    A benchmark is a focused area of work that is being taught on that is usually delivered as somebody else would consider it could be a module or it could be a training topic. So those are your benchmarks. So for every single benchmark, you need to outline the agenda for that benchmark. You also need to make sure the trainer fully understands the ideal outcome. Like what is the goal that we’re going for here within this benchmark? What is the
    end result of understanding that we want people to have, not within the whole program, within this benchmark. So step number one is not only outlining the content, saying here’s an outline of the content, I mean, that’s pretty basic, shoot, chat GPT can do that for you, but what isn’t basic, what is your uniqueness, what makes your program powerful is the way you think, it’s who you are, it’s where the content came from, which is your own genius.
    And so you need to think about infusing, how are you gonna level up that trainer to be able to understand your way of thinking to the best way possible? And so I want you to think about unpacking for them parts of things that they could be thinking about within each benchmark of your program. And as in what needs to be the end result goal of this particular benchmark. And so you’re gonna have a collection.
    April Beach (04:32.386)
    of actual thought processes that you want these trainers to be thinking about. Now I know that may seem like a ton of work and this might not be the right thing for you. It’s not necessarily the right thing for everybody. You don’t have to go to all of this work, but depending on the content of what you teach, depending on how in depth your material is, and depending on how important mindset and psychology is, which frankly it is to a lot of.
    even the basic business strategies out there, that’s certainly something for you to consider. Also, of course, the basics, workbooks, slides, training materials, outlines, agendas, and you can even have what we call teacher guide. In our programs, when we deliver our classes to other coaches to deliver, our coaches get a trainer guide. And a trainer guide is a breakout of every single slide and questions and things that they can bring up for every single slide.
    So the trainer and the actual person delivering it can actually facilitate it as if it was their own. And so we’re really leveling up that trainer to look like this just incredible, amazing badass, basically. So that’s the depth that we go. Those are just some things for you to consider. So part one is the actual content itself. Of course, you’re gonna wanna deliver the basic content, the PDFs, the slides, the workbooks, the worksheets, right? You need to give them all the materials in order to facilitate the program.
    Then that gold standard, where I really encourage all of our clients that we work with, we always ask, what can we do more? How can we serve more? How can we equip more? It doesn’t always mean more content. It just may be more strategic thinking. And those are those other key benchmarks and considerations within the content of the program. So that’s part one. We’ll call that the core content. But then there are other things that are important.
    to take into consideration that you may want to include in a train the trainer program. And in this episode today, we are not gonna be able to get into the model of how you deliver your train the trainer program, you know, meetings, face to face, Zoom groups, benchmarks, all of those things we work with our clients, and we help our clients strategize all those. We would love for you to apply to become a client, visit sweetlifeco.com, and we’ll have a conversation about if that’s a right step for you.
    April Beach (06:56.438)
    But I want to talk about the content itself and some things that you may not be thinking of. And here’s the reason why. Sometimes we have been doing what we’ve been doing for a really long time, and we kind of take for granted the things we already know, or things that may just be obvious to us in our own communication strengths and skills. It’s not always the case. And so in your Train the Trainer program, here are just some examples of other things that…
    you may want to consider adding in. The first one are communication tips. Like how to be a thoughtful teacher or how to be a good listener or some communication 101. You could even bring a communication expert in to work with the people that you’re certifying if communication isn’t your particular area of expertise. But how do you actually help them be a better teacher, a better listener, a better leader, a better facilitator? How?
    If based on your content, are they going to maybe experience some communication issues? So is your content something that could bring up some touchy topics within a workspace or deal with some topics that are not really well communicated within a work, you know, within a group of people? If that’s the case, don’t throw them to the wolves.
    equip them and think of what you can do to help these trainers really facilitate these tough conversations based on your work. So those are some other things to be thinking about. Some other tactical things that I want you to think about is what about a roadmap? Can you give your trainers a success mark benchmark roadmap? And this is something it’s a quick visual, it’s a graphic where you can say, hey listen,
    for people that you’re taking through, here is what they should be learning. It’s a learning roadmap for their end users to help the trainers themselves know that they’re on the right track facilitating the material. So visual things, everybody learns different. I’m a big visual person, so I really love those maps. My clients laugh because I’m always making them maps. And half of them.
    April Beach (09:06.722)
    think they’re great and the other half are really nitty gritty thinkers and they want me to write it out in a project plan. But whatever that is, right? So think about how the people that you’re working with think and learn and alter your materials to equip them based on who they are and based on your materials. And then a couple of two other tips for you. I want to make sure that you have here today. The first one is
    User management. This is like a tech side of it. Make sure that you are equipping them to understand how to manage the attendees. So is it a software that they need to have? Is it understanding how to track attendees? How to provide that accountability to the end user is a really big deal, especially when you aren’t gonna be there to actually handhold, which is the beauty. That’s why we love to train the trainer programs from your material, because we get to free you up so you can…
    Go surfing with me for 10 days in Costa Rica with a bunch of girls, right? Like that’s the lifestyle that we want, right? Or whatever that looks like for you. But we have to make sure we’re thinking about these things. The better you can do equipping, that the trainers that are delivering your materials.
    the more surf trips you can go on with me, right? So those are the things I want you to be thinking about. What are the questions that may come up in that? So accountability, keeping people on track, facilitating software, and then the last tip I wanna give you is content for internal marketing. Now hear me out, again, every single one of these tips is an entire podcast episode on its own, but hear me out. Your trainers are not you, and they don’t understand
    everything frankly that you want them to understand and own with the material in your program. And so in the process of being a facilitator of your program, they’re going to need to explain how important your program is to the end users, especially if the program is being instituted in an organization where the end users don’t have buy-in choice. So let me say that again, if your program is being brought in, I’ll say it in layman’s terms, if your program is being brought in,
    April Beach (11:20.342)
    by an organization where the employees that are taking it don’t get to choose whether or not they’re taking it, then we need everybody to love it. We want them bought in because we know when they’re bought in that they’re gonna get better results with your materials. How do we equip the trainer to communicate to the end user in why this program is so rad, why it’s amazing, why this material is so good, why it’s gonna make their life better or their work better or their processes better or save them time or, you know.
    whatever it is that your program does. And so you wanna equip the trainer with internal marketing materials. And that could look like swipe copy that they take, just like when we’re building affiliate programs to get affiliates to help you launch your training or your course on the B2C side. We do the same thing on the B2C side, on the B2B side, but we’re gonna equip the trainers with internal marketing for them to best communicate with the people who are taking it to get the buy-in that.
    everybody needs because in the end when we release a train the trainer program where everybody has buy-in and the end users freaking love it then you have renewals you have word of mouth referrals your work expands because we have now sold it into more and more and more and more and more organizations increased your profit bought you more time increased the reach of your work so that you can make a greater impact and it’s not all sitting on your shoulders all on your own
    Creating the Train the Trainer program is a huge game changer.
    April Beach (12:54.894)
    And my dogs are barking. So that is the end of this podcast episode. And I could ramble on this forever, actually. But the reality is, is that doing this type of level, moving into B2B from B2C is an absolute game changer for you and your business. As long as we do our due diligence, as long as we do our due diligence and package up and price and release your materials correctly. And this episode…
    is an initiation to help you build your Train the Trainer program. And if you can just do one thing, at least take one takeaway and look at what you’re building and apply that to it, we’re gonna level up your program automatically. And if you weren’t even sure if a Train the Trainer program is right for you, or what’s the difference between a Train the Trainer and a certification and licensing your course and releasing it to all these other companies, if you weren’t even sure what the options are available to you, but this podcast episode just…
    spiked your interest, you’re absolutely in the right place. And everything we do here as a company is helping experts build your million dollar offer ecosystems and level you up, increase your profit and expand the reach of your work through building programs like Train the Trainer and licensing programs. And basically taking the work that you’ve already done and helping you expand your reach and make more money off it. And so if you would like to work with us to do that, definitely consider tapping into our licensing accelerator.
    or just our beginning licensing training called Licensing Launchpad, both of them can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com. And all the show notes, everything we talked about here is going to be able to be found on our website as well, sweetlifeco.com. This is episode number 317. And if you haven’t yet…
    Subscribe to our YouTube channel as well because we have so many videos and trainings and the video of this podcast episode will actually be over on our YouTube channel. If you wanna hang out with me visually, leave a comment. I love hanging out with people there and building relationships with you over on our YouTube channel as well. Okay, all right, you guys have an incredible night and I will talk to you on the next show. Take this, apply it, and level up your business.



    How to Price Your Content or Courses for Licensing with April Beach (Episode 316)

    How to Price Your Content or Courses for Licensing


    Who This Show is for and Why It’s Important
    This episode is a must-listen for coaches, consultants, and content creators eager to explore the lucrative world of licensing. April Beach delves into the specialized area of licensing intellectual property, particularly focusing on content, trainings, systems, and courses. This topic is crucial as it unlocks new revenue streams and allows for the expansion of business reach and impact.
    What We Cover and What You Will Learn
    April Beach guides you through the practical steps of pricing your curriculum for licensing. You’ll learn the importance of understanding your operational costs, including software, team expenses, and the logistics of content distribution. The discussion goes further into calculating the Return on Investment (ROI) of your content, emphasizing both tangible training benefits and lifestyle improvements. April introduces two main pricing strategies: bulk pricing and ‘Amplify ROI’ pricing, explaining how these can be applied based on the specific needs and outcomes of potential licensees.
    Key Takeaways
    1. Understand Operational Costs: Know the expenses associated with licensing your content, like software and team support.
    2. Calculate the ROI: Assess both the tangible and lifestyle impacts of your content.
    3. Pricing Strategies: Learn two methods – bulk pricing and ‘Amplify ROI’ pricing.
    4. Customized Approach: Tailor the pricing based on the licensee’s specific situation and outcomes.
    5. Value Communication: Communicate the measurable value and transformation your content brings to the licensee.
    After listening to this episode, you’ll be equipped with insights and strategies to confidently price and license your intellectual property, enhancing both your business growth and the value you deliver to your clients.
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:



    [00:00:46] Hi there and welcome back to the show. This is episode number 316 and we are diving into a topic today that I know that many of you have had on your mind. You actually hunt us down for the answer to this question. So the question that we’re answering today is how do you actually price your training or your program or your curriculum or your content to license it To other companies, what do you charge for that?

    [00:01:13] Where does it even start? And in this episode, I’m going to introduce you to the strategy of pricing. You are here because you’re probably a coach or a consultant or a subject matter expert, and you’re certainly in the right place. As you know, my name is April Beach and me and my team work with subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants to help you license your material and give you all the steps.

    [00:01:37] Even down to the pricing calculators of releasing your content, expanding your reach and increasing your profit through licensing. And so you’re here because you’re good at what you do. Let’s just frankly talk about that first. The fact that you are even in a place where your work. Has made a significant impact on a B2C side, whether it’s in programs that you’ve delivered directly or workshops or consulting you’ve already done.

    [00:02:04] And now you want to release it into the hands of other companies and possibly even other companies are coming to you asking you for your content. So congratulations on being absolutely top notch at what you do and having proven systems, methodologies that other people want, and frankly, not everybody is there.

    [00:02:26] So licensing is an advanced move. You can tap into all of our resources we have here for you. And if you haven’t yet, the best place for you to start and to get more information so that you can license your program successfully Is by visiting licensing launchpad. com. It’s a short little mini masterclass.

    [00:02:47] You can go over there and I’m going to unpack for you how to get started with licensing, even what the top 10 industries are looking for. It’s a great starter place for you. If you are ready to go in licensing. You can always shoot us a message by visiting suite life coat. com, and we will partner with you and help you to be successful at that.

    [00:03:06] So this episode, number 316, we are answering the question of how, how do you even prices? And I’m going to actually break out the steps and the questions that you need to answer before you are able to. Price your licensing offer and training, and then I’m actually going to break out the two different ways to actually price your program so you can consider which one is best for you.

    [00:03:28] So if that’s what you’re looking for, stick with me here. We’re going to dive into all the things here in this episode. Okay, a little bit of a foundation. Uh, if you have never heard about licensing before, please go back into our podcast resources, and I have many trainings. You can even visit our YouTube channel, where I have trainings about licensing, how to get started with licensing, what is licensing, and we have so many resources available to you.

    [00:03:53] But let’s talk about what is the definition of licensing. You’re probably actually familiar with licensing. Licensing songs, licensing art, licensing. Images for your marketing, uh, licensing brands. So for example, let’s talk about the, the biggest brand that everybody knows, Mickey Mouse, right? So your child may have a Mickey Mouse backpack that Jansport licensed permission to put Mickey Mouse on a Jansport backpack, but who owns Mickey Mouse?

    [00:04:21] Disney Corporation, right? That is an example of licensing. By the way, that is not the type of licensing coach I am. That is not why you’re here. I know that. We’re talking about something different. We’re talking about a secret scale strategy through licensing, and this secret is why people come and seek us out, and why businesses are All over the world work with us to learn, to license their materials.

    [00:04:45] And that is licensing your content, licensing, your trainings, licensing, your system, your thought process, your framework, your courses. That’s the kind of licensing you and I are talking about here. And I can’t wait to dive into this with you and at least start to skim the surface of this first. burning question that I already know that you want to know the answer to immediately.

    [00:05:10] So in order to answer the question of how do you actually price your curriculum for licensing, first, there are some things, some very important things that you need to know. And some of these are common sense, let’s just be honest, but my job is to make sure that I’m filling in all the holes for you so you don’t do this wrong in the most I can do here for you on this free podcast, obviously giving away free information and, uh, it’s, it’s very valuable what we’re talking about here today.

    [00:05:42] So the first thing is you need to be able to identify your operational costs for licensing this. This is back to a lot of business 101. But frankly, you would be shocked at how many coaches and consultants out there don’t know their numbers. So the first thing you need to do is you need to understand your operational overhead of how much it’s gonna cost you in hard costs.

    [00:06:10] We’re not talking about your sweat equity here. Yeah, we’re talking hard cost of how much money your company is going to have to spend to maintain the release of your content into licensing. And here are some different areas that can control your costs. So where, first of all, is the training content going to live?

    [00:06:35] Does that training content live in your LMS or is that when you release your content to another company or another entrepreneur, you know, whatever that is? Who houses the content? There are hard costs with software. They’re hard operational costs with that. You need to know your company costs. Another example of this is is teams.

    [00:06:56] So are you’re in part of the release of your content to another organization or corporation or even another entrepreneur, whoever you plan to release your content to, which is Totally a different strategy. We can’t even get into today. The question is, is how much time is it going to take you and your team to actually facilitate that release?

    [00:07:19] Well, And will you or your team be required to provide ongoing operational support? So those are two really two of quite a few different numbers, but those are two really hard numbers that you can’t change. And if you’re trying to price your program for licensing and you don’t know those numbers, the very first thing you should be doing is going back to the organization or the potential licensee that you’re talking to and Getting the answers to those questions.

    [00:07:51] Where does the content live? Who is managing the, the, the it and the customer service and the onboarding of this, you need to know the expectations of you and your team so that you can understand the hard numbers. We aren’t even talking about profit. We aren’t even talking about the value of the actual program yet.

    [00:08:10] Step number one, there are some hardcore numbers that you need to know and before you can price any sort of licensing program for release, you need to know them. Other factors that will come into your pricing are legal costs and making sure that you have a correct licensing contract. By the way, we give all of our clients our licensing contracts template and we help our clients to actually customize that and then they can take it over to an attorney for legal advice.

    [00:08:35] So those are some shortcuts that our company can provide to you. But they’re very important costs, and you don’t ever want to cut legal corners in the process of licensing your intellectual property. So just make sure that you know what your costs are and that you can anticipate those costs before you give an organization a price for your program.

    [00:08:57] Now, there are other factors, and I want to break these apart for you. So what is the ROI of what you deliver? First of all, there’s two Basic forms of ROI that your content can deliver and that your content can deliver both. First of all, your content can deliver an actual tangible training benefit of some kind.

    [00:09:21] So you’re up leveling a skill, you’re up leveling, uh, the way, the way. People do things, you’re teaching a method or a process or you’re giving a system. You’re actually leveling up information. You’re feeding people or you’re feeding a company, a wonderful, amazing systems and processes that level up their knowledge, their implementation, their information, their content, their training, their skills.

    [00:09:44] That’s one side. And then, and I’m going to do a whole nother podcast for you guys on this. Cause I get questions about this all the time. The other side is your program can. also benefit lifestyle. So your program may have a training benefit, generally speaking, or it may also have a lifestyle benefit.

    [00:10:01] This is really important to understand. One technically is not more valuable than the other. So if you, for example, have a program that teaches people how to increase sales, teaches sales teams in an organization, the exact thing to say, and it gives a sales process. That fits in an actual skill upgrade.

    [00:10:23] If your program is helping to increase wellness and mindfulness and lifestyle, that is a lifestyle benefit in both are as important, but you need to do the work and find out the ROI. Every single thing has a number. Okay, not talking about sales numbers. Every single solution has a correlated number that it can relate to that affects the bottom line of every single company or the bottom line of every single individual.

    [00:11:01] It and when I’m talking about bottom line, it’s not always dollars in increase in bottom line could be more time. It could be, uh, saving frustration. It could be helping parents communicate with teenagers. It could be preparing for a baby, or it could be equity, diversity and inclusion and understanding how to level up an organization with your training.

    [00:11:23] You know, there’s so many different parts of what you do, and it benefits in two different categories, either a training category or a lifestyle benefit category. Pretty generalized here just for the sake of this podcast. But step number one, know your operational expenses. Step number two, be able, you have to be able to articulate the ROI that your program actually delivers.

    [00:11:44] And you need to find the numbers, the percentages, the statistics out there that relate to the solution you provide. And then step number three is to actually price the program itself. And I told you that I would give you our two main pricing formulas here on this show. And here is my promise delivered.

    [00:12:01] There are two ways to price your program for licensing. Number one is bulk pricing, and number two is what we call Amplify ROI pricing. And that one particularly is named after our Amplify licensing accelerator and program. Now, let me explain to you the difference of these. Bulk pricing is pretty general, exactly what you’re thinking.

    [00:12:25] You are going to reduce the cost based on the number of seats in a program. So if you are selling at retail, let’s say your program’s 1, 000 retail per person. If an organization wants to buy 1, 000 seats to 1, 000 a program, how much are you willing to reduce that cost for that organization without undervaluing the transformation that you deliver?

    [00:12:48] So bulk pricing. Pretty straightforward. You know, I don’t ever want you guys winging anything with pricing because there are many other things that come into a factor with pricing. But for the sake of this podcast, most of you guys are probably thinking, Oh, well, do I just bolt price it? Those are, those are the questions I get when we connect with new businesses.

    [00:13:08] Uh, it’s usually, do I bolt price it? And the answer is yes, you can absolutely do that. They’re. Tons of other factors, including value and operational expenses and ROI. And are you collecting royalties? Uh, and all the other things that you could add into that, like your consulting time and workshops you may teach, or maybe you’re doing a keynote.

    [00:13:29] There are so many other things that factor in that, but pricing structure, number one is bulk pricing. We do have a bulk pricing calculator that we give to all of our clients. If that’s something that you would like to access. And then the other side of it, this one is a bit more complicated. It’s actually my favorite, and the reason why it’s my favorite is because when you present this pricing structure to a potential licensee for your program, there’s nothing that they can ever say to you to say, this price is wrong or this price is too much.

    [00:14:03] There’s nothing that they’re ever going to be able to do based on how we use this Amplify ROI pricing calculator. And here is what it is at a high level. You price your program based on the ROI. Whether, remember a minute ago we talked about whether it’s a training ROI or a lifestyle ROI, and it doesn’t necessarily always equal hard numbers, you price your program based on the ROI that you reasonably believe that your program can deliver.

    [00:14:39] And the coolest part about this, you guys, it’s, I’m going to geek out on numbers now, which this is the only area of business that I actually geek out on numbers. Let’s be real. Um, and, uh, you know, not a huge numbers fan here until it comes to something like licensing and pricing and, and profit. But the reason why this is so cool is because you can actually customize the ROI based on every single company’s specific use case.

    [00:15:11] So you can say this number of, you have this number of people in your organization that are affected by this problem. And based on your organization’s numbers, very specifically, we are going to charge you this because we reasonably believe we can create change for your organization based on your Own numbers in what’s so cool about this amplify pricing calculator in when you just generally speaking, when you are able to articulate what your program delivers and then be able to say, and here you go, this is your organization, or this is your small business, or this is your corporation, or this is your university.

    [00:16:00] And here, here’s what is being affected in your sphere and with based on your numbers, you literally take the potential licensees own numbers, whether it’s numbers based on people or numbers based on the statistics or numbers based on sales or numbers based on attrition, whatever that is that that organization is struggling with and the, your program obviously affects and solves and we can literally take the organization’s own numbers and show them back to them.

    [00:16:29] And it’s such a cool thing in being able to have the power to sit across the virtual, which is really what it is now table from an organization and saying, I see where you guys are struggling here. I want to be able to partner with you. I want to bring this solution that we know is proven. We know it’s transformational, which we have to know that little little prerequisite here.

    [00:16:51] If your program and your content isn’t transformational yet, we need to level that up. And sit across from them and say, here you go. Based on your numbers. This is what we have and we want to create this change for you. And we want to, we want to help you do this. That is the Amplify ROI pricing formula.

    [00:17:11] And so let’s kind of recap what we talked about here today. We talked about how to price your program for licensing. No joke. You guys, this is the number one thing that I get people reaching out to me on LinkedIn and Instagram and sending us messages saying, I’ve been approached by a company and they, you know, I need you to help me price this very, very fast.

    [00:17:32] Within our own client private ecosystem, we do help with those type of emergency wonderful opportunities. But here on the podcast, let’s be real. I can’t I can’t give you the exact answers to that. And I would be doing you a disservice if I did. I haven’t even heard your voice yet. So I’m giving you as much as I can to really equip you to move in the right direction to start thinking strategically about licensing so that You don’t shoot yourself in the foot so that you don’t undersell yourself.

    [00:18:00] Um, and let me tell you a quick case study of a client of ours because I want you to feel this way as well. She came to us and she was teaching a 6, 000 workshop to an organization. She had amazing systems and processes and materials and she’d been a consultant to corporations for a really, really long time.

    [00:18:19] And based on her content, we were able to repackage it. And represent her program out using a combination of the bulk calculator and the amplify pricing calculator. And she was able to turn around and license this program for 298, 000. And she said to me, she’s like, I never would have ever asked for that much.

    [00:18:44] And so that might be what you’re thinking. You know, when we talk to clients with licensing, sometimes there’s. A big mindset block in this where you’re thinking, how can I go from selling something that might have been, you know, even like a 10, 000 strategy or a 1, 000 course or shoot, even if it’s a 9 course for heaven’s sakes, how can I go from that?

    [00:19:10] To licensing it to an organization and asking them for 100, 000 or a million dollars for it. And the answer to that is understanding number one, the measurable value of your work. Number two, the tangible transformation for the end user, for the licensee and the end user. So let’s, wow, I should do a whole nother podcast episode for you guys on this, but there’s a difference between your licensee and your end user, right?

    [00:19:39] When we’re moving into a licensing business model, and you’re, you’re leveling up in this B2B landscape, your end user is, is not the one you’re selling to. It’s different. The licensee is different than the end user. But that’s step number two, is being able to communicate the tangible, predictable, measurable results for the licensee.

    [00:20:01] Not even just the end user for the licensee the company that’s actually licensing your content from you and then being able to sit in front Of them showing them their own numbers and confidently and reasonably pricing based on research based Pricing methodologies in once you have this if you in any way struggle with mindset.

    [00:20:23] I can’t charge this much. How on earth am I going to charge as much blah, blah, blah, blah, blah. Then understanding the process of going through in pricing, your IP pricing, your trainings and your programs and adjusting that price accordingly to each one of your licensees. It’s just going to wipe out. Any of the guesswork that you’ve ever had, and you’re going to be able to confidently stand on your work, on your genius, on your intellectual property, knowing without a shadow of a doubt that you are going to deliver the predicted results that the program says that it will deliver in a reasonable, ethical pricing manner.

    [00:20:57] And guess what? When you’re done with that pricing, you may look at those numbers and say, that’s a half a million dollars. But you’re going to feel so good because you know, just like my client knew when we went from 6, 000 to 298, 000, she knew that we’d done the work. She saw the formula on paper. She knew the ROI because she’d done the work to unpack the process of Pricing and there was never a question and guess what happened when she went, she was so nervous to go back to this organization and say, yes, you know, here you go.

    [00:21:29] Here’s a proposal. It’s 298, 000. The guy looked at her and he goes, you know, across from zoom, you looked at her and he goes, Oh yeah. Okay. Yeah. That sounds great. Okay. Well I’ll get back to you later on today. This looks great. I mean, she probably could have charged even a lot more than she did. And her mind was blown about the value that she provided.

    [00:21:49] And I mean, at the end of the day, that’s what we’re all here to do, right? I’m here creating this podcast episode for you to, to create value. And to pour into you and to help create a change in your thinking and your business so that you can move on to do the work that you’re really called to do. You’re here to learn how to price it so you can create value and pour in to the people that you’re supposed to serve and expand your reach.

    [00:22:17] But both of us, you and me, we truly deserve to be compensated from the years and the blood, sweat, and tears and the research and the experience that we’ve gathered in order to do what we both do. You deserve to be compensated for your work. I deserve to be compensated for my work. We’ve worked hard to earn that.

    [00:22:39] But in the same thing, we always lead with providing value. And when was my last thing I’ll say to you here in this episode, when you lead with always serving first, no one will ever question pouring into the value that you request. Never. They’re never going to question that because they truly believe that you have their best interest in mind because you actually do.

    [00:23:06] That’s the difference maker. And you can actually take this pricing lesson in this strategy and apply it to everything that you’re doing, whether you’re pricing a course or a mastermind or a retreat or anything else as well. That’s how we price these programs and that’s how you’re going to be successful.

    [00:23:24] I hope and know that you found value in this. I appreciate you being here again. My name is April Beach. We work with subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants to build million dollar offer ecosystems and help you license your IP. and expand your reach to build your business and your life to the next level.

    [00:23:45] So if that’s the strategy that you need and you are looking for, here are two different resources that I will provide for you to get started. The first one is just go over to our website at sweetlifeco. com. Again, that’s sweet life. Co. com. You can find an application to apply to work with us or be in any of our programs, our licensing accelerator, any of our workshops at any time, or you can dive right into our very first kickoff training.

    [00:24:13] It’s called licensing launch pad, and it’s an awesome little micro training that takes you through even deciding who you want to sell it to. And I even break down what industries are buying from you. And that program can be accessed by visiting licensinglaunchpad. com. Again that’s licensinglaunchpad.

    [00:24:34] com. And if you found value in this episode, please share it with your friends. We are just going on year number seven of producing this podcast and I refuse advertisers. Because I think they’re very annoying and they, and they break our thought process. So because of that, we really appreciate you just clicking the up arrow and sharing this show on LinkedIn or on Instagram and just helping us expand the reach of our work.

    [00:25:00] Thank you so much for listening and I will talk to you guys soon.




    Scale Your Coaching Business: B2B Transition Made Easy with April Beach (Episode 315)

    Scale Your Coaching Business: B2B Transition Made Easy


    Who This Show Is For and Why It’s Important:
    This episode is crafted for you, the seasoned consultant or coach, who’s considering moving from B2C to B2B. It’s essential for those of you who have proven success with clients and have developed systematic approaches in your work. This is about taking your impact and profitability to the next level while easing your workload.
    In this episode, we specifically guide you through developing and implementing two core strategies for transitioning to B2B consulting. First, we focus on creating a certification program to train other professionals in your field, turning potential competitors into your clients. This approach leverages your expertise and establishes a collaborative network. Second, we explore the process of licensing your unique methodologies to these professionals. This strategy not only extends the reach of your work but also enhances your role as a thought leader in the industry, all while reducing your direct workload.
    • Developing a Certification Program: You’ll learn to transform competitors into clients by creating a training or certification program in your expertise.
    • Licensing Your Expertise: Discover how licensing your methodologies can broaden your business scope and reinforce your thought leadership.
    • Reducing Workload, Increasing Impact: Understand how these strategies can lessen your day-to-day tasks while boosting your impact and income.
    • Establishing Thought Leadership: Insights on how to position yourself as an industry thought leader.
    • Fostering a Professional Community: Emphasizes the value of building a network of professionals using your methods towards shared goals.
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:
    April Beach (00:00.854)
    All right, let's dive into the nitty gritty of this episode here. So we're talking about the opportunity for you to move from B2C consulting to B2B business coaching and strategic consulting. And first of all, I wanna unpack who is this for. So this episode in general is for those of you guys who are established consultants. You're an established coach.
    or you're an established subject matter expert and you have already been working with clients sometime. You have a track record of getting clients results and you've already created systems and methods and processes to get clients results. You've used these, you may have courses and trainings and retreats that you host or one-on-one consulting sessions, one-on-group consulting sessions. Basically, you have done that side of your business. You have built your business, you're good at what you do, you have your offers and your programs.
    That is who this episode is for. And frankly, that is who's ready for this conversation. Now, when we're talking about moving B2B, there are some things that I want you to be thinking about because it sounds really sexy and you're probably seeing other people do it and you think that it could be really lucrative, but I'm here to unpack the back end of it as well so that you're really sure whether or not this is a good decision for yourself. So here are some markers.
    that you may identify when you're ready to move over to B2B Coaching. So the first thing is, is are you still super happy and excited about working with your clients? So if you...
    They're kind of getting into this place where you've been serving clients a long time. You've been doing what you've been doing and you're ready for something new. You're ready to move up for a new challenge or maybe another level of impact, another level of significance that you're having and you're feeling like you want to impact more people. You're probably thinking, oh, well, I'm going to be doing less people in this way. You're actually not. I'll explain it to you. But you want to do something higher, bigger, more.
    April Beach (01:59.242)
    and maybe you just are ready for a totally different challenge, then B2B consulting is a great opportunity for you. If you've done that, you've been there, you've done that, you feel like your programs are on a roll and you want to level up your business, level up your thought leadership, level up your personal brand, level up your business brand and level up your profit, B2B is really the way to go. Here is the warning though. If you still want to be completely hands-on,
    in B2C, so you still want to be the primary person delivering all your programs. You just love your whole business to consumer side of your business. Even if you're working with other coaches, whatever that is, you love it, love it, love it, and you're not ready to get out of it, then maybe it's not quite the time for you. And then another consideration for you, when we're talking about moving over to B2B is, are you ready?
    and hear me out when I say this, it might give you like little heart palpitations, are you ready to allow other people to, other coaches like you perhaps, to access your materials, to access your systems, to access your IP, to access your, you know, all of your SOPs and your processes and your trainings. Does the thought of that make you super excited or are you like, oh no?
    I don't want anybody seeing all of my assets, all of my IP and my gold. I could never imagine another company having access to my stuff and me not being the one to actually distribute it. So those are just some things I want you to think about. There are no right or wrong answers there, but my job, my responsibility, my passion for what I do in our industry is pouring in all these strategic thinking objectives for you so that you can make smart choices for yourself.
    So those are just some of the things I want you to be thinking of. When we're talking about moving from a B to C business model and moving over to a B to B business model, we have to take in a lot of considerations. And here's some very specific questions I would love for you to address for yourself. So first of all is, what do you wanna be known for? What do you wanna be known for in your space? Do you wanna be known as this person, this front runner, or
    April Beach (04:20.514)
    Do not really care if your name is all over everything, but maybe it's more important for your methods and your teachings to get in the hands of more people. That is one thing I just want you to be thinking of. And then the next thing, like I talked about, is what are you excited about? What work do you wanna do? What are you really excited about creating new things or working with new people or helping to make an impact in your industry in a different way? If you're excited about that, that is really an important indicator that you're ready possibly to move into B2B coaching.
    And then the third thing is how important is it to you to expand the reach of your work? So let's kind of unpack what this looks like. When you are working B2C, even if you are doing huge launches of group programs, you're still only impacting the end users of that program, whether you have 10 or 20 or 20,000 people in your program.
    You're still only impacting 10 or 20 or 20,000 people with your program. When you go to a B2B model, let's say for example, you were going to give another consultant an opportunity to share your program's content, your work only lies in the effort to bring those other consultants and coaches up to speed.
    So let's say you have five different consultants and coaches that you're working with on a B2B capacity and you're allowing them to share and distribute your work. And now let's say that each one of those coaches had 20 or 200 or 20,000 people in their program. Now look at what you've done. It's basic math that you are creating an exponential reach with your work.
    And a couple of cool things happen when we do that. Number one, your workload actually tends to be reduced. Number two, you get to be elevated to that thought leader space. Number three, you get to work with more go-getters, gung-ho people that are really passionate about the same things you are and support them. And you don't have to be the one, usually in all the marketing and the nitty gritty and some of the really tiring work that tends to...
    April Beach (06:43.954)
    happen and burn out coaches and consultants and service experts. You don't have to be a part of that anymore. And so moving from B to C to B to B could be a really great option for you. And if those things make you excited, then you're in the right place with this podcast. You're also in the right place for working with us at The Suite Life Company. This is what we do. We help establish coaches.
    and subject matter experts and consultants develop your next level programs and sell them B2B through licensing and certification and other ways we can expand your roots. So now what I want to do for you as promised is I want to unpack the most basic but super powerful. So just because it's basic, don't think it's not good. As a matter of fact, we have a handful of clients that have completely
    revolutionized their entire business model with these steps I'm giving you here. And they have never been happier. As a matter of fact, I just talked to a client yesterday and we worked with her to change her business model from B to C to B to B. And she literally sent me a message yesterday. She said, April, I have never.
    been more happy in the work I'm doing. I've never felt like I was really able to make the impact I was called to make and here I am with these simple changes and thank you so much and it's just amazing. As a matter of fact, she actually graduated out of our program. She doesn't even need us anymore because she is out in soaring and flying on her own and making this impact. So just because what I'm gonna tell you is simple, please take it to heart.
    because this is what people pay me a lot of money to tell them, right? And so that's what our podcast insiders get. So the first business model to move you to B2B from B2C is what I call a one-two punch. So that would be creating a training program for your competition. This is what we call turning your clients, or turning your competition into your clients.
    April Beach (08:49.346)
    Let me say that again, because it's a good punch line and I messed it up. This is what I call turning your competition into your clients. So we can literally take your competition and bring them into an ecosystem and you can create a certificate or a certification program and actually certify other professionals in your established methodology, or you can certify them to use your tools or your process.
    So we are duplicating you. So step one is the building of that certification program, bringing other people that used to be your competition now into an amazing ecosystem of all these different businesses and might be working with similar audience. We may have seen that they're like, quote unquote, competitors in the past, but now all of a sudden you're creating a collective of like-minded people that are all working towards and achieving this goal. And they all understand one thing.
    One very important powerful thing, they all know your processes, your methods, your frameworks, your systems, and they're all able to tell people that they are certified or trained or accredited or whatever words you wanna use. We're not gonna get into all the language here in this. There are ramifications for the language you use, good and bad, but they are trained in your methodology.
    And so what this does for us is it helps us to open up this entire world in where you are working with these people, you're having these mastermind meetings, you're training people in your ways and your ninja skills, and you are giving them all of your steps and tools and processes. And you know who this is really great for? This is really great for your competition that isn't quite to where you were in business.
    Like they always looked up to you. So you're thinking, wow, you know, who would wanna do this? Let me tell you who. They're usually businesses that have not achieved the level of success that you have with your clients. And so they're looking for these shortcuts. They're looking for ways where they can provide their clients with better results. And then therefore, now my dogs are barking.
    April Beach (10:58.57)
    And then therefore, when they provide better results to their clients, then they make more money, and then it's also expanding the reach of your work. So when we're talking about a one-two punch, step number one is creating an opportunity for other businesses to become certified or trained on your methodology, and they can take that into their own program services, businesses, courses, retreats, masterminds, memberships, whatever that is.
    And in the process, we're elevating you as that thought leader still, you're making more money, but you're not the one having to deliver it. So that's step number one. And then the one, two, here you go. Here's the right hook, left hook of this business strategy is then on the after that, after you have validated that they're good at what they do, they can follow along the processes, then you give them an opportunity to license your materials and actually use your trainings.
    coaching steps Worksheets all of your materials within their own consulting programs. So first of all you train them in your ways Like Star Wars padawan I have to use that reference because I just finished watching all of the Star Wars Soca series with my teenage boys and if you are a parent and you have boys and you know exactly what I'm talking about so that you know in Star Wars they have like that
    the Jedi and they have like the padawan. Well, you can create that. You can create these little padawans with your methodology and all of your thoughts and teach them what you know. So instead of competing, you're creating a collective of amazing professionals that are all centered around using your genius work to elevate their clients. And then part two, after they're certified or accredited or they've received the stamp of approval or whatever you end up calling it.
    Then you give them permission to use your materials in their own business, and that is called a license. So there's a separate, there's the certification and the training period first, and then there is the licensing period where you give them permission to utilize your materials in their programs with their people. In this, by far, my friends, is the quickest, fastest way to transition you from B2C to B2B.
    April Beach (13:21.046)
    Here are a couple of things that we know. The people that admire you the most, the businesses that are really tracking and following along with what you're doing because they're trying to be like you or they're trying to level up, they're on your email list. They're following what you're doing. When you and when our clients in the past have put out a statement saying, we're about to do something totally different. We're about to take our program system training and allow for other
    coaches and consultants to learn it, to access it, to see on the inside. And I'm gonna teach you my ways. It is gangbusters. All of a sudden, literally in one email or one social post or one video, we have taken you from swimming in that red ocean, competing with all these other people to elevating you.
    catapulting you, you're on a yacht, you're on a parasail flying over the water, you are in a totally different realm where all of a sudden you are leading the way because you're thinking differently. The definition of a thought leader is not somebody who's just talking about all this stuff all the time, it's somebody that's truly thinking and working in a different way and presenting their ideas in their business and in questioning things and disrupting things. You're literally leading a different way of thinking.
    And when you transition from B2C to B2B in this way, we are instantly elevating you to that thought leader platform and people are gonna follow you because they see that you're doing something different and they see that you're including them and you're not trying to bury them and smush them, that you're literally collectively working to build a future of profit for everybody. And that is one of the most powerful things that I can share with you about moving from B2B to B2C over to B2B.
    So let's kind of recap what we talked about in this episode. It's a short power packed episode, but again, my job here is to introduce you to the world of B2B strategic consulting, licensing, next level offers and programs. And so in this, you're gonna get from us here on the podcast strategic thought processes for those of you guys that are ready for these next levels of business strategy. And of course,
    April Beach (15:35.87)
    We're here for you when you are ready for the coaching and you're ready to dive in, you're ready to get our processes to be successful in this. Of course, you know where to find us at sweetlifeco.com and we're ready and willing to work with you. We can't wait to work with you. But my job here is just to get you to think differently, especially in an oversaturated consulting and coaching space. So.
    With that being said, what we talked about today is if you have an established consulting business, coaching business, you're a subject matter expert, you're a service-based entrepreneur of some kind. And you've been doing what you've been doing, you have great processes, you have great methods, you have great steps of service, they've gotten people results in the past, and you're kind of over it. You're ready, you're kind of wondering what's next, or I'm getting burned out.
    I'm ready to make more money. I'm ready to help more people. I'm ready to expand the reach of my work. I'm ready to get out of marketing and online funnels and all of these things that tend to be incredibly exhausting for really hardworking coaching and consultants that are trying to continue to scale their business. If that's where you are, a consideration of moving to B2B is something that would be really, really good for you to take a moment and think about.
    And today on this episode, I have shared with you the one-two punch of a business model that you can use, that many of our clients use, to go from this B2C to B2B. And that business model is, first part of it, is creating the access to your systems for other coaches and consultants. Creating a community, creating collaboration. You know, we've talked about this for the last three years, is that community and collaboration of partnerships
    is the future of business growth. It's not competition, it's collaboration. That sounds like such a cheesy Instagram line, but here I'm showing you the business model of how that works. It's not a cheesy Instagram line. It's a business strategy. And I want you to have the best of the best of the business strategies to elevate the work and to be rewarded financially and in your lifestyle for the work that you've done.
    April Beach (17:47.966)
    So that first punch is creating an environment to bring in other people that could benefit from understanding your processes and your methods and giving them access to it. And then part two is then for maybe all the people or a small portion of the people, licensing them the ability to even utilize your materials and your trainings, your recordings, your teachings, you can even give them.
    And this is like the last bonus tip I'll give you. I'll share with you a little story. I have been doing this since 2008 in my own business. One of the reasons why I'm qualified to teach people how to do this, I've been doing this for a very long time. And at one point in time, at first, I just gave other businesses the recordings of my classes. And I said, Ayanna, you can distribute these in your business. But then I realized, just like we want you thinking about, we're always creating offers and programs that is the best.
    for our people, we wanna serve our people. And so in that same line of thinking, even though they used to be what you consider competition, they're my clients now. And I was thinking, what would really be the best for them? What would really make these consultants, these coaches look so good to their clients? And what would make them make more money? Because when they make more money, I make more money. And I realized that I wanted to literally give them.
    all of my curriculum and even give them the ability to re-record my classes with their face, their voice, even in some cases their company logo on them. And as soon as I realized how to package my IP in a way that would allow for other businesses to succeed and make more money and it was all about them and I wasn't trying to hold on to so much control.
    because I was ready to do something else and I was ready for the next level of my life and my business. So I was okay with that. That is when all the floodgates were opened and everybody just got so freaking blessed. It was absolutely incredible. And the profits had been rolling in ever since. And so those are some of the things I want you to be thinking about here as we talk about this transition. But now that you've listened to this whole episode and we've spent about 20 minutes together.
    April Beach (20:03.938)
    The most important thing is coming back to the beginning. Are you ready for this? Are you holding on to your work that you wanna be the only one teaching what you teach and how you teach it and the way you teach it? And if that's where you are, that's awesome. It's the identification that that's where you are. You could be there forever and that is absolutely so cool for you. But if you're to that place where you're like, yeah, you know, I think I can kind of loosen this up a little bit and I think I would be okay with others understanding my secrets.
    my intellectual property, my secret sauce, my unique method and framework that, you know, is just absolutely delivering guaranteed transformations. As soon as you realize that it's okay and you're ready to open up that grip a little bit and you're ready to think bigger, think at the next level, think about a more reach and how many more people you can impact and how much more money you can make and you're ready for that next level of your business, then this is a great.
    move for you to consider. And as we're here kind of a little bit towards the beginning of this new year, when you're listening to this, we're gonna be focusing a lot here in 2024 on the Suite Life podcast, unpacking a lot of strategies that we work with our very high level private clients and with clients in our Amplify ecosystem. I'm gonna be sharing some of these things with you because I wanna introduce this, I wanna introduce you to some of these things that you may not be aware of.
    that I know are gonna make a huge impact in your business. And this is one of those episodes that could literally, if you listen to this and you think on it and you start taking action on it, this is one of those episodes that could be a complete life changer for you in your business moving forward. And I hope that you give this particular episode the attention that it deserves and to give yourself permission to ask yourself those questions that we talked about in the beginning, you can always replay this. And of course,
    We are here for you. When you're ready to make these transitions and you want a strategic partner, to think about all the ins and outs, to help you decide what you give away and what you keep, and to give you the frameworks and the processes to actually build this next level of your business, I would love for you to reach out to us. You can find all of our resources by visiting sweetlifeco.com. We have programs, we have accelerators, we have retreats, we have one-on-one, and we have amazing workshops that will bring you and your business into this next area.
    April Beach (22:30.486)
    Thank you so much for tuning into this show. I can't wait to drop more trainings for you this year and all the experts we have lined up to work with you this year. And we just really appreciate you sharing the show with your friends.



    How to Create Impactful VIP Days: Step-by-Step Strategies for Coaches with April Beach and Amy Yamada (Episode 314)

    How to Create Impactful VIP Days: Step-by-Step Strategies for Coaches


    Episode Bonus: 
    Thinking about selling VIP days and don’t know how to start? You’re in the right place! In this engaging episode, we sit down with Amy Yamada, a seasoned expert in the coaching realm, to explore the ins and outs of creating and offering VIP days. This episode is a goldmine for coaches and consultants eager to inject a fresh, personalized approach into their services. If you’re looking to set yourself apart in the coaching market with offerings that truly resonate with your clients, offering VIP Days might be your answer? 
    In this show, Amy walks us through the key elements of crafting VIP days that not only meet but exceed client expectations. You’ll learn how to pinpoint exactly what your clients need and tailor your VIP days to address these needs effectively. We also dive into strategies for confidently setting and communicating your prices, ensuring your clients understand the immense value of these specialized sessions. Plus, Amy shares her secrets on post-session follow-ups that keep the momentum going and strengthen client relationships. 
    By the end of this episode, you’ll have a starting roadmap for offering VIP days in your coaching or consulting business. You’ll also be equipped with actionable tips and a deeper understanding of how to create these powerful, transformative experiences. So, if you’re ready to take your coaching game to the next level, tune in and let’s get started. 
    At the end of this episode, you understand: 
    1. Tailoring VIP Days to Client Needs: Understand how to identify and address your clients’ unique challenges and goals, ensuring that each VIP day is a personalized and impactful experience.
    2. Effective Pricing Strategies: Learn how to set and communicate the value of your VIP days, enabling you to confidently charge rates that reflect the high-quality, bespoke service you provide.
    3. Post-Session Engagement: Discover the importance of follow-up support and how it can enhance the effectiveness of your VIP day, leading to stronger, ongoing client relationships.
    4. Marketing Your VIP Days: Gain insights into effectively promoting your VIP days, highlighting their unique benefits and differentiating your services in a competitive market.
    5. Practical Implementation: Walk away with actionable steps to integrate VIP days into your coaching or consulting business, enhancing both client satisfaction and business growth.
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    April (00:02)
    All right, you guys, I’m back again with my friend, Amy Umada. And the last time she was here, we were talking about ChatGPT, which is also an area of Amy’s expertise. So you can go back and listen to episodes 277 and 278 if you are here and you want to know more about utilizing ChatGPT to streamline your operations and your marketing and all these genius things that Amy teaches. But today we’re talking about VIP days. And this is such a timely topic.
    completely in transparency for you guys, because you know, I’ll also always tell you the truth. I really hadn’t had shows lined up that I was really excited about for 2024 yet. And I thought of Amy and we do some collaboration together. And I was thinking, oh my gosh, this is just the perfect show to do. Let’s dive into VIP days. Because as you guys remember, we just did a show where we dropped the latest trends for subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants. And the number one trend is that people
    are no longer seeking to be part of these big, huge launches, these big, huge programs where they’re another number and they are paying for highly curated experiences. And this is a perfect introduction into talking about VIP days with Amy. Amy, thank you so much for coming on the show with us. How are you? I’m so glad to be back and speaking about a topic that I’m very passionate about. And it’s just something where whether you’re totally new to VIP days and this is your introduction to them or you’ve been doing them for a while and you wanna take them to the next level.
    I just think it’s a very fun topic because it’s been probably the most fun, easy, and impactful offer that I’ve had as part of one of my offers. And so I’m excited to share anything that can support those who want to offer them this year. I am totally excited to dive in. Okay. So let’s first of all define what a VIP day is.
    Let’s start at the…
    the basics of the basics. You’re a coach, you’re a consultant, you’re thinking, hey, you know, VIP day, not only sounds like something I would like to attend, but maybe something I would like to sell. How do I define a VIP day versus just a day attending a workshop with me, perhaps? Yeah, that’s a great question. So the way I like to define a VIP day is think of it as a private, like a one-on-one full day intensive.
    And you can call it what you want. I know in the coaching industry, we call it a VIP day. You could call it a personal retreat. You could call it a one day intensive. You can call it a solo experience. I mean, you can really call it whatever you want that makes sense for you and your ideal client. But it’s a way for you to work with someone, completely personalize the day to them and think about what is it that my ideal client wants to get out of our experience together and what is their ultimate desire transformation or outcome?
    And by coming together for a full day, whether it’s in person or virtually, you can accelerate their experience of getting to where they want to go. So I just have found that it’s been a great way to work with those who, as you said, not all people want to jump into a long-term coaching program or a group or a mastermind, even though I’ve loved those formats as well. But it’s been nice to have something that is short and accelerated and gives them my personalized attention. OK. So I want faster results.
    I want your personal attention. I’m gonna seek out a VIP day. And I know that there are customers out there that are certainly looking for that as well. You know, and really quick, just talking about the trends, have you noticed that as well, being in the industry for a while, that change away from these big, huge mass launches and programs where they would be, you know, 500,000 seats sold at a time. Have you seen that as well in your space?
    I mean, it’s been interesting because I was recently a part of another entrepreneurs big launch and they still did very well. I mean, I think that it was a launch that does target newer entrepreneurs that really, you know, when you’re newer and you’re just like craving the information, you’re like, I want to know the model. I know I want to know the secret. I don’t have a large budget. So I think there’s still a time and space for that. But especially for those who’ve been in their businesses or own businesses for two, three, five, ten plus years. I think you just get to a point where.
    It’s more about implementation and team systems and then investing in the very specific things that you need versus being a part of a larger group mastermind. And I say that and I’m still a part of a larger group mastermind, but even when I have been a part of a group mastermind, I always find like my business besties within it and we create our own pod, you know, and I make a note of getting to know the lead coach and the coaches. I’m like, I don’t wanna just be another number even as a client, let alone have clients that feel that way too.
    So I think that when you’re working with someone who’s been in business for multiple years, then they are craving that personalized attention and a very specific outcome. So yeah, I totally get what you’re saying about that. That’s so funny. That’s really good insight. And actually, now that you said that, I think that’s how you and I met. I think you and I onboarded the same day into that larger business mastermind. Funny, that was like years ago. It seems like, okay, I think that’s how we met. Who knows? All right.
    So let’s dive into really how does, you know, our listeners are subject matter experts and coaches and consultants and authors and speakers. And they’re thinking about doing this VIP day, but they’re second guessing whether or not they’re qualified to actually even deliver a VIP experience, which we’ll talk about later, but even just be in a position to charge what needs to be charged in order to truly deliver a VIP experience. So I know
    that a lot of people based on what you say face this resistance of, wow, can I actually do this? So where do you want them to start first even thinking about whether or not they should offer VIP services within their business? Yeah, I would say that the first step is to enroll yourself first. Meaning, and just know that I struggled with thinking about charging high ticket for a VIP day. What I teach now is I teach clients and workshop attendees on creating and selling a $10,000 VIP day.
    And I myself really struggled with the thought of that at one point in my journey because I’d never done it. Right. So it was that whole question of like, who might have think that anyone would invest anything to work with me for a day? And I had a mentor at the time that was encouraging me to sell them for ten thousand dollars. I’m like, there’s no I’m a very optimistic person and there’s no way. I was like, I can’t do it. And she said, OK, how about we’re like negotiating? She’s like, how about seventy five hundred? I’m like, no, I just I can’t even imagine saying the words out loud on a call with someone. And she said, all right.
    How about this? How about you sell the first two at $5,000 and then bump it up to $7,500 and sell like six more? Which was an ambitious goal within a month. And I said, I’ll see what I can do. And that month, I ended up selling five VIP days for $5,000 each, paid in full. So it was a nice $25,000 bump in my business, right? Like who doesn’t love a nice revenue bump? Right. And it was so great to just get out of my comfort zone and stop making it about me.
    and my limiting beliefs of who am I to think that anyone will ever invest $5,000 to work with me for a day. And instead, focus the spotlight on them, them being your ideal client and ask yourself, do I believe I can make a difference for them if I got to spend one dedicated day with them? It just has a reframe on it. So whenever I shift my thinking like
    Do I believe I could really make a difference for someone? Yes, I could make a difference for someone. If we got to sit down and roll up our sleeves and spend a whole day together, like think about how much you could do in a day and how you can accelerate their growth because they don’t have to do all the things you did to get to where you are now because you’re gonna fast track them. You’re gonna share with them what has worked and what hasn’t worked with yourself and others. So I would say enroll yourself first and ask yourself, like think about someone, think about one person that represents your ideal client and ask yourself.
    Do I believe I can make a difference for them if I got to spend one entire day with them, whether it was in-person or virtual? And I’m willing to bet the answer is yes. Okay, now you’re enrolled in someone enrolling in a VIP day with you. So it’s gonna be a lot easier for you to actually speak into this when you believe in the value of it. Wow, oh my gosh, I love that. And I can see why the graduated process that your coach was walking you through bought you into it as well. I know that that’s…
    how I started out as well, like a little bit more and a little bit more. And then all of a sudden I realized, wow, this is blowing these people’s socks off. They would have paid so much more than I actually charged for this. And look at the results. And I also I also remember that when I first started increasing my prices that it gave me so much more confidence as well, because I saw how blown away they are with their own results. And you’re right. It was just it was all about them. So that leads me to my next question. So.
    buying in and believing in your value, you know? And then we go, okay, but how do I actually transfer the value that I’m saying that you’re gonna get out of 10K into what I’m actually doing with them? How do I actually know, I have to structure this in some capacity, they can’t just show up and just hang out and I have some, you know, lunch waiting for them. There has to be some sort of a framework around what we’re gonna talk about.
    How do you recommend people determine the framework of that VIP day and what they’re actually doing, what problem they’re solving? That’s a great idea. Great question, I should say. One of the things that has helped my clients with answering this question is to grab a piece of paper, draw a line down the middle vertically. And so you make two columns. And on one side, you put pain points. On the other side, you put solutions at the top. And so then you can bullet point out, what are the top?
    pain points that your ideal client has? And then next to each pain point, what is a solution that you would recommend for each of those pain points? And by doing that, first of all, you can see how freaking brilliant you are because you have a solution for all of their problems. Right. And you might even notice that there might be some redundancies in the solutions, like, oh, if they have these three problems, this solution can actually address these three problems.
    But by doing this, you can also see, OK, here are some things that I can apply during a VIP day. And then just know that you’re going to customize the VIP day to the person. So one of the questions I often get from people is kind of what you’re saying is, what does this flow of the day look like? Well, first of all, it’s about what is the flow going to look like that’s going to best serve your ideal client. So whenever, like when in doubt with anything in my business, I always ask myself, what is the flow going to look like that’s
    How can I best support my ideal client? Or how can I make the biggest difference possible for them? So for some, they might prefer a shorter VIP day, like four hours. I remember having a mentor when I would invest in a VIP day with her. It was four hours was considered a full VIP day. And we would pack in it. Like, I mean, I would fly out to San Diego. I live in Seattle and I would go to her house and we’d grab some coffee and she’d have like a big flip charge. She’s like, all right, what are we talking about today? And we’d get to, it was fast and furious. And that’s what works for me in terms of a client.
    But as far as being a coach with my clients, I’m such a connector. I like to take our time. I don’t want to feel rushed, you know? So for me, I always go from, if it’s in person, it’s 10 to five. So it’s a full day, including a fabulous lunch. I like a little luxury, like a luxury in it. So, but that’s just the framework of like the itinerary, but what’s most important is what are they going to get out of it? So they’re coming to you because they want your personalized attention. They want access to you.
    and they want to accelerate their growth. It happens to be three A’s when I discovered this. It wasn’t planned, I’m not that clever, but access, attention, and acceleration. When they’re able to get that access to you as the expert and they get your personalized attention to really meet them where they are and get them to where they wanna go and accelerate their growth, the client is super happy. So I would say think about their pain points, the solutions to those pain points, and then customize the day specifically to the VIP day client that’s stepping in.
    So that really addresses those pain points and gets them going. I have so many questions I wanna ask you that are outside of the scope of what we’re talking about today. But about pre-boarding and on ramping and on boarding and off boarding that it’s all Amy’s area of expertise. You guys go to Amy, I’ll give you all the links. I know our clients are thinking or our listeners are thinking right now, well, how do I get ready for that? And how do I make sure it’s good and all these other systems? But.
    But I do want to ask this one question. When somebody curates this VIP day, how often do you find, and maybe this is just a personal question with you, how often do you find that there needs to be a little bit of an afterburn support after that VIP day? Or is that like, nope, we’re done, see you later bye, pay me another time? How does it usually work with you with your clients? Yeah, you know, it’s interesting you asked this because I’ve tested.
    different ways of supporting them after the fact. What I’ve found that has worked for me is to schedule, as a part of the package, one follow-up private coaching session to be used within 30 days after the VIP day. And here’s why. It can help with accountability. So if they’ve started implementing some things they’ve learned from the VIP day, it can help them hold themselves accountable to build that momentum. It can also be great for going deeper on anything we didn’t quite go as deep on that we planned on.
    Um, and then also on that call, you can, you can, towards the end of the call, if you believe that this client could become a longer term client, because you’re like, Oh my gosh, I love this person. We have such a great connection. I can see how I can help them implement. Maybe they become a private high ticket coaching client for you. Right. So, so I would say wait till the end because it is a coaching session, but towards the end, I might say something like, you know, based on everything that we’ve covered during the VIP day and during our session today,
    I believe I could help you further in terms of implementation. Do you want to talk about what would that look like? Or do you want to explore what that would look like? And oftentimes they’ve at least been curious about it. And so I’d say, okay, do you still have time today if we have space or we can talk in the next couple of days and then you can upsell them to a longer term offer. And it’s been great. And some of my clients who’ve had the fastest results have kicked things off with a VIP day because we just did that deep dive into what they’re up to and what they’re creating.
    The other thing I do want to share though, and I love that you were talking about the pre and the post, that one of the biggest pieces of advice that I can give if you really want to crush your VIP days is to include what I call an intention setting call before the VIP day. So for example, say that you enroll someone into a VIP day, but they’re flying out to you or you’re flying to a really cool destination and it’s a month away.
    We don’t want a whole month to go by. And then our first, our next conversation, I should say, to be in person on the VIP day. So I recommend scheduling, even if it’s 15 minutes, a short intention setting call or call, call it what you want to call it, but like a grounding call that you schedule within a week prior to your VIP day. And then when you jump on that call, keep it super laser focused. It’s not the VIP day. It’s not a coaching session. Uh, but if you are my client April, I’d say, okay, April, first of all, I’m super excited for our in-person VIP day coming up on Friday.
    from today’s vantage point, what specifically do you want to get out of our VIP day? And then I would take notes, take notes, because those notes are your guiding light, that’s your North star, your compass for the VIP day, bring it to your VIP day and say, okay, so we talked about the other day and that’s how you will get a testimonial every time. I love that. I have two clients flying in here to Boulder, one this month and one next month, and I’m going to do that.
    and I’ve never done it before. We usually do, it’s not even, they’re entering into a longer term mentorship with me. So it’s not just one VIP day, but I love the starting out in person. And I’m totally stealing that. Yeah, I’m totally stealing that. I’m like, we’re gonna set this intention call ahead of time to help me help you better. Okay, so we’ve talked about the framework. We talked about the understanding of believing. And I just want our listeners to realize
    you guys want this, I want this, Amy wants this, we all want this sort of level of service. So take that and now understand that your clients really want this too, as you’re going through this process. And I just, I feel really strongly about, especially moving forward in 2024, these curated mentorship type of business models, just because we know that so many people really are craving this. So just another little confidence boost if anybody’s.
    out there wondering if this is for you. Question is, do you want it? And if the answer is yes, then the answer is your people want it too. Okay, so now let’s kind of wrap it up. How do you actually close it? How do you actually say, this is what it is, this is what I’m offering and communicate the value of what it is that you are doing to close and convert those leads into buyers? I love this question. We can do a whole training series on this. I know, right? I’ll keep it
    Well, first of all, I always like to create what I call a confidence card, meaning an outline of the VIP day offer that are initially it’s like all about the benefits to them. And this is, I use it as a behind the scenes tool just to have in front of me when I’m going to call with someone. Some of my clients will create a beautified branded version of it to send them. But as far as your closing question, I just always, I’m just so real with it. You know, like when it comes to sales conversations, enrollment conversations, all I’m thinking about is how do I believe I can best support the person?
    So if I was talking to someone and I was asking them questions, finding out where they are, where they want to go, what they’re struggling with, all the usual questions. And if I truly believed that I could make a difference for them with a VIP day, I would say, I would say that. I would say, you know, I believe the best way that I could support you would be by us doing a VIP day together. And here’s why, right? And then speaking to the why, like when, and then I would focus on them. When you shared with me that you’re wanting X, Y, and Z, and that you’re struggling with this, you know, then this is exactly my sweet spot. And then I would…
    visualize with them. I’d say, just imagine us coming together. If we’re able to do it in person, even better. Come to my home here in Seattle. We’ve got a great view. We’ll roll our sleeves. And we can do the first half of the day, we can do a deep dive. So basically, share with them the visual of the journey. Here’s what I could see us doing. So the first half of the day, we’ll do a deep dive. In my case, it’s usually messaging. We’ll do a deep dive on your messaging, how you’re already. What is it that you’re already doing that’s not working so we can release that?
    We’ll look at all the puzzle pieces of your business so that we can just get a really good grasp of what you’re up to. And then we’ll have a fabulous lunch. And then after lunch, we’re going to focus on building out a plan that is implementable right after the VIP day. Something along those lines where they can really see that I’ve listened to them on our call and that I am being so honest about why I’m recommending this as the offer and the format and the vehicle in which we’ll cover what we need to cover. So.
    I just keep it real. I mean, here’s how I think I can best support you. What do you think? Right. Yeah. Do you take any clients that you are uncertain whether or not your personalities drive? No. If we are not a fit, we’re not a fit. I mean, it’s also a day of your life. I recently came across a quote that said, what you do each day should be important because you’re giving up a day of your life for it, or something like that. It’s not word for word.
    I have that. I will, I’m going to text you a picture. I have a big, huge one of the, it’s hanging on my wall downstairs. It’s written out in text cause you’re exchanging a day of your life for it. So make it good. Cause you’re exchanging a day of your life for it. I want my boys to see that every morning before they leave the house. So it’s a, it’s a big thing. So anyway, after this, here you go guys. I’ll upload it to the show notes so you can see it too.
    Uh, this statement. Um, but Amy, I appreciate this so much. And I mean, your wisdom and your framework and your teaching on VIP days for a really long time has been leading coaches and consultants in the industry. And so certainly a trusted resource and really appreciate you coming in here and, and teaching our listeners all about frameworks. And I know that you do have one of your VIP intensives coming up. Could you want to tell people about that? Obviously.
    You guys need to be subscribing and listening to this in real time. Otherwise it’s probably not going to be happening live if you’re listening to the replay, but Amy, tell us about what’s coming up for people that want to learn how to craft a VIP day. Yeah. Well, first of all, I do also have a cheat sheet that I just want to give. Oh, good. Yay. We can offer that link to get the VIP day cheat sheet. So just walks you through the steps to create promote and sell high ticket VIP day. So if you’re a go getter and you’re like, I just want to take it around with it. Great.
    I do have a couple of workshops coming up on, so I know some might be watching this afterwards, but if you’re not, it’s coming up on January 23rd, January 25th, I’m doing the same workshop twice. So people have two different times. So we can make sure we have links on that below. And then there will also be a limited time on demand training of it. And then I’m not going anywhere. So please just come find me if you’re listening to this afterwards. I do throughout the year do some trainings on VIP days.
    If it is something you’re serious about doing sooner than later, what I have loved about VIP days, it’s been the most like the fastest, easiest, most fun way to make an impact. And I’ve also kept the system that I teach very simple as well. So it’s not, it’s not like a big thing that you need to do, like a lot, you know, like when you’re launching something big, um, you don’t need to have an ad, you know, like a new fancy funnel or an ad campaign or any of that. I love those strategies, but this is where you.
    create connect offer, you know, like you create your, your VLT, you connect with your ideal clients, make offers, and you do it in a way that really demonstrates that you understand what it is that they’re seeking. You understand your ideal clients. So that’s going to be a part of the training as well. So I’ve seen people go from my workshop to like, I’m thinking about one of my clients, Tara, who after the training, she went and sold two for 5,500. She said, she’s like, I’m not ready to sell them for 10,000, so, but she sold two 5,500. She’s like, oh my gosh, I just made $11,000.
    from what I learned at your workshop. I’m like, and you’re welcome. And that’s what we call ROI friends. I’m talking about. That’s the fun of the workshop. Definitely download the VIP cheat sheet if you’re wanting to implement VIP days. And then let’s stay connected. Like I love helping passionate entrepreneurs to do what you love with people you love and places that you love because this life is precious. And I mean, that’s what I love about you, April. You’re all about living a great life. So let’s do this. Yes, yes, yes. And what is your…
    primary website for somebody who isn’t listening timely and is not gonna be able to access those resources so people can find you. Yeah, for once I’m gonna give two websites. Great, let’s do it, let’s do it. Our listeners are very smart and organized. Very smart and can handle two URLs. Okay, so one is simply my name, so it keeps it very simple, amyumada.com. And then we are in the process of building, so it may not be perfect, I’m just telling you right now.
    We’re in the process of this is the first time I’m telling you guys. I’m so excited. We’re building out ideal client.ai. And here’s why my dream and my vision is for this to become the go-to resource for all things having to do with your ideal clients, because I found that it’s the first thing marketers will need to know is we’re always asked who do you serve and what problem do you solve? Right. And we skip over to like creating offers. Let’s care enough about our future clients. Let’s be abundantly in minded to attract more of our idea clients by actually
    deeply understanding what they want, what they struggle with, what their deepest fears and frustrations are. And so we’re building out like a killer website that’s gonna have amazing blogs on it and resources and ways to deeply understand who you are meant to serve on a level that is un…
    Like, nobody can compete with this. Like, I can’t even stand it. So. Oh my gosh. And of course now I’m like, we need to be talking about licensing and patents and trademarks and all that. Totally, totally, yeah. So, we’re not gonna have a conversation after this about all of that. So exciting. And this is something that we all need.
    I mean, even me, I’ve been coaching for 27 years. I’m like, oh my gosh, well, what? I think I know what they’re thinking. And the problem is, and now we’re gonna go on a quick tangent and we’ll let y’all go, but a little behind the scenes here, the problem is, is we get so close to our expertise and we forget what it’s like to not know what we already know. I know for me, because I’m not inherently a marketer, that I struggle with that all the time. So that’s why I loved all your.
    AI stuff you taught last year in this, we’re gonna be all over this. So I can’t wait to hear more about this. I know all of our clients need this as well. So awesome. All right, well, Amy, I appreciate you so much, just so, so much and all of your wisdom and being here and pouring in everything that you do into this industry. And we’ll make sure that this show gets out to everybody. Thank you so much for having me. It’s been so much fun. You’re welcome.



    Top 4 Areas To Nail And Scale in 2024 (Episode 313)

     Top 4 Areas To Nail And Scale in 2024


    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) 
    Established coaches and consultants looking to separate from the pack in 2024. You want to do your work differently and reduce friction. The theme of this year is “less in more”. We’ll be focusing on making smart decisions to reduce overwhelm and create more traction in your business. Though there are a lot of things you can do to build your company, in this show we’re focusing on 4 of the most important areas you’ll want to nail first. 
    For each of the four areas of your business, I’m breaking down key things to consider in evaluating how you’ll upgrade your process and profit including:
    1. 2024 industry trends in each of the 4 core areas
    2. How they affect your current business
    3. Innovative ways to upgrade, change, and pivot
    …All while reducing work time and doing less. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Know the 4 areas of business you need to focus on to scale in 2024
    2. Have evaluated each area to determine necessary changes
    3. Be able to take action 
    Episode Bonus:
    6 Components of a Scalable Coaching Program – Includes AI Offer Engineering and more! 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:47] Hi, you guys. And welcome to the first show of 2024. I’m so glad to be joining you again for now. We’re rolling into the seventh year producing the Sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. Thank you guys so much for being listeners over time and sharing this show with your friends. If this is your first time being here in the show, I’m April Beach.

    [00:01:06] I help subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants build million dollar offer ecosystems and scale your business through content licensing and everything that we deliver for you here on this show are proven trainings and strategies that you can literally take to the bank. As a matter of fact, Our slogan, our tagline is delivering you proven trainings and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for.

    [00:01:30] And I have been consulting coaches and consultants for 27 years with an expertise in online business for 17. So you are really in the right place. Every single thing that we talk about and deliver to you, you can immediately. Apply in your business and will be very valuable to you in this particular episode in kicking off 2024.

    [00:01:49] I was really thinking about the most important things that I want you guys to be focusing on. And in order to do this, I have been focusing on paying attention to the trends in our space. You have seen them. I know you’re paying attention. You’ve seen leaders and gurus and coaches starting to kind of fall to the side.

    [00:02:12] Some of them are just completely overloaded, overwhelmed and exhausted because they built the wrong kind of business for sustainability. Some of them are tired of having to show up on social media all the time and others Just don’t have anything else to sell. They may not have knowledge outside of the one area that they gained notoriety for.

    [00:02:34] And so this is a very special time for you. If you are an established subject matter expert coach or a consultant, and we’re talking about what’s going to happen in 2024, Now has never been a better time for you to hone in on these key areas that we’re going to talk about in our business because now is your time.

    [00:02:52] You don’t have to have thousands of social media followers. You don’t have to be a keynote speaker in front of thousands of people. You don’t even have to have a bestselling book. You just have to be great at what you do, dedicated to your area of expertise and the clients that you serve, and we can scale your business past seven figures.

    [00:03:11] So if you are feeling like you’ve been in this place where you’re just hustling and hustling and you’re never going to get noticed, frankly, many of you guys have been doing what you’ve been doing for a really, really long time and you’re not out there telling everybody about how great you are because you’re in the trenches with your clients delivering amazing results.

    [00:03:29] 2024 is your year. And that’s what we’re talking about right now in this podcast, four key areas where you can scale your business with less work. Here’s the deal. The theme of this year is more results, less time, significant impact, less work. We are talking about more for less, and I want that for you.

    [00:03:52] And so that’s what we’re digging in here, uh, on this show. This is episode number 313. All of the show notes, everything that we talk about here and reference and links and resources and downloads and all the goodies can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. Just click on the podcast and this is episode number 313.

    [00:04:12] And a very quick and very important announcement to you. If it’s time for you to upgrade your offer, increase your prices, and take your offers to a scalable level. Create content, create your million dollar offer ecosystem. Then we are opening up offer engineer, which is our leading masterclass that has taught experts to build scalable offer ecosystems and content licensing programs for Over eight years.

    [00:04:41] This is program is really amazing where I get to work with you personally. So if it’s time for you to dive in and actually upgrade your offer, go to the offer engineer. com because we’re going to be doing that live online virtually in January, and I don’t want you to miss it again. That is the offer engineer.

    [00:05:00] com. Go grab your seat in that right now. And let’s go ahead and set this episode to dive in more. All right. So we’re talking about these four areas, these four amazing opportunities for you to upgrade in your business. Things that I really want you thinking about. And I want to unpack some trends and give you an opportunity to think about how you can change or update things.

    [00:05:22] I don’t want to give you a massive amount of work, but as we’re in the beginning of 2024, I see these as four very important areas that not everybody’s talking about. But I want you to be the tip of that sword. I want you to know what’s going on. And so that’s why I picked these four areas as a trend to lean into for 2024.

    [00:05:42] So the first area that you need to nail to scale in 2024 will be your offers, your programs, your services. We don’t actually hear a lot of people talking about actual offer engineering. They just kind of come up with a price and they say, okay, I’m going to do this or I’m going to do that. And this is just what it is.

    [00:06:02] And there’s so much emphasis on marketing. Have you seen that also there really is not enough emphasis on the product itself. And I think there’s some confusion. Um, in a service based industry space, realizing that maybe marketing is more important than the actual product itself. But here’s a little insight.

    [00:06:20] My husband and I own multiple companies and one of the companies he owned is owns is a physical product company. So I have seen what it takes to build a business around a physical product and the difference in the emphasis on the actual excellence of the product. Is what makes the difference the first difference, but in the online coaching and consulting space, we tend to lean into the marketing and the marketing, the marketing, and then the products are kind of shitty sometimes.

    [00:06:49] I mean, let’s be honest, right? So the reality is, is you’ve probably been in many of these programs that had this awesome shiny funnel and you’re diving in there and they give all the bells and whistles and they say all the right things for you to invest your money, and then you get in there and you really didn’t get what you thought that you were going to get.

    [00:07:07] Because the person that sold it to you was a great marketer that maybe not so great and actually creating an offer that’s going to give you substantial, substantial, tangible results that you’re looking for. Frankly, maybe there weren’t even an expert in that part. Maybe there were an expert marketer.

    [00:07:25] And so as we’re looking at your business, I want to just reset what we’re talking about here as business owners, your knowledge, what you teach or the service you provide, what you do, the programs that you deliver, they are your product and they come first and without leading products that deliver amazing, massive, predictable results, nothing else that we talk about is going to matter.

    [00:07:55] So let’s just lay the prerequisite and the ground rule here. Your offer has to be absolutely a leading offer in your space that provides amazing results. So number one key area is that offer engineer engineering and here’s some of the trends I want you to see That have been happening. Well, really it’s been about the last four years we’ve really seen these trends because I literally have been coaching experts to build their offers for so long you guys actually since Pre 2000.

    [00:08:25] I’ve been, I’ve been helping people like you do this. And so what we’re seeing is that these big programs, these huge programs were the ones that were amazing and everybody was attracted to them. But here’s a trend that I want you to be aware of for the last four years, the smaller programs, the boutique programs, the programs that serve less people, or the only serve one company at a time, or that are really super niche.

    [00:08:50] Those are the programs that are selling. Those are the programs that people are looking for and gravitating to. So I want you to see these trends and if that’s the kind of program you’ve had already, amazing. What can we do to upgrade that? How can we scale the actual program itself to scale your time, that you are reducing your time?

    [00:09:10] Especially if you’ve been delivering one on one coaching services and that you can provide efficient results for your clients while providing top notch industry leading results to them as well. And so what the trend that, or the term that this is, is called the blue ocean strategy. I talk about blue ocean all the time.

    [00:09:28] There’s a blue ocean strategy. book. If you haven’t read it, it’s really, really valuable. I will actually go ahead and put a link to that book in the show notes so that you guys can understand this concept, but we need to move you out of what’s considered a red ocean where all these other people are fighting for the same audience.

    [00:09:44] And we need by creating a disruptive, thoughtful, efficient, Offer. We can move you into a blue ocean where you have no competition. So the trends I want you to be aware of are these huge programs are really, in my opinion, going to the wayside. People do not love being in part of a cattle drive. It’s like, cheers, everybody.

    [00:10:03] You know, we want people to know our name. And so being in big programs without any personalized curation is we’re having industries are having trouble selling those types of programs. So look at your programs, think about your programs and think about. What you have and how niche is it? Do you provide specific measurable results?

    [00:10:25] And then the third thing I want you to be aware of is you probably need to increase your prices in 2024 with inflation, with how much it’s costing you to actually run your business and pay yourself, pay your team and the way that. I will be sharing with you here and that we coach our clients is I need you to increase your prices so we can increase your operational expenses so we can increase your ability to scale and get more help.

    [00:10:52] And so if you need to increase your prices, we always want to do this in an ethical way. We never just say, Hey, this was this cost and now it’s going to be that cost. So make sure that you’re increasing your prices and in an ethical way and take a look at your offers. So the question’s for you. Are they niche?

    [00:11:09] Are they niche? Are they specific? Are they disruptive? Am I doing something? in a way that nobody else in my space is doing this. Do I have a method or a framework that I’m teaching people to get better results than other people in my space? That’s what we need your offers to do. So area number one that you need to nail to scale in 2024 is not only one offer, but your ecosystems of, uh, of offers to make sure that they are predictable.

    [00:11:38] tangible, delivering amazing results, and they’re scalable for you and efficient to run. Again, you can go into the offer engineer. com because that’s everything that we’re working on here in January with our clients and our podcast listeners and all of our friends live. You can dive into that masterclass with me.

    [00:11:58] Make sure you don’t miss that if you need this. So area number two are relationships. So let me talk about the trend that I am seeing. It’s no longer as important to know everybody in your space. I don’t actually know if it really was. I don’t know everybody in my space. I’ve been here for a really long time.

    [00:12:21] What I want you to understand is connecting and building relationships with the right people in the right businesses are what is going to be the one driver to really bring in profit for your business this year. It’s not ad spend anymore like it was 10, eight years ago, seven years ago. Right? Their relationships, relationships, scale, relationships.

    [00:12:43] So, but I know that there are problems running into spending time and investing relationships. Talk about what type of relationships I want you to focus on this year. I want you to focus on relationships with other experts that serve your same audience, but they may do a different thing. So building relationships with colleagues and mutual circles of trust.

    [00:13:05] Think Robert De Niro. And meet the parents, right? So you want to build circles of trust with other experts. These circles don’t have to be huge. They can be three, five, six, seven people at the most that meet your clients. And my recommendation this year is to make time for these relationships. Do things with them.

    [00:13:26] Go on retreats just with this other group of people. Have an opportunity to create a mastermind that is not a paid mastermind. It’s all of you just showing up to a hotel, paying your own way and pouring into each other for three days. These are the things that are going to build your business and scale.

    [00:13:43] And I want you to think about who these people could be in your space. Nixon with relationships is you need to make time to build new ones. If you don’t have enough relationships in your space, you think could be valuable. And of course that you could lend value to one of the things that I do is I have what’s called a coffee calendar.

    [00:14:00] And you know, when you get these LinkedIn messages, Hey, would you like to, you know, connect and, and just get to know each other? First of all, I’m just going to be really honest. I will never give my time to somebody because time, my time is more valuable to me than money. Unless I have already connected with that person in the public feed somewhere.

    [00:14:20] So by the way, if you’re listening to this and you’re one of those cold people that sends DMs saying, Hey, do you want to jump on the call? If you ever send that to me, the answer is immediately going to be no. And you know, you’re wasting my time because you haven’t ever tried to connect with the content that I have put out on the public feed.

    [00:14:37] Um, but for those people that I really do want to connect with, I have this coffee calendar and it’s set up in my acuity calendar scheduler and it’s not about, it’s not a sales pitch. It’s literally just a connection time and I have connection times. Sometimes I have them only one day a month, you guys.

    [00:14:53] Let’s be real. My time is very limited or I have them at one time every single Wednesday afternoon. It’s the one time I know that I can block out. And as soon as those coffee calendar connections are full, I don’t book anymore. I don’t spend any time wondering, Hey, when can I fit this networking thing in, you know, my calendar to meet with this person?

    [00:15:13] I always have this available and open it, but I. Only share it with people that I believe that I can lend value to and people that could be valuable to me and my business as well. So if you have the ability to create a separate calendar, that’s not going to mess up any of your other work time. Do it.

    [00:15:30] Call it a coffee calendar, a networking calendar, just. meet and greet or whatever, and I have virtual coffee with people. It will make all the difference in the world and your business. And I want you to think about honing in on specific people in specific groups that will make the greatest impact for your time.

    [00:15:47] Remember, these relationships are going to be very powerful because these people are going to send you business. You’re going to send these people business and you’re going to create that circle of trust. I believe in 2024. that these relationships will be even more valuable to you than creating content in a marketing process.

    [00:16:07] So if you don’t yet have that sort of coffee calendar designated time to network with people and get to know other people, I highly recommend you do that. Okay. Area number four is marketing. Of course it’s marketing. Yes, we have to market your business, but let’s talk about the trends again that we are seeing here.

    [00:16:27] So if you have been on Facebook for decades and Instagram for decades, and then you tried threads, the trends that we are seeing, we’ve been seeing is that businesses that sell to other businesses are hanging out on LinkedIn. Number one, and the great thing about LinkedIn is you do not have to create. a massive amount of content.

    [00:16:49] You just have to build relationships and share valuable information and give feedback to others that share valuable information. And so in the marketing process, make sure that you’re not just creating content to create content that might not be for you. I’m not sitting here talking to you. I don’t know your business cause this is.

    [00:17:08] Unfortunately, a one sided conversation right here on the podcast. So LinkedIn may not be the place for you, but I’m just saying, I want you to be aware that creating videos and spending thousands of hours on, you know, um, Instagram or even Tik TOK has it like, look at the measurable, measurable results.

    [00:17:25] Has it given you the traction that you’ve needed? If it hasn’t, it’s okay to walk away from things instead of just doing things cause you’ve been doing them for the last five years and you think you need to. Again, less is more. Understand where the actual traction is happening for your business and just focus in on that.

    [00:17:45] The other thing that is really important, which is not a newsflash, but I really want you to make sure that you are normalizing AI. In your processes of creating content. So one thing to look at and just ask yourself and our little check and balance here, do you have SOPs for using AI within your business on a regular basis for creating your marketing content?

    [00:18:08] If you don’t, it’s very, very important. And a few other keys are understanding your primary message on a monthly basis. What do I mean by that? This is especially important for those of you guys who have a B to C side of your business and you may also be moving into a B to B. So if you’ve had courses, trainings, masterminds, VIP days, whatever that is, and you’re also looking into a Content licensing.

    [00:18:35] Maybe you want, maybe you’re here and you’re connecting with us. Cause you also want to know after we build those programs with you, how to actually license them to other companies, right? So your message is going to be different and you need to make sure you’re honing in. What am I saying to a B2C audience?

    [00:18:51] And what am I saying to a B2B audience and just make sure. If you’re foggy on your marketing, if you do not have a marketing team that’s working for you and creating content, number one thing to start with, and just doing this one thing will be a massive game changer is understanding what your primary message is to each one of those audiences on a monthly basis.

    [00:19:12] In January. What is the most important thing you want your audience to know about you in February? Are you selling something in March? What is that most important thing? Just make sure you’ve broken it down month by month, especially if you have two audiences and it’s very, very clear. So area number three to nail and scale, and those are some tips is marketing use AI.

    [00:19:34] But make sure, of course, it’s absolutely unique to you in your voice and never put AI into your, never put your IP into your, um, chat GPT. Okay, so anything that is proprietary, never put it into chat GPT. And then the third area, the fourth area I want you to focus in on for 2024 are your teams. It’s time for you to get the right person in place.

    [00:20:05] If you don’t have this already, that’s going to help you scale. If you can find one person, you can trust one primary person and be able to have them delegate so that you can focus on your areas of genius. 2024 is the year to do that. In, in order to do that, you need to understand what your top priorities are and you need to be able to put a budget behind this.

    [00:20:29] So let’s talk about some of these areas and, and based on how much you’re making. If you are making up to 15k a month, You do need team members. You may get specific niche team members to do specific things. So one person might do your video editing. One person might do your copy editing. You know, one person might post on social media.

    [00:20:52] One person might be your client concierge. That’s totally fine up to 15 K a month. It’s fine to have these teeny tiny little specific, amazing people that do little teeny bits of work for you. When we get to around 20 to 30 K, you’re going to need more operational help. So that is orchestrating all of those people that are doing all the little pieces.

    [00:21:16] And so around 20 K a month, if you don’t have a primary, it could be an online business manager. However, be really careful with that because the term online business manager and those certifications often mean that they are not operationally. Excellent. They just know a software. Be careful for that. I’m talking about somebody that can step into an operations management, see all the moving parts and actually orchestrate all those little team members underneath.

    [00:21:43] That’s going to be around 20. And honestly, when we get to 30 to 40 K a month, these operational bottlenecks are what scale or what stops businesses ever from getting beyond 40 K a month, because our brains is CEOs don’t really. Think like that in most cases operationally. So we need this key person to help see all the moving parts, bring it together to bring you past 40 K a month and statistics show that it 50 K a month is when you actually can afford, uh, to hire somebody else to be more in a COO position for you.

    [00:22:22] So based on where you are, if you’re up to 15 K, you need to be able to delegate if you’re 20 to 30 K. We need somebody to be able to oversee all those little little delegations. So now we have at least two people on your team. If you’re if you’re getting stuck in that bottleneck, then you need to increase your team members.

    [00:22:41] And remember what I said is we need to put a budget behind these team members. And if you’re at 50k, that’s usually around the time when you can really start affording somebody to come in full time into your business while still paying yourself. So these are the four key areas and the trends that we’re seeing that I worry if you don’t nail these areas, it’s really going to severely affect you.

    [00:23:06] In 2024. And so that’s why I picked these key areas. And again, they’re not things necessarily that everybody’s talking about, but I know they will just be a game changer for your business. So the first area again is upgrading your offers. You can charge more, scale them, be more efficient. Doesn’t mean serving more people.

    [00:23:27] It could mean a collection of offers that collectively equal over a million dollars in sales, but they’re all very curated and they all take clients through a predictable journey again. If that’s what you need, cruise over to the offer engineer dot com. This, this masterclass is not for building new offers for new coaches.

    [00:23:50] This masterclass is only for established coaches, consultants, and subject matter experts that are ready to. Upgrade your offers and scale more. I want to make sure that I’m differentiating that if you are a brand new coach or a consultant, you are not ready for that masterclass. Okay, and that’s it the offer engineer dot com Second way is scaling your relationships really diving into those relationships making them a priority Creating a collection of people that you can rely on that are your peers without paying 10 a year for a mastermind and just leaning into building these relationships Maybe investing in a little trip or a virtual mastermind with this group of people and really pouring into them This is going to be a game changer for you and your business if you make this a priority and set aside the time in 2024 The third thing is your marketing process really important.

    [00:24:40] We need to streamline your marketing process using ai And if you have a B2C side of your business and a B2B side of your business, make sure you know who you’re communicating with and where and on what platforms and what your signature talks are and what your services are to each one of the areas.

    [00:25:00] And Again, moving on beyond that is your teams. Make sure that you have the right people in the right place doing the right things. And then we broke down the numbers of what those financial thresholds are that are typical of what you can afford based on your business. And these are the key areas that I really want you focusing on because when you focus on these and when you nail these In 2024, it’s going to make a significant difference in your business and I want that difference I actually want to hear from you about which ones of these that you’re going to lean into first Please connect with me on linkedin at April beach and let me know that you listen to this show.

    [00:25:39] Let me know which of these four areas that you’re going to dive into first. And I want to end this episode by saying that I don’t want this to be overwhelming. Again, we’re talking about doing more, getting bigger results with doing less. So getting more, doing less, by focusing on the, how you curate these areas in your business, it’s going to make a significant impact.

    [00:26:03] And again, I can’t reiterate how important it is to share that the trends in the subject matter, consulting and coaching spaces have completely changed. And there is an open pathway for people like you that maybe you haven’t hit the financial mark that you really want to hit, or maybe you have found trouble keeping up with the Joneses.

    [00:26:30] This is your year. It’s your year to be very specific and true to yourself, your business, your area of expertise and build marketing strategies, offers and relationships that are actually going to get you there. And I want to hear about it as you go along. So thank you so much for listening to this show.

    [00:26:48] This has been episode number 313. You can find all of the show notes and everything we talked about by going to SweetLifeCo. com and clicking on the podcast. And of course, if you ever want to work with us, we have clients all over the world, and I would love to point to you personally. All right, you guys have an awesome first week of the year.




    What It Really Takes To Build A Million Dollar Consulting Business (Episode 312)

    What It Really Takes To Build A Million Dollar Consulting Business



    This one’s for all you independent consultants, coaches, and experts who are looking to grow your business next year. We’re going to chat about what it really takes to build a million-dollar consulting business. 
    Yes; you need the right mindset. 
    Yes; you need to be good at what you do
    But did you know there’s an actual mathematical formula to determine if your company is capable of hitting a million dollars in gross revenue a year? There is, and in this episode April Beach, an international business strategist, unpacks the key values you need to be aware of that become the inputs for your milliondollar business formula. 
    This episode is like your personal guide to growing your business in a smart way. It’s super helpful if you’re working on your own and want to increase your sales without burning out. We’re going to talk about knowing your limits, which is really important, and using that knowledge to make better plans for your business. This way, you can make more money, keep your customers happy, and still have time for yourself! April’s approach has helped people all over the world. She’s got some great strategies that can be tailored to your own unique business.
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Assess your Offers: It’s important to really know the ins and outs of the services or advice you provide. This helps you see where you can grow.
    2. Understand Your Limits: Knowing how much you can handle is key. It helps you plan better and grow your business without getting too stressed.
    3. Clean Up Your Offers: Quickly see what offers are dragging you down and where to build improvements 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:46] Hi everybody. I’m so excited to welcome you to episode number 312. Here on SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, we have made some changes to the show. If you haven’t noticed, we’re actually giving you more free business trainings and tools with every single episode. And so therefore we are dropping our episodes.

    [00:01:07] every two weeks. So if you haven’t noticed that now you can be aware that we’re actually giving you more time to use the materials that we have given you here on the show so that you can actually apply them to your business and continue to grow and continue to make money. We’re getting feedback literally that we’re just giving away so much within a seven day period for the last six years that sometimes you were scrambling to actually utilize it all.

    [00:01:34] And if you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you know, that we are known for giving away free business trainings and strategies backed by 30 years of business coaching expertise that other coaches will charge you hundreds and thousands of dollars for. So we definitely want to make sure that you’re able to utilize the tools we give you.

    [00:01:50] So heads up. The show’s dropping every two weeks. Now this episode is very jam packed. I’m actually teaching you a workshop in this episode that we teach to our private clients called method to millions. And because I need you to really have the worksheets to implement. At a higher level, we’re talking about it here on the show, but to really implement the nitty gritty of the method to millions workshop, I’m giving you completely free access to a recorded one hour training where I just recently brought our clients through this method to millions process.

    [00:02:24] And I’m giving you completely free access to all of the worksheets. This workshop is no strings attached. I just want to bless you and honor you for being a listener here in the show. So you can go to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash millions, and you’ll see there is a cost to it in there. I want you to use coupon code guest again at SweetLifeCo.

    [00:02:49] com forward slash millions. With an S at the end and use coupon code guest, and you can get full access to the whole one hour workshop and worksheets. But let’s go ahead and talk about what we’re going to talk about here in this episode. So you even know if you’re ready for this level of business strategy.

    [00:03:07] So in this show, I’m going to unpack the importance of engineering your business for capacity so that you don’t hit burnout. Many coaches and consultants and subject matter experts, you know, you, you work so hard and you’re creating new offers and you’re doing all the things, but have you ever stopped to take a minute to actually realize with a mathematical formula?

    [00:03:29] Is to whether or not your business is actually engineered to hit a million dollars, or if you were smashing up against a complete brick wall, that’s what we’re talking about here in this show. That is what the workshop helps you see as well. So we are diving into what is called capacity. We’re talking about offer engineering.

    [00:03:47] offer sweet engineering. And this episode is going to help you have a reflection on the last 12 months is to whether or not what you’re selling and what you’re building is in fact actually going to equal a million dollars in your business. And it might not even be a million. You might be just working on trying to hit.

    [00:04:06] 300, 000 or maybe you’re working to hit your first 100, 000. I’ll be honest with you. This show is an advanced business training for established coaches, consultants, and subject matter experts who have already passed the hundred K mark. But if you haven’t done that yet, please Pop in here because now, you know, what’s to come and I love pouring into you and, and helping you see some of the strategies that might happen at the next level.

    [00:04:30] So if you’re ready for this, all of the show notes, everything that we are talking about here can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. Click on the podcast button. This is episode number 312. And again, go right now before you forget and access the free method to millions training by going to SweetLifeCo.

    [00:04:50] com forward slash millions. Use the coupon code guest. All right. If you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive in. All right. So there are three reasons why your business is not going to hit a million dollars, no matter what you do or how hard you work or all of the best marketing strategies in the world.

    [00:05:11] There are three reasons why you might not be hitting a million dollars, no matter how hard you work, how hard you try. And frankly, how great you are. Those three reasons are your offer design. isn’t done correctly. You have reached capacity on how you have designed your offers and frankly, there isn’t enough time in the year.

    [00:05:30] So reason number one is incorrect offer model design. Each one of your offers needs to be engineered. to correctly ensure that it aligns with your ability to bring enough people in based on how much you charge and how many people you can serve that you’re actually going to hit a million dollars in that offer.

    [00:05:51] So that’s number one. Number two is that inside that offer, Especially depending on how many times you offer it a year, whether you do it one on one, you are going to reach capacity. And then the next one is not enough time. We’ll get into what not enough time last when we talk about marketing. So let’s kind of unpack the problem here.

    [00:06:10] And if you’re frustrated, could you see other strategists and other businesses just consultants having million dollar businesses, it really isn’t maybe just their marketing plan. It’s how their programs and their offers are engineered. So the deal is, is we don’t talk about capacity enough. As a matter of fact, I think business coaches and strategists, it’s a huge missing mark because of the fact that we talk about marketing, marketing, get more people and generate leads.

    [00:06:34] But what happens when we’ve generated all those leads in your offers or your suite of offers? Isn’t engineered to hit that capacity. So the problem is, is if we don’t pause to talk about the capacity of your suite of offers, you are never going to reach a million dollars. It’s like building a house where you need a hundred people to sleep there, but there’s only one bedroom.

    [00:07:01] It’s just physically impossible to do it in. So therefore, I want us to come back here and really understand the process of assessing capacity based on the offers that you are offering and your business offers your offering. I know that sounds silly, but you know what you’re selling your, your programs and services.

    [00:07:20] So. Our goal here today is to help you identify your current offers that you have already done, that you’re already selling, and understand if you have hit a threshold. Also today, I want you to understand that any new offers that maybe you have thought about creating, How do they fit into the math to help you reach that million dollar mark or just replace the word million dollar with your next financial threshold?

    [00:07:48] Uh, and let’s just kind of speak to that for a minute. A million dollars is a lot of money for, um, to generate for a single. Consulting business. It’s very important that we engineer your offers correctly so that you can do that. And so, um, but if you’re, if you’re here, maybe if you’re struggling from money mindset, I don’t want you to shut down this training thinking, Oh my gosh, she’s just another person talking about how to hit a million dollars.

    [00:08:11] I could care less. any number with a million dollars. This math works. If you’re trying to hit 250, 000 or 750, 000 or 350, 000, it doesn’t matter. I want you to use this math because it’s going to give you a huge insight. So the process, the method that I am talking about today is a method I created called mathematical Method to millions.

    [00:08:34] So it’s called a method to millions and the worksheet I’m giving you or the workshop and the worksheets that I’m giving you away for free with this episode are is also called method to millions. And so basically what it is is it’s a mathematical equation to add up capacity. With what you’re charging for your offers with the model of your offers and understanding how many people you can actually fit in that offer in a year to see if you can actually mathematically hit a million dollars.

    [00:09:02] And when you engineer your numbers correctly. Basically, when you engineer your suite of offers correctly, then you can do it. But if you’re looking at these numbers after we go through today and you’re realizing, wow, I can’t do any more of this. I can’t sell any more of this. I’m never going to make any more than 75, 000 on this one thing.

    [00:09:23] Then we have a problem. And that is why I want to help you with this today. You know, the end of the year, depending on when you’re listening to this, it’s the end of 2023. It’s a really important time for us to assess. All of the hard work and how we’re serving our clients and what we’re working on. And so that’s why this topic is so important.

    [00:09:43] So first of all, let’s kind of define capacity. What is capacity? Capacity is the maximum amount of people you can serve and the maximum amount of money you can make based on a certain offer or program you’re selling. Now, let’s define offer or program. So an offer is your consulting service, whether it is a one on one service, whether it is a course or a membership or a retreat or a VIP day or a licensed product or a certification program or a mastermind, whatever it is that you sell.

    [00:10:21] Also for you guys that have done for you services, if you have like an agency or if you have a hybrid where it’s kind of done with you and done for you, that’s, that’s what we’re talking about. Right? So when we’re talking about your offer, it’s what you do, what you sell. And so. Inside every single offer, there is usually a capacity and capacity isn’t bad, right?

    [00:10:44] So I don’t want you to think capacity is terrible, like, Oh, my gosh, everything has to scale. I have to fit 5000 people in this offer. That is a wrong approach. All right. I know there’s a lot of coaches out there that are like, Oh my gosh, you need to build these offers so you can sell it to more people.

    [00:10:59] Frankly, I don’t want to be in any program where I’m like one of 5, 000 people. And you probably don’t either. That was a big trend from 2000 and you know, 13 to 2019. None of us want to be a number in a cattle drive anymore. So first of all, it’s important to know that I am not here advocating that you build all these offers.

    [00:11:19] For a low ticket or even other offers for a super high ticket, you know, so you can fit more people. The most important thing I want you to take away from this episode is you can engineer your suite of offers any way you want. And the very first thing I want you to understand is it how you build your suite of offers and how you serve your clients and what you sell.

    [00:11:42] It’s going to affect your lifestyle. And so I want you to actually stop for a minute and I want you to take an inventory and I want you to think about every single thing you’re selling. So here we go with the step by step training. Step number one is make a list of your current offers that you are selling.

    [00:11:59] And again, I have this cheat sheet worksheet for you where you can get access to it for free. When you access our method to millions workshop for free. So in the left hand column, if you’re visual like me, you’re going to list the name of the offer. So it could be one on one coaching or done for you website services, or, you know, my, my week long retreat in Costa Rica, whatever it is you guys sell.

    [00:12:20] Okay. Left hand call. The next column over and the next step I want you to go through is I want you to understand what is the model of that? Is it done live in person? Is it on demand? Is it a hybrid model? It’s important to look at the model of how you deliver your offer because it’s going to tell us whether or not we’re going to hit capacity, right?

    [00:12:44] So we know, for example, let’s use the retreat. If you have a retreat, so the title of the offer is retreat, the model of it is, One time a year and it’s in person. That’s awesome. That’s very exclusive and and I’m sure you know You’re selling that out because people love those type of experiences But the next step is after we do offer and model the next step is how many people can you actually sell that to?

    [00:13:09] Is it a retreat for 10 people? Is it a retreat for five people? What is the total number, what is, what are, what is, let’s say correct English there, what is the total number of people that’s not correct? Alright, help me out here. What, how many people can you sell this baby to, right? So if it’s a retreat, there is going to be a capacity of a lower number.

    [00:13:29] But if your offer is a course or a training where it’s endless, Fantastic, right? So first is offer. Second is understanding the model of each one of your offers. And the third one is understanding the maximum number of people that you can fit into that offer. Here’s the key in one year. So if you have that retreat twice a year, You’re going to say, okay, maybe it’s 20 people total.

    [00:13:53] If you have that course available all the time and you, there’s no limitation. If your model has no limitation, it’s something that’s an on demand training or especially for those of you guys that are getting into licensing. If there’s really no limitation on how many you want to release it to, that’s incredible.

    [00:14:12] That’s awesome. We love that. I want you to put in the goal number of how many seats you want to sell into it. So if it’s on demand with no capacity, the maximum number of people, you’re going to put your goal for the number of people that you want to sell into that program for the year to come. So we’ve done three things.

    [00:14:32] We have assessed your offer. We have assessed the model of how each one of the offers are delivered. And now we’ve assessed the maximum number of people that you can fit into that offer in a 12 month period of time. Now. Part four. Hopefully you guys are with me here. Step four is I want you to multiply the per person cost of what you charge for that offer by the number of people you can fit into it.

    [00:15:00] So if you have a course that has your, your goal is to fit, it’s on demand. Your course course name here models on demand. Your goal is to fit, sell it to 100 people. And the course is, you know, five bucks, right? Whatever, that’s terrible. Don’t charge 5 for your course. But you know what I mean? Then you are going to multiply them the maximum amount of money.

    [00:15:23] If you hit your goal, you can make on that is 500, right? So let’s go. Let’s give a different example here. If, however, let’s go to the retreat example. If your offer is a retreat and you char in, it’s, you know, you can sell it to 10 people at a time and you charge 1, 000 for that retreat, then the maximum amount of money you’re going to make on that retreat is 10, 000.

    [00:15:50] So it’s really important to look at the number at the maximum amount of money that you can possibly make. On a particular offer. And you’re going to do that for every single one of your offers. Now, here’s where it really becomes eyeopening, especially for our clients. If you provide boutique elite high end offers, you’re not going to sell that to as many people.

    [00:16:10] So the idea here is understanding this is the offer. I only can take five private clients. Like for me, for example, I only take four private clients a year. That is my capacity. I cannot take more than that. So I know that I cannot make more than four times the amount of money I charge for it, which is currently 33, 000.

    [00:16:30] So I cannot make more than that on actual private clients. So what it does is when I’m looking at my list and I go through this, my team and I go through this every single year, really, I really don’t love pushing private clients because I have a lower capacity for profit with private clients, even though I charge more because I only can take so many.

    [00:16:51] So the process is you are going to have your list of offers. You’re going to have your model. You’re going to understand how your offers are delivered and you’re going to see where you’re hitting capacity. Now, I have so much more. I want to teach you about this and what we do next, but. Our first goal here today is to have you have an understanding of where you might have hit capacity.

    [00:17:14] And frankly, how much time is it taking for these offers to be delivered? When we understand capacity, when we really talk about capacity based on how you are engineering your suite of offers to reach your profit threshold, then you can take a look and you can be like, there is no way I’m going to hit this.

    [00:17:34] Especially if you only have a few different offers, if you only do one on one services and and their boutique services, and that’s what you’re pushing, especially with that done for your hybrid approach, you’re going to hit capacity. And so what else can you be? Should you be? Might you want to engineer so that you can increase your profit across other methods?

    [00:17:57] So again, there are three reasons why you won’t hit a million dollars or 300, 000 or whatever your profit threshold is. Number one, because your offer model design isn’t engineered. I don’t even want to say the word correctly because it’s different for all of us. It’s just your, your list of offers aren’t engineered.

    [00:18:16] to fit enough people into them for the price that you are charging. Now, most coaches will be like, we’ll charge more. Absolutely. If you are at capacity, if you, if your program is sold out, if you have a wait list, if you are selling at a certain rate, it’s time to increase your prices for sure. But in most cases we’re looking at a list of offers and they just aren’t engineered correctly.

    [00:18:41] Either the price isn’t engineered correctly or the offer itself can’t fit enough people. Recognizing that you’re hitting capacity is a very important thing that I want you to be able to do before you go into the hard work of actually promoting the offer and doing the work of doing the launch and the marketing and all the things.

    [00:18:59] See, now you understand why all the marketing in the world, the biggest list in the world, if your offers aren’t engineered correctly and your suite of offers aren’t engineered correctly, you’re never going to hit that seven figure mark because it’s physically impossible based on the way that you’ve engineered your offers.

    [00:19:14] And then here’s the third really important thing that I want to leave you with. And I really do want you to access the method to millions workshop for free because this is where our clients just, their brain just explodes when they realize what we’re going to talk about next. Even if your list of offers, your suite of offers is engineered that you’re going to be able to hit capacity.

    [00:19:36] Sometimes there is not enough time in the year to market and sell them all. It’s really, really important. This is what I mean. You only can sell so often. If you’re out there being like, buy my this and buy my that. And you know, I have, I have all these great things and I want to work with you. Uh, if you’re selling all the time, people are going to stop following you.

    [00:19:58] You only can sell. so much. And if you are looking at your list and you’re like, wow, I can reach them all, but January I have to sell this and the end of January I have to push for that. And then in February I’m going to have everybody, you know, do a campaign to work with me one on one. And then in March I need to start filling up my retreats, but also in March I need to sell this little workshop.

    [00:20:19] If you realize that There is not enough time in a calendar year to actually market and sell all of the things that you have created in order to hit a million dollars. That is also a big problem. And so that’s kind of this aha that people have. So even if the suite is engineered correctly, we’re going to run into a capacity with time in the calendar based on.

    [00:20:46] Basic relational communication skills. The way around that is if you have lower ticket offers, so we can also, we can always run ads to that, you know, we can just keep pouring in ad spend too, but frankly, ads aren’t converting the way they used to, and they’re much more expensive. And so that’s not usually, uh, a first defense to fix this problem.

    [00:21:05] So let’s kind of recap what we talked about. We talked about a process that I teach called Method to Millions. It’s basically a math formula for you to open up your eyes, take a look at your suite of offers, what you currently have and determine whether or not you are actually physically going to be able to hit A million dollars with the programs and services that you’re selling.

    [00:21:23] This is why a lot of our clients love licensing because there isn’t capacity and it’s very little work and very little marketing. Just a little plug. If you’re interested in learning more about licensing, I have a lot of podcast episodes on that here to help you understand what the model of licensing your courses in a nutshell, take a look and be real with yourself.

    [00:21:43] Also understand how often can you realistically sell to your particular audience? And what I want you to do from this is pause for a minute and I want you to remove any offers that are not profitable or taking too much time. I want you to consider also adding new offers or upgrading current offers to increase the capacity.

    [00:22:04] So either increasing more people. Or increasing the amount of money that you can charge for those offers by engineering them better than they have been done in the past. We don’t want to necessarily just always increase the cost. We always want to look at the ROI of what we’re delivering and making sure that you’re ethically increasing your costs, especially in the consulting and strategist space.

    [00:22:24] Great. Okay. So again, this was the method to millions kind of mini workshop here. We’re talking about how to truly build a million dollar coaching business, what it actually takes. It’s not in the marketing. It’s not in the relationship. Those things come later. It comes in engineering the products that you’re selling, which is based from your amazing knowledge and whether or not you’re capable of actually hitting that number.

    [00:22:47] Again, if you want to access the free workshop that I teach exclusively to our clients, you can go to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash millions and use the coupon code guest. That coupon will only be available for a limited time. So don’t wait to go over there and grab that. And for all of the show notes, the transcript of this, all of the resources and other resources we have for you, please visit SweetLifeCo.

    [00:23:17] com and you can just click right there on the button for the podcast. And I really appreciate you guys. Thank you so much for listening to the show. We are rolling over to year number seven. I absolutely love it. Absolutely. Cannot believe it. And, uh, we’re always here for you. So if you haven’t connected with us on LinkedIn, find me on LinkedIn at April beach.

    [00:23:35] And of course we would love to work with you to bring your business to the next level. Cruise over to SweetLifeCo. com and all of the resources we have are available for you there. Thank you so much. Have a fantastic end of 2023 and we have some exciting episodes to help you kick off the new year coming up here soon.


    4 Simple JV Partnership Types with April Beach and Charles Byrd (Episode 311)

    4 Simple JV Partnership Types



    Who is this episode for? 
    Entrepreneurs in Phases 2-4 of our Online Business Roadmap™
    This episode is tailor-made for entrepreneurs who have an established training or program but struggle to generate leads or have a smaller list. If you want ways to increase visibility for your business without diving into conventional advertising routes like Facebook or LinkedIn ads, then this episode is a must-listen.  
    April’s conversation with JV partnership expert, Charles Byrd, provides an alternative path to business growth that is dependable and requires less effort to generate leads. You will be introduced to the world of joint venture (JV) partnerships through Charles, a renowned figure in this arena. They’ll uncover the four distinct types of JV partnerships, learning how each can be a lucrative option depending on your business’s unique needs. This episode delivers actionable steps on implementing these JV strategies. When you’re finished listening you’ll have more clarity on which type of partnership is best for where you are in business currently. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Understand the 4 types of JV partnerships
    2. Determine which type is best for you based on your offers
    3. Gain confidence in starting JV partnerships even if you have a small offer and no list. 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:47] April Beach: Hi, you guys. And welcome back to another episode here of the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach. The host of this show, this is episode number 311. And we are diving in with a friend of mine, Charles Byrd, who’s going to unpack four different types of JV partnerships that feel really good and are very, very profitable for you to get into place for your business.

    [00:01:09] April Beach: So who is this show for? This show is for you. If you have an. Established program or training, doesn’t even matter. The actual cost and the value of that program. Charles is gonna unpack different strategies based on the value of your program here in the show. So if you have an established training or program and you want to get more eyes on you, you don’t probably run ads.

    [00:01:32] April Beach: If you’re like me, you know, Facebook and I had a big, huge divorce that includes my Facebook ads account. And so, you know, and you might not either have the investment or want to invest in running LinkedIn ads. And maybe that isn’t even aligning with your company, but you need to get more eyes on your business in a way that feels really good to you.

    [00:01:50] April Beach: So joint venture partnerships are a great way to do that. And so our guest today. Charles Byrd was referred to me by multiple different people because he is this go to guy on building JV partnerships in the way that he talks about it. And we unpack actually what is a JV partnership and what would be the right next steps for you.

    [00:02:09] April Beach: So if you want to generate your lead, more leads with the right people. In a way that aligns with your time, Charles is very much like I am. He takes his kids to cool places and travels around a lot and just frankly doesn’t overwork himself. He’s been very strategic and actually how he’s modeled his business.

    [00:02:26] April Beach: If you want to do that, get more leads into your business as well as this great episode for you to listen to. So again, this is episode number. 311 and you can visit all of the show notes by cruising over to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash 311 or by just going to SweetLifeCo. com clicking on the podcast.

    [00:02:47] April Beach: This is episode number 311 and everything will be over there waiting for you. If you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive in and meet my friend, Charles. All right, you guys. Thank you for being here this week. I am here with my friend Charles and Charles and I were introduced to each other by a mutual friend who is always looking to connect great people with great people.

    [00:03:07] April Beach: And one of the places that he learned that was from Charles himself. And so Charles has a gifting. of helping you to build your network, build your business by helping you to rethink how you get in front of your ideal audience in a way that it’s a win win for everybody. So I’m really excited to be talking about what we’re going to chat about on today’s show.

    [00:03:28] April Beach: Charles, welcome to the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast. You want to give people a little bit of a background on who you are and how you got to the point where you are right now in your business and your area of expertise.

    [00:03:39] Charles Byrd: Absolutely. And April, thanks so much for having me. So I help businesses scale with joint venture partnerships, referrals, speaking, and for a little backstory straight into what I do today, I worked in the Silicon Valley for 15 years.

    [00:03:54] Charles Byrd: I was a director at a billion dollar software company. I left to get a taste of the entrepreneurial freedom I read about in books. I started with a low ticket and that’s it. Productivity course and being new to the online space. I didn’t have a list or connections at that time. So started going to a lot of events and connecting with people online and quickly found my new peer group of entrepreneurs already had my ideal clients in their communities.

    [00:04:22] Charles Byrd: So I started setting up presentations to other people’s audiences, delivering a high value training and offering the deeper dive course and started growing my email list quickly, making sales, making a positive impact. So I thought, since this is working, what if I take my it and systems background and simplify and systematize the entire joint venture process, which I did.

    [00:04:47] Charles Byrd: And eventually people wondered how I book. Two to six joint venture promotions per week for my offers to other people’s communities. And I was at a mastermind in Aspen and my phone’s blowing up with texts and messenger messages and people knocking on the room door going, how do you line up so many of these deals?

    [00:05:07] Charles Byrd: So I decided to put together my first high ticket event called pure JV and that’s the market I’ve been serving. Ever since, uh, at this point, that’s through one on one work with companies over five weeks and the steps that we walk people through are creating a unique joint venture strategy for their product and market, help them identify their most profitable partners.

    [00:05:31] Charles Byrd: Show them how to connect to those partners through warm channels. My favorite part, how to guide the conversations to land the deals frequently on the first call. Operationally, how to execute those deals from a systems perspective, and then how to turn each deal into two or three more. Eight of my clients in the first year added 1.

    [00:05:53] Charles Byrd: 25 to 6 million in additional revenue. I had three clients on stage with Tony Robbins last month. teaching them how to create embedded partnerships. So their offers inside of Tony’s, uh, one of my clients, Dr. Dan Pompa just booked on Joe Rogan through his PR company. And I’m showing him how to parlay that into warm intros to Lex Friedman and Andrew Huberman to take that win and take it to a whole nother level.

    [00:06:20] Charles Byrd: So it’s, it’s a way to simply get in front of more of your ideal clients. through other people’s communities, audiences, and, and build amazing relationships on the way.

    [00:06:31] April Beach: And now I’m sure our listeners know why I was so excited to bring you here on the show, because this is, this is exactly what people are looking for.

    [00:06:39] April Beach: And the way you go about doing it, we’ve talked about affiliate launches and we’ve talked about those things. This is completely different. So the way you go about doing this is. is very unique and, um, it’s very relational. And that’s one of the reasons why I have been so interested in working with you as well for a long time.

    [00:06:56] April Beach: And I’ve, I’ve seen the case studies and I know your clients and it’s just what you do. You create amazing results in a way that feels really, really good. So let’s kind of go back to the beginning for our listeners who might not know actually what a joint venture is. Let’s define what JV is for our listeners or people who may be confused.

    [00:07:17] Charles Byrd: Yeah. Uh, so again, coming out of corporate, I, I thought a joint venture has been two big companies like Partner together and they’re basically married. And, uh, this is nothing quite like that. This, you can think of them as promotional partnerships. And I’ll just share a basic example, but I’ll point out there’s, um, you have the product or service.

    [00:07:42] Charles Byrd: Someone else has the audience. And so to use an example of like Brian Tracy, he’s got a, an audience of 500, 000 people who’ve subscribed to receive his emails. They follow him because he teaches sales, productivity, high performance. And so He’ll partner with experts that compliment those topics. And so imagine Brian mailing his 500, 000 people, inviting them to a presentation you’re putting on for your product or service, because it aligns with why people follow him to begin with.

    [00:08:19] Charles Byrd: And then everyone who registers for that training is added to your email list. So you can literally add thousands of people to your list. A day during those promotions and then you deliver a high, high value training in this example, everyone who signs up is a new client of yours and you share revenue with Brian because it was his audience to begin with.

    [00:08:40] Charles Byrd: So that would be like an example of a webinar type of promotion, but it also could be, I’ll cover a few different joint venture types in the process. It could also be me simply sending you a referral if we’ve lined up a referral partnership. That’s a type of joint venture as well. Um, and systematizing the joint venture process.

    [00:09:06] Charles Byrd: Um, in my presentation, I have a slide that says, do you get your referrals by luck or by design? Is it baked into the DNA of, of what you’re doing? So I personally get 12 to 20 referrals to million dollar plus businesses a week through this process. Um, so speaking to other people’s groups. Whether that’s a webinar format or a physical stage, um, referral partnerships, embedded partnerships.

    [00:09:38] Charles Byrd: That’s where as other people make sales of their product or service, you’re making a sale of yours because your offers inside of theirs, which I know April, we were chatting and you were excited because that aligns with some of your licensing strategies, creating embedded partnerships around that. And lastly, it would be social JVs, much like this interview is.

    [00:10:02] Charles Byrd: So it’s, it’s a conversation. Um, this of course gets me some exposure to your audience, April. Um, if I’m promoting this show to my audience, that’s getting you more exposure. So this is another form of, of joint venture, uh, which we never even talked about in those terms. It just happens to be. Another way to think about it.

    [00:10:24] Charles Byrd: Yeah.

    [00:10:25] April Beach: So for our listeners who, um, clearly this is somebody, I’m sure it’s something that almost everybody who’s listening is going to be like, this is, I absolutely need to be doing this. This sounds so smart, but what do they need to actually have in place already? To be in a position to start making these JV partnerships, what sort of content or trainings or what level of expertise do you recommend people have before they start moving into this?

    [00:10:53] April Beach: What’s this? That’s the prerequisite to move into this type of a partnership.

    [00:10:58] Charles Byrd: Sure. So I’ll, I’ll, uh, dive into what those specifically are. Um, also addressing. What are some of the things that hold people back from wanting to do these kind of things? Number one, how, how are these configured? If people don’t know how the deals are put together, then it’s easy to avoid them because they don’t know what the next step is, or they feel they could be complicated.

    [00:11:22] Charles Byrd: Um, and you know, or they, even if they see alignment, they don’t know how to guide a conversation into making that a reality, um, or something I call the reciprocation trap where people feel that. If, if someone else promotes them or their offer that they have to promote the other person’s offer, which is simply a story in our head, that’s not actually true.

    [00:11:49] Charles Byrd: Um, or one person’s audience is way bigger and they feel they’re not big enough to participate yet, which is again, just simply a self. limiting, um, thought. So the prerequisites, as, as you asked, are as follows. Now, based on the different JV types, um, some of them have more requirements than others to be able to achieve technically.

    [00:12:17] Charles Byrd: So let’s start at the simple side referrals. Not a lot of infrastructure required for referrals, so you can simply have a conversation with a friend, a peer, a client and talk through who right fit. Connections are for your product service, product services or rooms that you may want to get in front of minimal infrastructure.

    [00:12:45] Charles Byrd: We’re talking texts, emails, uh, those kind of basic things. So, and, and, you know, some way to track. Those from a spreadsheet to however, you feel like tracking them, um, which of course we have super dialed systems for and then, um, to a little more advanced where if you’re doing something like a webinar, like the example I shared regarding Brian Tracy, you would need a little more infrastructure in there’s layers to have very simple approaches versus more advanced, but in general, if you were doing something like a webinar, you would want it.

    [00:13:26] Charles Byrd: emails for a partner to be able to send out on your behalf so that they’re promoting it to their audience because you’re not going to have them write your emails. You’ll share them so their job is easier. Um, then those emails will have links to register for a training. That would mean you’d need some type of landing page where someone can read what the presentation’s about.

    [00:13:50] Charles Byrd: If they’re interested in it, they can sign up. And as they put their name and email in, those folks are getting added to your email list. So you’d have some type of autoresponder email tool to collect those, uh, leads coming through from the registrations. You’d need a tool to be able to deliver the webinar, something like Zoom or GoToWebinar, something like that.

    [00:14:12] Charles Byrd: Point being… Each strategy has its own specific, uh, systems and tools behind it. But keep in mind, a lot of these can be very straightforward. So certainly don’t get intimidated by the tools. It just has to do with which approach is the best for your business and to kind of cut to the chase a little bit on that, if you have higher ticket offers.

    [00:14:38] Charles Byrd: Your, your offers are more expensive. We’re talking 10, 15, 20 K, um, doing big promotions. Isn’t even a good use of your time. You want to simply get in front of your ideal clients going straight to where they are. So where are affluent, uh, entrepreneurs? Well they’re in other high ticket masterminds. They’re in other high ticket programs.

    [00:15:06] Charles Byrd: That, that’s where I spend my time is presenting to rooms full of million dollar plus businesses. So I can do one presentation, which by the way, I’m not even making an offer. I haven’t made an offer in front of a room in probably three years, but I walk off the stage and everyone who’s interested comes and has a chat.

    [00:15:28] Charles Byrd: We line up a followup call and a bunch of those become. Um, clients and then I meet with them a year later and many of them have, they’re over a million in, in a new revenue just from that. So, um, in any case, those are some of the JV types, some of the, uh, uh, reciprocation trap things that can hold people back.

    [00:15:49] Charles Byrd: But really what I want to highlight is it’s a new way of thinking of everyone you meet. They know someone who could be an ideal client for you or an ideal partner for you. So it’s, it’s building better relationships to get to those winning outcomes.

    [00:16:06] April Beach: Yeah. You said, you said so many things there. I want to pull out again and just highlight.

    [00:16:10] April Beach: First of all, is that oftentimes when you speak, you aren’t actually making an offer. And I think that our audience would assume that you’re coming in and you’re doing an actual sales webinar or a training, which could obviously be the case as well. But. Yeah. In what you said, in the way you do it, going in and just organically teaching your area of expertise or introducing a different thought process regarding, you know, what is the solution that you provide?

    [00:16:38] April Beach: That is, I think that feels really good. That’s one of the things that you do that I love the most because that really aligns more with. how we operate as a company. And I think a lot of our listeners are going to are going to find that as well. And I think just allowing for our listeners to, um, perhaps even get permission, maybe they need to realize that it’s okay to go and teach and pour in without feeling the need to sell and sell and sell in.

    [00:17:10] April Beach: According to your system and your process, you’re actually more profitable possibly because you don’t. Actually do that.

    [00:17:18] Charles Byrd: Yeah, absolutely. So again, I’ll draw these distinctions that could be helpful for people to self place where they may fit the best with some of these JV types. For one, I think everyone listening should lean into referrals.

    [00:17:34] Charles Byrd: It’s simple. It’s, it’s, uh, highly effective. Um, especially this doesn’t mean just from your own clients. I mean, I get a ton from clients, but it’s from my peer group. It’s from my friends. In fact, before we hit record here, you and I scheduled a call to line up great connections for each other. How much did that cost either of us?

    [00:17:56] Charles Byrd: Nothing. Um, so, uh, number one, start there. I will make a distinction with, uh, like my offers are quite high ticket because of the value they bring. But I’ll point out if if I had a two K offer or five K offer, I would be in front of broader groups. And I would be making offers in those presentations. It just has to do with where you are in the market where I’m talking to more advanced businesses in general anyway.

    [00:18:32] Charles Byrd: And when they hear a strategy that they don’t have in place and they want in place in a way, they don’t need to be sold. They’re like, I want that. So, um, whereas when I was running a group programs, which I did for many years, I’d actually fill them from, well, I guess three main places. One, I would do broader webinars and the call to action was to a sales call.

    [00:18:58] Charles Byrd: And, and so that would be people mailing their lists like that example, the Brian Tracy one, um, and I would present to the mid level masterminds, people in groups that are eight, 10, 15 K. Which those are way smaller groups, but they’re, they’re full of ideal clients. These people have invested in themselves.

    [00:19:20] Charles Byrd: They’re, they have enough traction in their business to do that. And typically the further along a entrepreneur is the way easier it is to help them because they have so many other ducks in a row. Um, and I’ll point out by consciously choosing to move up market Your life gets way easier.

    [00:19:42] April Beach: I’ve heard people say that for years and it wasn’t until I started doing that myself where I actually believed him.

    [00:19:48] April Beach: I think that was in the beginning, there was just a lot of intimidation there, but uh, over the years I, I realized you’re completely right about that. So that’s a really good distinction to my, yeah. My next question was going to be what, what is the vow? Who do you best connect with based on the value of your offer?

    [00:20:02] April Beach: And I know our listeners have offers absolutely from, you know, a few thousand dollars up to, up to 10 K whereas other, uh, other of our, our listeners have 50, 000 programs that they deliver as well. So what I’m hearing that you just said is based on the actual product that you’re selling, that’s where you’re going to The way that you would approach and deliver your content within this JV partnership would be based on the actual, um, really financial level or the audience.

    [00:20:33] April Beach: Um, I don’t want to say maturity because that’s not right. Uh, the, the audience, how advanced the, the buyer is with, with correlation with that offer in what they usually tend to need to buy because you’re right, because, you know, are more advanced or profitable entrepreneurs. They have their teams, they have their systems, they’re not so busy, uh, in the things that those people that are, are trying to break like that.

    [00:20:58] April Beach: 30 or 40 K a month ceiling or try all of those processes that, that tend to need to be brought into place for those other kind of mid level entrepreneurs. So that’s, that’s a really, really good point. So let’s kind of recap again, some of these, you said there are four primary types of JV partnerships that you love to guide people through.

    [00:21:20] April Beach: Can we recap those one more time? So I’m just trying to cover those again for our listeners.

    [00:21:25] Charles Byrd: Yeah. So number one is presenting to other people’s audiences. And you could kind of put that in a few camps, um, that could be, uh, speaking on a stage in front of a physical room. It could be presenting virtually to a group and, and then the caliber of that group, it, it could be a higher level group or it could be a broader webinar to a big list, a big audience.

    [00:21:51] Charles Byrd: Um, so all of those are. Presenting to a group number two referral partnerships again, highly recommend these and keep in mind referrals. Don’t have to just be to clients. Although those are lovely. Of course, you can get referrals to joint venture partners. You can get referrals to stages like If you want more podcasts, get your referrals to podcasts.

    [00:22:16] Charles Byrd: So you, you aim the cannon at what you are after. Um, then there’s embedded partnerships. Again, this is where there’s different configurations, but in general it’s where your product or service is inside of someone else’s offer or some of your content is in someone else’s offer that’s like a lead source for you.

    [00:22:39] Charles Byrd: And those are Some of my favorite because you’re making a singular deal that represents ongoing lead flow. Um, and just to cite an example of that, uh, one of my clients, Jackson Milan, um, came to me when it was at 1. 8 million a year later is over 6 million in cash collected through joy ventures. He was running Facebook ads that weren’t working particularly well and started working a lot worse when Facebook shut down his account and That’s when he was referred over to me and he’s a quick start.

    [00:23:13] April Beach: I love Jackson I’ve taught I’ve taught a master class in Jackson’s group before I think Jackson actually might have been one of the people that originally introduced us now that I’m thinking back before our other friend Brian this is So I, I’ve seen the ins and outs of how Jackson’s stuff works and, and you’re a genius, my friend.

    [00:23:37] Charles Byrd: Yeah. Um, Jackson, he, this guy’s he implements, so he booked, he hired me. We dove in on a strategy, identifying ideal partners, how to land those partners. He, he landed 70 joint ventures in two months, which is. Um, and then I taught him how to create embedded partnerships, and he lined up 15 of those. Uh, he more than tripled the business all the while touring Australia with his wife and two dogs in a four by four camper van before buying a farm by the, uh, Ocean and jungle.

    [00:24:14] Charles Byrd: Um, he wrote an intro for me two weeks ago. I, I think I got a screenshot of it. He does this intro and he’s like, Charles has made me more money than any human on planet earth. Right.

    [00:24:27] April Beach: Right. I believe it. I, I believe it. Um, Absolutely. What a great case study. And I, and I, and I love, so I can like continue to share a little bit, you know, with, with our audience that I, that I’ve actually been within his ecosystem, um, and seen that.

    [00:24:44] April Beach: And it’s a very well oiled machine. I will say that.

    [00:24:49] Charles Byrd: Yeah. He’s done a beautiful job. Um, I want to point one other thing out is, uh, I started with joint ventures off a 200 product, so you can do this the whole way. Like, and it is a risk free lead source, meaning. You only pay commission on sales that have been made.

    [00:25:13] Charles Byrd: So some, some promos work great. You send your partner money. In fact, I made a sale earlier today from a referral from a good friend of mine. And I’m like, remind me your PayPal, like going to send him money. Um, now keep in mind, he didn’t do the intro to make money. He did it because it’s the right fit for that person, but who doesn’t like getting money in the process?

    [00:25:37] Charles Byrd: So again, 200 product. Successfully jv’d with that. And then as, as I evolved as a entrepreneur and prices went to 2k and then five and then eight and have continued. Up past 45 for different offers. Um, it’s the strategy the whole time. Um, I, I do, I guess personally like it when folks offers are a little higher ticket because they can ROI me so fast.

    [00:26:08] Charles Byrd: Um, just as an example of Todd Hartley, he’s got his core offer was an 8k offer helping. businesses leverage video in their sales process to increase conversion. Um, Tony Robbins hired him to train all of his sales sales teams across his companies that worked so well that now Tony has him on stage for business mastery.

    [00:26:30] Charles Byrd: And he wanted to learn to JV with other people, not just Tony. So within four weeks of working together, he’d. We helped get this whole system in production. He’d lined up six JVs. He happened to pay me 35 K. His first joy venture brought 125 K next joy venture, 125 K. He’s added a hundred thousand a month for the last five months in money.

    [00:26:57] Charles Byrd: He never had previously. So, um, Anyway, with higher ticket offers, like not that everyone does this, mind you, but if, if he can four or five X his money on deal number one, but he’s lining them up multiple per week going forward, it’s a pretty nice thing.

    [00:27:16] April Beach: That’s a pretty great way to justify the investment of the genius you bring to somebody’s business too.

    [00:27:22] April Beach: I mean, this is just like, it’s, it’s great for him. It’s great for you. Um, I want all of our listeners to be thinking about just. Totally a little sidebar here. You guys, um, on your program, you know, can, can, can your students, uh, you know, four or five times the ROI on your program to besides the JV side of it.

    [00:27:43] April Beach: And, uh, it’s always something to, to be mindful about, or how long would that take them or actually what do they need to. do to be able to do that. So this is such a great conversation. Okay. So I think because I totally sidetracked us, you talking about Jackson. So we went over the four, the four basic types.

    [00:28:00] April Beach: Of course, I have my notes here. Cause I, I love learning from you. If you talked about presenting in front of other people’s groups, we talked about the referral partnerships. We talked about the embedded. Um, partnerships, which you and I both love you from a JV standpoint, me from a licensing standpoint.

    [00:28:17] April Beach: Those are just so powerful and so simple. Um, did I miss the

    [00:28:20] Charles Byrd: fourth one? What’s number four? And the fourth one was a social JVs, much like this kind of interview. Social. Oh my

    [00:28:27] April Beach: goodness. So cool. Um, my friend, I have, I have my chicken scratch notes here that I’m going to turn into our show notes, which I’m sure will turn into more resources for our listeners to, to recap, because there was so much, so much wisdom here in this show.

    [00:28:42] April Beach: So thank you. Thank you very much for your time and sharing this. How can people get into your ecosystem? How can people tap into where do you hang out? Uh, how can they continue to learn from you and, and tap into your world? Like, like our company is tapping into your world.

    [00:29:01] Charles Byrd: Oh, wonderful. Well, thanks.

    [00:29:02] Charles Byrd: Thanks for asking. Uh, simply pop over to charlesByrd. com B Y R D it’s got more info on that. the kind of work we do. There’s ways to, to reach me and the team through there. Um, I’m also on Facebook, Facebook slash dot com slash Charles Byrd, B Y R D. I don’t use LinkedIn a ton, but you can find me on there too.

    [00:29:26] Charles Byrd: Um, so yeah, these would be good places to, to connect. Awesome. Thank

    [00:29:31] April Beach: you so very much, Charles. I love learning from you and appreciate you pouring into our community and your

    [00:29:36] Charles Byrd: time here. My pleasure. Thanks for having me.

    [00:29:41] April Beach: All right. What a great episode with Charles. As you heard, and we’ve talked about affiliate launches before on this show.

    [00:29:49] April Beach: You’ve met others that have been in here. Um, I will say to you that personally, one of our strategies is a company that We have been leaning into for the last couple of years is having me teach and other business masterminds in that sort of, um, you know, way number one here is presenting other people’s groups.

    [00:30:08] April Beach: I’ve even taught a podcast on how to create a training program that’s aligned for your next step. here. If you want to go back and relisten to that, um, on how to teach a masterclass and other programs, the way Charles does it, you guys is it’s just so organic. I don’t want to use, I don’t want to use the word authentic because unfortunately I think that great year, that great word has been overused, but it’s very organic and it’s a good fit.

    [00:30:34] April Beach: So my summary for you here is, if you do have a higher ticket, Definitely make sure you’re connecting with Charles Moore. It’s charlesbyrd. com. And especially for those of you guys that hang out on Facebook, it sounds like he’s over there on Facebook and connect with him more, follow along. He’s, he’s very, very smart and, uh, in giving man and will lead you in the right direction.


    Easy Licensing Offers with April Beach (Episode 310)

    Easy Licensing Offers



    Episode Bonus: 
    Access www.license2scale.com for help building your first licensing offer.
    Who is this episode for? 
    Established consultants, coaches or subject matter experts who are ready to scale and in levels 2-4 of my Online Business Roadmap 
    n this episode we are revealing easy licensing offers that every entrepreneur can do regardless of your experience with licensing, length of time in business, and capacity. Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve been at it for a while, if you’re looking to grow without all the extra headaches, this episode’s for you. Have some training modules or content under your belt? Tune in. 
    Licensing is a great way to scale your business and expand the work you’ve already done by allowing other companies to distribute your trainings, content, courses, systems, frameworks, or materials. But the process of licensing may seem huge, especially when you’ve never done it before. But, you don’t want to miss out on an opportunity to scale your business. 
    In this episode, we unpack 3 Easy Licensing Offers that will increase your profit with less work. You’ll learn each offer and determine which is best for you. This is the perfect place to start if you aren’t sure if licensing is right for you or you simply don’t have the capacity to package a larger program to sell for millions but you want to scale and increase in a sustainable, non-intimidating way. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Know the easiest way to get into licensing that anyone can do
    2. Have 3 easy licensing offers you can choose to create
    3. Gain confidence in scaling with less effort to increase profit 
    Join www.license2scale.com to build your first licensing offer. 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:47] Hi there and welcome back to another episode here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur and Business Podcast. This is episode number 310 and I’m April Beach, your host, friend, business mentor, business strategist. And I am really excited about this episode today because like all of our episodes are really business strategies and trainings that other coaches will charge you thousands for.

    [00:01:09] But this particular training, I know you guys need, I’ve received the LinkedIn messages. I have received emails from you and from all the phone calls I’ve had for those of you guys who are interested in getting into licensing your trainings. But, but, but, here’s the big but, but you don’t have a ton of time and you don’t necessarily have a massive amount of bandwidth and you probably have a bunch of other projects you’re working on right now.

    [00:01:37] So you’re interested in getting into licensing, but you’re not ready to change your entire business model. I hear you. As a matter of fact, when I first started licensing, what I’m going to talk about here on this episode, This is how I started. I started small, but powerful, small, but mighty. And that’s what we’re unpacking here on this show.

    [00:01:59] On this show, I’m going to unpack three different easy licensing offers that you can get into that are super simple and that are going to set you up to grow and succeed with licensing moving forward based on your capacity and where you are right now. So this is episode number 310. You can find all the show notes, all the resources we’re going to give you over at SweetLifeCo.

    [00:02:22] com. Simply click on the podcast episode number 310. And then also if you want to dive in and you want me to work with you on the things that we’re talking about on this show and build your first easy licensing offer, make sure to join us. in license to scale. That’s license. The number two, the word scale.

    [00:02:43] com. You can join our workshop. We’re actually hosting two different events here in the month of October, November, the month of November, 2023 local here at our entrepreneur lab in Boulder, Colorado and online worldwide as well. So cruise over to license to scale. com register. And I’m going to hang out with you and we’re having a great time.

    [00:03:05] quick grab licensing offer to gather. Don’t miss that because I only host that live workshop a couple of times a year. Now let’s go into diving into the overview of all of these different possibilities and the three different quick type of licensing offers so that you can scale in this way that is not overwhelming and it’s going to be a really lucrative way for you to grow your business.

    [00:03:28] All right, let’s do it. Okay. First things first, let’s talk about what is licensing. If you aren’t familiar with it again, go back and listen to all of our other podcast episodes on how to license basic of licensing. We have so many resources. It was just blow your mind, but let me give you the nitty gritty here as you need to know it for this particular episode.

    [00:03:48] Licensing is like giving another company permission to distribute your trainings, your content, your steps of service, your genius, your frameworks that you have been coaching or consulting other people or even other businesses on for some time. Licensing is where we take your process, whether it’s built into a course or not, that we know works and we allow other companies to share it either internally with our own staff or Externally as part of their offers.

    [00:04:21] And so licensing is a really powerful way to scale your business instead of selling individually. Even if you’re doing launches for your programs where you know you’re selling everybody at once. What this allows us to do is sell it to one person. But they’re going to allow more seats to access it. And so therefore you get one sale for more money.

    [00:04:42] That’s what licensing is. We have clients that close huge licensing deals. As a matter of fact, I had a client just last month who turned a 6, 000 workshop into a 298, 000 licensing training that she licensed to a company and it only took her a month to do that. So this is a really lucrative way. But let’s say that you, aren’t really ready to get into the sales process to close a 300, 000 or a half a million or even a million dollar deal, which I’ll be honest, closing those licensing deals takes longer than the ones we’re talking about here on this episode, but you want to get started with licensing.

    [00:05:19] So what we’re going to do is we’re going to unpack three easy licensing offers that will increase your profits, but they don’t require all this sales time and effort. And let’s kind of start out with a little backstory about this. When I first got into licensing, this is how I did it. As a matter of fact, I did a lot of these things that we’re going to talk about here.

    [00:05:41] This was before I closed my first big licensing deal with a corporation. I had been working on these little licensing offers for a few years leading up to, frankly, having the confidence. and the understanding to be able to go in and close my first huge corporate deal. So you can get started with this like I did, but you don’t have to figure it out from scratch like I did.

    [00:06:05] You have me. So here you go. Let’s talk about this. So again, if you have a training or a program, And it is, it could even be one little module of a course, or maybe it’s a process that you’ve built out. When we’re talking about licensing, we’re talking about taking it from you having to be the one to sell and deliver it to an individual to allowing another company to take it and distribute it for you.

    [00:06:30] And it’s really a great way to scale your business and expand the reach of your work. When we allow other companies to just. Pick up the flag and carry it, and you get to make the money from that. Also, what’s really powerful about licensing is it levels up your thought leadership in your space. And so the three little easy, quick licensing offers we’re going to talk about today, you don’t have to lose the B to C side of your business.

    [00:06:57] You don’t have to fully go into licensing to do these little offers. So you can dip your toes into it. You’re going to get totally addicted, but you can dip your toes into it and see what this is all about. So let’s go ahead and dive into these three easy offers that will increase your profit. With little sales time and effort.

    [00:07:17] Now, number one is teaming up with your network. We know how important and powerful our network is. If you haven’t been spending time building relationships with your network, that is one area of sweat equity that I highly recommend you do in your network. There are other businesses. that might not be exactly like you.

    [00:07:36] They may not do exactly what you do, but they have programs or services or products that reach your same audience. So the first quick, easy licensing offer is teaming up with your networks and offering one course or one module, maybe from a whole course or training that you have. And allowing that other entrepreneur that’s in your network to add it to their current offer or program.

    [00:08:04] So you’re not losing it. You probably still release it and sell it yourself. But you’re taking one little piece and you’re augmenting their existing services with your one little piece. So I want you to be thinking about, first of all, who is in your network? What other businesses or specialists in your network reach your same clients?

    [00:08:24] And ideally, here’s, here’s the expert advanced move I want you to be thinking about. I want you to be thinking about businesses that are working with your clients, usually prior to when your client will be needing your full service. This is especially important if you’re still keeping that B2C side of your business so they can get a little taste of how amazing you are through somebody else’s program, and then they want to move over and work with you.

    [00:08:51] So. What is this concept? How do you do this? Number one, I want you to think of who is in your network that also serves your clients. What are their type of businesses or programs? Number two, I want you to look at your content and I want you to think about what sort of training or module and we’re talking micro guys like it doesn’t have to be this big, huge thing.

    [00:09:09] What sort of small video series or one video or one worksheet or one process would be helpful to allow your network to include in what they’re already doing that would be beneficial for the end user. And then the last part of that is I want you to think about who in your network works, and that’s the advanced move.

    [00:09:28] Not just anybody. I really want you to build relationships strategically because our time is more valuable than money. And so who in your network is actually working with your clients usually prior to when your clients are either looking for you or ready for your type of services. And then I want you to reach out to them, connect with them.

    [00:09:46] And the conversation goes something like this, super simple, Hey, listen, I love what you’re doing. I value that. I know that our areas of strength really compliment each other. And I would love to talk about how some of my content may be able to be added to your program and augment it so that we can work together as a team.

    [00:10:06] So that is way. Number one. doesn’t require huge sales processes. It’s really connecting with other people, taking part of your content and putting it into other people’s programs. Yes, you get paid for that. The financial arrangement can be as simple as a percentage of sales, or it can be a bulk payment upfront.

    [00:10:25] As a matter of fact, I’m thinking right now, I have a client that we’re working on right now doing this exact same thing. And she has a training in a program where we want to take a company’s program and the other. Other company has actually offered her a flat fee up front or a lower flat fee up front with long term residuals.

    [00:10:46] The decision is totally up to her, just like the decision is totally up to you. It depends on the value and how this particular licensing offer is fitting into your ongoing cashflow. I don’t know. Personally, I love having ongoing cashflow and residuals that I forgot was coming in. And all of a sudden I look at my bank account and there’s a royalty in there.

    [00:11:05] But you may want a bigger chunk up front. So easy way number one is teaming up with your network and finding what you can add to their programs. It’s going to be good for you and good for them. It’s an awesome way to go about doing it. It takes very little effort, very little time, and it’s super. Easy.

    [00:11:25] Frankly, exactly what we’re talking about here today. Number two. This is one I get a lot of buzz about. So people message me on LinkedIn when I say these words, they love it when I talk about this. So see if you geek out on this too. It is turning your competition into your clients. It’s kind of cool, huh?

    [00:11:44] It sounds pretty sexy, huh? Well, this is the way it works. And I, and I did this as well. So when you have other coaches that are doing the same thing or consultants or subject matter experts or strategists, basically they’re just like you, they’re literally your competition in your space. And you, however, have a great established Training or program.

    [00:12:07] It doesn’t even have to be huge. It can just be one part of a module, just like that networking collab we talked about before, or it can be a complete training. And let’s say that maybe you don’t want to sell these anymore. Have you grown out of selling some of your trainings? at one point in time, we have 56 online courses that you guys, I don’t even sell anymore.

    [00:12:27] And we are starting to release these to other business coaches to license because it just doesn’t fit into where we’re going. And frankly, what we’re talking about as a company. But there are great programs. They’ve gotten people results for years and years. So other business coaches who you could consider my competition are starting to license those for me because I’m not selling them anymore.

    [00:12:51] See how that works. So what do you have that you’re either? No longer selling, uh, or it’s not really part of your future growth plan. You can take this training and you can turn your competition into your clients by licensing your particular training to them. And this is super simple. As a matter of fact, I still do this in one of my other companies, and how it works is I literally have a brochure of trainings that people can download.

    [00:13:23] They can see the description of the training, get a sample of the training, and if they want it, they literally go online and actually purchase the classes that they want, sign my licensing agreement, and the whole thing is transferred to them to use within the terms that I have set. I don’t even talk to them on the phone, you guys.

    [00:13:42] It is a fast sale. It’s a fast deal and they’re out the door. So that is number two. And I will add the benefit to this is two years later, they show back up to pay me more money to renew their license of my trainings. It is a beautiful thing for everybody. So that is way number two. It’s actually turning your competition into your clients by taking trainings and programs that you’re just not really selling, not really pushing, or they aren’t part of your future.

    [00:14:10] Maybe thought leadership agenda in the book you’re writing and all the other. Fancy dancy things that you want to do in the future, but they’re great and they’re just sitting there. How many trainings and programs have you already created that are just sitting there collecting dust on the shelf? This option is for you.

    [00:14:28] So so far we’ve talked about networking and adding a small piece of your program to another outside businesses training. Now we’ve talked about turning your competition into your clients. And it’s a beautiful thing. And then the third way is this. I also did all of these. The third way is actually growing your team.

    [00:14:49] This may seem a little bit more complicated when I explained it, but I assure you it is very, very simple. So this is allowing other coaches. consultants, uh, subject matter experts, however you identify yourself, allowing others just like you to operate under your trademark. Okay, let me explain this. It’s not a franchise, but it’s where you give them a license to operate under your trademark, where they can Have a page on your website that shares who they are, and then you give them access to your trainings to distribute.

    [00:15:27] So you’re growing your team. This is a way to grow your team without you having to manage them, without them being employees, and they are licensees that have permission under the right framework to operate under your trademark and deliver your services. I did this. Okay. So let me explain this to you.

    [00:15:47] How I did this. This was way back in 2006, 2007. I had a very busy parent coaching business and at the time I was literally totally booked with clients. I had three little kids at home and frankly I just didn’t feel like working more, uh, nor, nor honestly, I mean in those days I think I was still breastfeeding.

    [00:16:07] I don’t think I could have worked more if I wanted to. But I was also coaching other businesses. So in the process of coaching other coaches, I came up with the idea of saying, Hey, listen, why don’t you just join my team? Why don’t I give you the ability to operate under my trademark? I can work less, the, the expanse, the name, the brand of my trademark grows, and I get to elevate my thought leadership.

    [00:16:33] And let me tell you how simple this was. It was giving them permission and access to operate under my trademark, creating different sort of rules that they abided by to operate under my trademark. But I also gave them all of the services and the steps and the processes and the forms and the sheets. And I basically gave them an entire business in a box.

    [00:16:54] And it was absolutely amazing. And within a year, my brand grew to offices in eight different states across the country so much that we received a ton of national media press and attention. So it seems super complicated. But it’s not. I didn’t feel like working anymore. And if you know a little bit about my history, this was a parent coaching business.

    [00:17:17] I’m one of the creators of the baby planning, kind of parent coaching industry, but that’s not my background. I’ve always been a bit, I was a business coach for 10 years, even before I started doing that. So believe me, I couldn’t wait to get out of actually parent coaching. I was the one that wanted to have other people do that and I needed to get back into that place where I was helping other businesses grow.

    [00:17:39] So I got to remove myself from the actual consulting side, which I really didn’t feel like doing anymore and move back into the business mentorship side while still growing my brand, expanding my trademark. and making money by allowing other parent coaches to use all of my good name and the brand that I had built and all the services and processes and trainings that I already had in place.

    [00:18:05] It was great for them. And believe me, it was. Awesome for me. So these are three very simple type of licensing packaging offers that you can think about. And, you know, I know on LinkedIn and on this podcast, I’m usually I’m talking about the big corporate deals, right? In selling big training programs to, uh, the government or Veterans Affairs or the state of Colorado or, you know, Google, you know, we’re talking about these big programs that close for hundreds of thousands of dollars, but these ones that I just talked to you about.

    [00:18:41] They’re easy. They’re fast to close. You are not going to make as much money on these each as if you’re selling and licensing your program to Google. We both know that, right? But it’s going to be one tenth of the time with one tenth of the work. And that’s why these easy licensing deals work. are so awesome, especially if you want to get into licensing, but you don’t have the capacity.

    [00:19:05] Maybe you don’t even know if you want to go into full blown licensing of your programs to other corporations, or maybe you don’t know if you want to release your marketing training to a university. You can start here and it’s very, very simple. So let me recap those three different easy licensing offers for you.

    [00:19:21] The first one was go to your network, take a piece of a training and add it to another program. So somebody else’s program in your network, again, ideally with a service that is prior to when somebody would need yours. Number two, you can turn your competition into your clients by taking the content and the trainings that you’re really no longer using and allowing your competition to distribute those.

    [00:19:45] And then you can go on to build your next level programs, your next level offers, and maybe move into a next level direction. And then number three is just to simply license your trademark, just to simply license the ability for other coaches to operate under your trademark and access some of your materials.

    [00:20:02] These are three very, very simple ways that you can scale your business with little effort. So how does that sound? I know it may seem new. All of these things are new to people and uh, that’s why I get so excited sharing them with you because everybody’s like, wow, their minds are blown when they hear about all these different options.

    [00:20:25] But these are fast and easy ways where we can expand the reach of your work. And we can level up your thought leadership and we can increase your profit with very little effort. So that’s what we’re talking about today. What do you think? This has been episode 310 here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast.

    [00:20:44] If you would love to dive in with me so I can build your first easy licensing offer with you, of course you can cruise over to license. The number two and the word scale. com register to join us online or in person this month, November 2023. If you’re listening to this later and you missed that just cruise over to SweetLife co.

    [00:21:07] com and all of our licensing workshops and support resources will be there for you. All right. I love that you guys have tuned in. Thank you so much for hanging out with me on today’s show. I refuse advertisers. I have for six years, so if you don’t mind sharing this with your friend, we would greatly appreciate it.

    [00:21:23] That’s how we get the word about the word out about what we’re doing here and I Have an awesome day.


    Neuroscience and Money Mindset for High Achieving Entrepreneurs with April Beach and Danya Douglas Hunt (Episode 309)

    Neuroscience and Money Mindset for High Achieving Entrepreneurs



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 3-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”)  who are scaling to 7-8 Figures
    What is the science behind mindset? A lot of coaches teach mindset but don’t fully know, or teach neuroscience. When you understand it’s not “woo woo” and mindset strategies are backed by science, it can help you to implement for faster results. In this episode, Danya Douglas Hunt unpacks what’s behind mindset and takes listeners through actionable steps to close milliondollar deals, sell more of your consulting or coaching services, and utilize proven processes to push yourself through barriers that may have been holding you back, whether you were aware of them or not. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Change your mind about “mindset” if you were never a big fan
    2. Understand more about the importance of neuroscience for your life and business
    3. Have actionable steps that can push you to higher profit in your business
    Danya Douglas Hunt’s Instagram
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:47] April: Hi, you guys. In this episode, we are diving into the science behind mindset. It’s a very special episode. As you know, I’m not a mindset coach and frankly, I think there’s a lot of mindset coaches out there that just have you chant things and do things over and over again. And now I am a believer that envisioning things and setting your projection on things works.

    [00:01:09] April: I actually know that there’s science behind it and I don’t. think that science is talked about enough, science is uncovered enough, and I kind of geek out on science. And so I’m super excited to bring Dania Douglas Hunt onto the show today. So if you’re a high achieving entrepreneur, you value mindset coaching, or you want to tap into mindset coaching to reach eight figures or seven figures. This episode is for you.

    [00:01:40] April: This is not for beginner coaches. This is for those of you guys that you’re good at what you do and it’s time to push you through to the next level. You value mindset, but you really want to know that there is science behind it. And when you know the power of neuroscience.

    [00:01:56] April: and money mindset strategies like we’re going to uncover in this episode today, then you’re going to understand why it’s important for you to tap into that and really bring it into your business and into your life overall. So this is a jam packed episode with Danya Douglas Hunt. Now, Danya was a former Olympic athlete trainer turned mindset coach for seven and eight. figure entrepreneurs, because when we look at peak performance athletics and entrepreneurships, we have tons of similarities and we have some of the same blocks as well. Danya is actually part of our expert dream team that comes in and works with our clients every single month. We’re so glad to have her.

    [00:02:37] April: And I’m going to admit when my clients were begging for her to come in and she’s a friend. And so we brought her in as part of the team. And at first I was like, I don’t need this. You guys have better believe that I am the one up front and center. Every single time Danya is in there, she kicks off every single month. for our clients and our wave makers program and our, our amplify and our scale programs. And she’s just a rock star.

    [00:03:03] April: So in this show, we’re going to unpack, like I said, the neuroscience behind mindset, and she’s going to take you through very practical strategies. So you know where you might be blocked and what you actually want to do in order to hit that next level. By using neuroscience and money mindset strategies. And so if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive in. All right, you guys. I’m so glad you’re here with my friend, Danya and we’ve talked about her. I’ve been warming up to this episode. And if you don’t know, Danya you’re definitely going to want to be connected with her after this show.

    [00:03:36] April: You know, when we talk about mindset, that isn’t something Danya, like you and I laugh all the time. April is not a mindset coach, right? So, so, so where, where do my people get fed? Where do our clients get fed? Where do our clients. Keep getting that fire within to go to the next level. And our secret weapon is Danya Douglas Hunt. I’ll be real honest. So I’m really excited to have her here on the show. Welcome to the SweetLife Podcast. I’m so glad you’re here.

    [00:04:07] Danya: Thank you for having me. Yeah, it’s, we always have such fun conversations because. You’re an expert in what you do in business strategy. And I unpack all the personal strategy that helps implement your strategy and take action. So it’s a, it’s a great combo. It’s fun to have conversations and I’m pumped to be here. Let’s, let’s create some shifts and help people play bigger.

    [00:04:25] April: Right. Right. So in the truth of the matter is I remember when I, when I first brought you in, I’m like, Oh my gosh, my people need this so badly. And you guys, if you see the video recordings of when, when Danya is in there every single month, who is the one that’s like front and the center on the edge of her seat to all the stuff, implementing the shit, all of it. Yes. It’s yours. Truly. I’m like, Oh man, this is so good. I needed this so badly. So you know, the reality is I’m like, I’m good. I don’t need this. I’m just going to, I’m just going to help our clients. I’m just going to get this for our clients. Uh, uh, uh, uh. I do not miss one of those.

    [00:05:00] April: So, uh, I’ve learned so much from you. I’ve learned so much from you also. So today we’re going to talk about money mindset, right? And this is, there are so many big shifts on a relationship with money and all these other things. But you know, like what our clients are doing, some of our clients are sitting at the table selling what has been a 99 course now for half a million dollars. And it requires. A different understanding, a different belief to do that. Yeah, and that’s where you come in.

    [00:05:33] Danya: Yeah, and so I just want to echo back to what you just said about even being on the calls. Like, I think a big misconception is people think first mindset works just like, Oh, think positive. No, it is about getting your subconscious mind and your nervous system on board to your desires.

    [00:05:49] Danya: And real quick here, your brain hates change. It can’t predict it. Even though consciously you’re like, I want the million dollar a month. I want this. If you have not got your subconscious mind or nervous system on board to that, your brain’s going to perceive whatever your desires are to be a threat. And so then what happens is, as you’re working towards your goals, have fun, burning out, feeling stressed out, not being fulfilled on this hamster wheel, because your mind is not actually helping assist you to get there.

    [00:06:14] Danya: It’s trying to protect you from that thing it thinks is a lion. So as people are scaling their businesses, the, some of the most vital work you can do is mindset work, nervous system regulation, because of how the brain operates. And so it’s like, Oh, I’ve got, I have lots of money. I know most people who actually need the money mindset work are people who have lots of money.

    [00:06:33] Danya: Just going to say it because what tends to happen when you get money. So first there’s like, Oh, I just, when I’m going to get the money, I’ll be happy. That’s a false misconception. But then you get the money. What happens having this experience where it’s like, okay, now I sold a hundred K offer or I’m making half a million dollars a month.

    [00:06:48] Danya: Your nervous system is freaking out because now we’re worried about what people are going to think, or if I’m going to lose it, or whether she was going to drop, or we’re looking at how we’re operating. And it’s like, I want to scale the next level. But I can’t possibly work harder or put more time in.

    [00:07:00] Danya: And so then a lot of us almost build these traps for ourselves, but just based on our perceptions and beliefs around money, we think we have to do with what’s possible required of us. And we maybe have the accolades, but we’re not feeling fulfilled, or we’re not present with our families or taking time off.

    [00:07:14] Danya: And so it’s this. It’s this beautiful amalgamation of, as you grow and scale yourself, you’re going to grow and scale your business naturally. And most people focus just on the strategy, which is absolutely vital. You need that like law of action. We live in a 3d world where we need to have strategy, take action.

    [00:07:30] Danya: However, the intention, the energy. Behind those actions is what’s going to dictate your results. And most of us aren’t aware of what’s actually creating those results or creating our experiences of money. So I look at entrepreneurs I work with, just like the Olympians I used to work with. Olympians are really good athletes.

    [00:07:49] Danya: They’re good athletes, right? And they’re looking to increase and optimize themselves to the next 1%, the next 0. 5%. In my mind, the entrepreneurs that work with are just like Olympians. They’re the Olympians of business space. You’re constantly looking to optimize, refine, do things better, easier, like, and it’s just this constant evolution.

    [00:08:07] Danya: However, if our mind and our body aren’t on board, it’s a lot harder, a lot more stressful, a lot more unfulfilled. You’re going to have, as things hit the fan, like maybe your launch fails or a client. Sue’s you, or there’s a Facebook ads account that gets hacked down. If you don’t have the mind and body regulated to that level of what you’re calling in and where you’re going, it’s going to be a really stressful, unenjoyable journey.

    [00:08:29] Danya: So that’s where I come in. And I just wanted to echo that. Cause like people are like, Oh, just mindset. No, it’s not that it’s so much more than that. And it’s going to help assist you to your goals way easier and faster.

    [00:08:39] April: Yeah, I’m so glad that you said that. And one of the things you said was about, you know, being nervous about making more money.

    [00:08:44] April: And, and I remember that like around a decade ago, I used to think that, you know, I used to have these preconceived beliefs that, you know, everybody with money is a total asshole. And I didn’t want to be that person. Um, and then. I thought, Oh my gosh, I don’t even want to make that much money because I don’t want that responsibility.

    [00:09:01] April: That seems like so heavy to me. Like the more money I make, and I remember this feeling of just being weighted down and it was probably a good five years of intentional work that I had to actually push through that and change. All of that that you were saying, I probably wouldn’t have taken me five years.

    [00:09:18] April: Had I, had I known you back then, but yeah, all of those things are so true. And I think one of the, one of the coolest things that I have learned in the process of, of having you come into our client ecosystem is all the science behind this is understanding, you know, who we were. In the past and how that affects us today and how, yes, like, Oh my gosh, you see this and you, your, your mind, your body thinks lion and all of these, honestly, back to the basics of why instead of just, Oh, we’re just going to manifest something, you know what I mean?

    [00:09:57] April: Serious science behind this and I’m a science geek for the, for the millions of college classes that I did take and zero degree to show for it. Every single class I took was a science class because I’m a science dork, right? And so I think also when we’re talking about mindset, that really helps me in your expertise because you bring in all of the science behind it.

    [00:10:18] April: Yeah, totally. Factual it makes sense. It isn’t just putting fairy dust in the air and hoping and believing and jumping off a cliff, right? So I I just I just have to say that um, so when what are the problems so so we’re talking about Looking and moving forward getting to the next level our listeners. Our clients are getting to the next level Yeah And there are issues getting there that isn’t just strategy. What, what’s the deal? What’s the problem?

    [00:10:50] Danya: Yeah. So first we, I will keep it short and tight. First, we need to recognize, understand that our subconscious mind is something that’s responsible for 99 percent of everything we do.

    [00:11:00] Danya: So let’s put this into context though, because I need anchoring down. What the heck does this even mean? Right now, my heart’s beating. I’m not worried about my heart beating. It’s doing it on its own right now. I’m talking to you and words are coming out my mouth and somehow my tongue is moving and air is coming out and sounds.

    [00:11:13] Danya: And you’re able to perceive that and listen and interpret that, right? That’s subconscious mind. Um, me driving is now automatic. I just drive and I don’t have to think about that. So your subconscious mind is a supercomputer that runs everything we do or. And it’s necessary because if we had to sit here and think about how to move my finger or my lips, like we would just be oversimplifying the data.

    [00:11:34] Danya: The thing is though, most of us don’t recognize that our subconscious mind that runs everything is programmed from a young age and it continues to be programmed based on what was around us, what was modeled, what we heard, what we listened to. And so many entrepreneurs right now, whatever age you are, Are running your businesses with like your five or eight year old mind.

    [00:11:52] Danya: Now, I don’t know about you, but I don’t want my five year old running my business. Like it’s not helpful. And so a big part of what happens as we’re developing from zero to seven is we don’t have that critical factor to reject information. So when it comes to money, just even to have awareness. Because unless, until you make the con, the unconscious conscious, we can’t change it.

    [00:12:11] Danya: So a big part of where we start with entrepreneurs is let’s just bring awareness to where is my money stores? What are my money beliefs? Well, guess what? So much of that is shaped around you. And you can look at like my sister’s four year old is already making connections with money of like out money for this.

    [00:12:25] Danya: And this is, you know, it’s like your brain is constantly making interpretations and taking experiences and taking almost like pictures of snapshots that are being stored as like a picture in the brain. Um, Yeah. And so if we ever had an experience that, um, causes emotional turmoil as a young age, whether we remember it or not, your brain is constant scanning the environment and filtering it through like the 4 billions of bits of data, filtering it through your own identity, your beliefs, your values, and your senses and past experiences to present you with, um, the whatever, five or seven bits of information.

    [00:12:57] Danya: So most of us are in our businesses as five year olds or eight year olds. And so let’s, let’s get some, um, awareness here. Think about when you grew up, what did you potentially witness or experience about money for some, it’s like you witnessed parents fighting. Maybe divorce was caused because your brain’s been a connection of money.

    [00:13:17] Danya: It’s not, it’s not actually that, but maybe your brain thinks that, um, made interpretation of that. Maybe, um, you heard things like, we don’t have the money. We can’t afford that. You have to work hard for money. Maybe you watch things on TV, your coaches, or you experienced like, so beliefs and identity gets shaped from a young age.

    [00:13:33] Danya: And we can just look back and say, what was kind of happening in and around my early childhood around money, conversations, experiences, um, events, listening to things and recognize until we uncover that and reprogram that that’s going to be continuing to run the show. So that’s where I want to start with people is recognizing what’s actually causing us to create those results.

    [00:13:55] Danya: Now we talked about even before in the show, what does create results? So if we put results on the far right hand side, that’s like the end of, if you’re looking at me right now, I’m wearing, okay, this gold chain, that’s the result. There’s a cause behind this result. So there’s law of cause and effect. Okay.

    [00:14:12] Danya: So the effect or the result always has a cause behind it. I maybe saw this on my dresser and I was like, I want to wear a gold chain. So it was an amalgamation of me looking at it, maybe seeing how I wanted to feel that caused me to put on this gold chain. And now the effect is I’m sitting here in front of you, April, with this gold chain on.

    [00:14:28] Danya: Make sense? Yeah. Now look at our bank account. That’s the effect. Look at everything you have in your external reality. That’s the effect. That’s the result. What actually creates those results though is first action and strategy and behaviors proceed results. Okay. So strategy, business, Facebook funnels, email marketing, whatever.

    [00:14:47] Danya: So that comes before the results, the effect. Well, what comes before strategy, business, um, action behaviors is our state. Our vibration, our frequency, how we’re feeling, okay? Because people are like, Oh, I don’t care about my feelings. Your emotions are causing you to do or not do something. That’s the role of them.

    [00:15:06] Danya: It’s take action, not take action. For example, the sensation of hunger makes you go get food. The sensation of being tired makes you take a nap. The sensation of anything is causing you to do an action. So if we are in a muddled state. Like maybe we’re like disempowered. We’re worried about people, fear of judgment.

    [00:15:24] Danya: We’re about to do something new and we’re in fear, scarcity, whatever. That state, we tend to take very different actions. which get us very different results versus if we’re in a really empowered state, I’m badass, I’m confident, I got this. I tend to take very different actions or behaviors and they get different results.

    [00:15:40] Danya: So your state is, can dictate the ripple effect of results, but what comes before your state? It’s going to be the thoughts. Now, how many of us have thoughts and repeat, like, Oh, I’m not good enough, or like, I can’t do this, is this even possible? Is this even worth it? Just on loop. Well, where did those thoughts come from?

    [00:15:56] Danya: Right? Like, thoughts and state mirror ourselves very closely. We can think of thought, I have to do this, and it causes pressure in our body. Or, I get to do this, and it causes expansion in our body. Okay? So, words, thoughts, science proves this, have frequency. They’re energetic and their frequency, what I’m thinking, what I’m verbalizing is going to shift and cause my state to shift and change, which guess what actions and results, but then what comes before our thoughts are subconscious, our mind, our identity, our beliefs, our values that was programmed in.

    [00:16:27] Danya: And we can look at even the site of genetics where it’s passed down generationally. All of that right there comes before our results. So most entrepreneurs are just folks on the action, working hard, doing it, and there’s nothing wrong with that. However, When entrepreneurs typically come to me, it’s because they’ve hit a result or a plateau and they’re like, Oh, no matter what I do, how hard I work, I’m still getting the same thing.

    [00:16:47] Danya: Or they’re at this point where there’s like, I can’t possibly work any harder, but I want to scale my business. And so now we look at, okay, most of us are only focused on the last two elements is behavior, actions, and results. And we really need to start unpacking under the hood of like your state, your thoughts and your subconscious mind and getting that on board.

    [00:17:05] Danya: Because once we have this on board, the results are a natural by product. Right. If I’ve got a belief of money comes to me freely and abundantly, or like it comes in easily and I’m not in scarcity and fear, I’m going to get very different results. And not only that your subconscious mind’s job is first and foremost survival to protect you.

    [00:17:22] Danya: So if it goes against anything you believe to be true, deep down inside, your brain’s not even going to show you it. It’s going to, it’s going to try and help protect you from that line, even though it’s not a line anymore. The second thing is your brain’s job is always trying to find evidence to prove you right.

    [00:17:35] Danya: So if we have a belief that rich people are a holes, guess what you’re going to see? Rich people are a holes. If you have a belief that rich people are kind and generous, you’re going to see rich people are kind and generous. Your brain’s job is to literally prove you right and protect you. And so as we’re looking at this kind of conversation, start to understand, like.

    [00:17:53] Danya: What are my beliefs about money? What did I hear growing up? What are potential the programs running on autopilot in the background? I didn’t choose. I learned that are creating the result. I have right here right now. If you’re not sure, look at your results. Look at your bank account. Look at how you feel about money.

    [00:18:07] Danya: Look at your, are you able to be present? When you have downtime or so like a fear of like, Oh, but it’s going to drop and I can’t take time. Like I talked to one entrepreneur and the thought of taking five minutes to herself caused her a massive anxiety and panic attack. We know it’s not going to kill her, but there’s some perception, some belief that’s driving that behavior, which gets the results of now burning out.

    [00:18:30] Danya: So hopefully that kind of impacts of like, it’s not just it, both of them have to work together. Cause you can’t just kumbaya and just do subconscious programming. You have to take action. You can’t just sit here and be like rainbows and butterflies. No, but so many of us, the question I want everyone to start asking yourselves is what’s the intention behind this decision or action.

    [00:18:49] Danya: Is it rooted in fear, scarcity, worry, proving myself, validation, whatever, or is it rooted in alignment, expansion, abundance, et cetera, because whatever energy it’s in is going to come in the result as well. It doesn’t change. It doesn’t like you don’t get all the money. And here’s where I’ll make a caveat to that.

    [00:19:07] Danya: How many of us have gotten the money and they were like, Oh, that’s going to make me feel safe and secure. Right. And in fact, it either makes it the opposite, like, Oh no, I’m going to lose it. Or now it lasted for a second and you’re like, how do I repeat this? How do I do this? And it’s like this next, next, next thing.

    [00:19:22] Danya: There’s a lot of sneaky ways how money, beliefs, and identity can show up. And it first starts at the awareness of checking into your place and ask yourself questions and, or look at your results and based on your results, you can kind of backtrack of what’s the belief of identity that created this result.

    [00:19:37] Danya: And if you want things to be, here’s the thing too, it’s like money doesn’t have to be hard or stressful or like, like laborious at all. It can be easy and fun and enjoyment, not with our current level of programs and beliefs though. So that’s how we’re going to pack that. Did that long answer your question of like, just some stuff there about some neuroscience, but also some understanding of where we can leave the scientists like for a few mindsets.

    [00:20:01] Danya: It’s just what actually creates our results.

    [00:20:03] April: Right. And, you know, a couple of things that you said that was, it was really interesting that actually. reminded me of, uh, of entrepreneurs when they’re just for starting to hit those consistent 10 K months. And you said something, you know, do you believe it’s gonna happen?

    [00:20:17] April: Or are you so stressed out that you’re trying to prove to yourself? And I think that the majority of entrepreneurs why hitting those consistent 10 K months and then you get to 20 and then you get to 30. And I think one of the things that’s so hard about that Is it they are like, I have to do this. Am I going to do it?

    [00:20:36] April: It’s such a it’s not a deep rooted belief that of course this is going to happen. It’s I need to prove it to myself and I need to prove it to everybody else. And I have this big thing I have to prove. I just spent an hour on the phone with a guy yesterday who’s I have to completely monetize my podcast so I can quit my nine to five in 30 days.

    [00:20:55] April: And you know what I mean? I mean, half of me was like, please don’t like bet the mortgage on this. I was really honest. I’m like, okay, dude, let’s kind of like come back down to earth. You know what I mean? But in the same stage too. He had no doubt that he was going to do that and he just needed the strategy behind it to do it, right?

    [00:21:14] April: Yeah, that’s actually very rare. Most people I talk to that are still, you know, that are just trying to they’re like, oh my gosh Well, I have to do this because what if I can’t quit my job here, then they’re they’re deep rooted in fear Um, and in fear of failure and in in that they have to prove to themselves.

    [00:21:29] April: So I just, I, I, I see that all the time. I, I actually don’t very often see the guy I talked to yesterday. He’s like, I’m going to do this. I usually see nine out of 10 people are like, please, like, you know, Hail Mary, can I figure out how to do this? Um, so, but

    [00:21:49] Danya: Can you what you just said too, about what actually happens to our brain when anger and pressure take over.

    [00:21:55] Danya: Yeah.

    [00:21:55] Danya: Cause like. I can’t tell you how many, like, especially like my A type personality is like, look, this is my edge. This is, I need this edge and pressure. Now I understand, like I worked with Olympia athletes and I work with very driven entrepreneurs. I get it. What’s the intention behind that pressure and anger though?

    [00:22:15] Danya: Because if it’s rooted in like, actually this helps me focus and get in flow state, that’s different. But if it’s coming from like anger or fear or stress or anything that’s causing us to go into any sort of, and we know we can, I’m not gonna lie to ourselves, like it causes us to go in any sort of disempowered state or proving state or like scarcity state.

    [00:22:31] Danya: I really want everyone to hear this. When you go into anger and fear, you are literally becoming dumber. I’m just gonna say it. So those two emotions or those two sensations in the body, From a neuroscience perspective is literally shutting down that the access to the parts of your brain that would help you get out of the situation or perform better and see the creativity and solutions and intuition, et cetera, to prepare your legs to get strong or your job to get stronger to run.

    [00:23:00] Danya: So going back to the physiology, we have the same nervous system and subconscious mind as animals. It works incredibly well for animals. What differentiates us is our conscious mind. So, whenever we signal, and let’s just talk about what even this is, anger and fear are an emotionally, uh, emotionally physiological response to a perceived threat.

    [00:23:20] Danya: Perceived threat. Most of us are having perceiving threats of what people are going to think of us. Oh no, the traffic. Someone just cut me off. Or, um, what is, if I have this money, what if I now lose it? And we’re constantly signaling this low level fight or flight response in our body. Now for animals, it works fantastic because it turns on and it turns off right away.

    [00:23:40] Danya: Humans can perpetuate the fight or flight state, which is causing anger and fear in our body, which literally again signals fight or flight, which my legs will become strong. My jaw will become stronger and my parasympathetic system. So I’ve got fight or flight, which is sympathetic. Let’s kick on right away from lion or parasympathetic, which is all about healing, digestion, restoration, um, accessing, seeing possibilities, solutions, et cetera, creativity.

    [00:24:04] Danya: If fight or flights kicked on, which for most entrepreneurs, it’s kicked on all the time, low level. There’s like a thousand tabs in the background. They’re just constantly causing this, like fight or flight state. Great. Well, I know that most entrepreneurs are working well, but just like Olympic athletes, there’s like, we’re looking for the next 1%.

    [00:24:20] Danya: Imagine what it would be like if we could close down the thousands of tabs. That are causing like this, the perceived threat of like something that happened to you when you’re three years old. Now the thought of this email coming through, Oh my gosh, I left a mean comment. Oh my gosh, my bank account dipped a second.

    [00:24:32] Danya: Okay, my revenue dipped to 20%. All of that is signaling fight or flight in the brain, which is causing your legs to become strong and your jaw to become strong to run away from a threat that’s perceived. And you’re tapping it, you’re taking out your resources that actually can help you optimize and be more efficient as a leader, as a CEO, as a visionary.

    [00:24:50] Danya: So, for those of us who are like, but I need that edge and anger, I just want you to imagine every time you have that feeling or sensation or thought, your brain’s thinking there’s a line in front of you. And so your legs can become strong and your jaw becomes strong. But it’s not useful for humans. It’s not designed for a sophisticated world.

    [00:25:06] Danya: So can we get to a state where we can release that so we don’t have looping thoughts on repeat and we don’t have that physiological sensation happening? Yes. And that’s where we go and uncover some stuff of like, what’s causing the signals in my brain to say, there’s a line, run. Otherwise, we’re just not accessing so many resources that are going to help us even operate better, more efficiently, getting out of situations and possibilities that will help us.

    [00:25:31] April: Yeah. That’s a perfect segue into giving our listeners like some steps to implement because every single one of our listeners has been in that state, you know, as much as we would all love to admit it, we’ve, we haven’t been scared or we haven’t been stressed out. That’s a lie. And how do we respond to that?

    [00:25:49] April: And you know, that you’re like, this is what Dan coaches me on. You guys like, about, like, I always like need that edge just ’cause I, that’s my background. That the adventure edge. I love putting myself in dangerous outdoor situations. ,

    [00:26:03] Danya: I know, I feel like when we hang out, it’s gonna be bad. ’cause we’re both like, let’s go, let’s just jump off this thing.

    [00:26:07] Danya: Let’s just do this, let’s jump off this clip. Right?

    [00:26:09] April: Yeah. This, this looks, this looks like an adventure, you know? Yeah. And, and I do. And, and I need that. Mm-hmm. , I need that.

    [00:26:17] Danya: I’d ask you though, like, so some people only have that it gets them in flow state that’s different. Yeah. And this is like totally focused, like fear, like anger state, right?

    [00:26:28] Danya: So if it’s causing a physiological response to my body where I’m feeling stressed or there’s lots of energy and whatever, just recognize your brain is seeing whatever’s in front of you as a lion. And now you’re, you’re literally becoming dumber. Or is it priming me to be? So a flow state where I feel expansive and I feel like let’s go.

    [00:26:44] Danya: It’s different. And only you’re going to know the intention energy behind it. But most people are like, go to the fight or flight anger, like bro state. Like, so it’s, it’s a nuance. I appreciate that, especially with athletes, but here’s the thing, even athletes, you don’t want, like, let’s say you have a boxer.

    [00:26:59] Danya: You don’t want your box to be angry. Cause they know you, what happens when people become angry or, or trigger that the thought can trigger anger. We, JAWS become like more pronounced, you know, like you narrow focus and you can almost predict the moves that they’re going to do because it’s like their brain is just shutting down and focusing on like survival right now.

    [00:27:17] Danya: So even athletes are in combat sports, you want them to be as clear minded and open and calm and not triggering fight or flight. You’ll know if you’re triggering fight or flight based on your physiology, um, because it keeps you open to accessibility of seeing creativity, solutions, intuition, et cetera.

    [00:27:32] Danya: So only you’re going to know April if it’s like, okay, is this like triggering that for me? And, or is it no, it’s actually keeping me in a calm flow state and it’s helping me and only you’re going to know that.

    [00:27:43] April: Yeah. And for me, it’s always flow state. And I mean, it has been since I was a little girl. And, and that’s really a good thing for you to point out because I just assumed that, well, of course it’s going to put everybody else in flow state too.

    [00:27:54] April: Even the people that haven’t experienced it before. This is so funny. Okay. This is a total, this is a total reveal behind the scenes. So little sidebar. So I host these entrepreneur adventure retreats and fun. What we do is the first day is I always take people like up into the mountains and like out of the element and we’re pushing ourselves to some sort of extreme.

    [00:28:15] April: Like nothing is like super dangerous. Um, but it’s usually things that people just don’t do every single day. Right. And honestly, the people that actually joined me on the first adventure day, usually here, especially when we do them in Colorado, they’re so much more successful in their business. Strategy the rest of the weekend.

    [00:28:32] April: But now that you say that, and we do like ice baths and all these things right now that you say that, um, I just assumed everybody would get in flow state. Maybe, I mean, I have these retreats planned for next year and everything too. We’re going to go be doing this really cool outdoor thing. And then business strategy.

    [00:28:48] April: Maybe I should make sure that you’re there. So for that, because I just thought, Hey, this is going to be great. Everybody’s going to tap into flow and it’s going to be awesome. But maybe I’m totally doing people a complete disservice, just assuming everybody’s going to be, well, historically everybody has.

    [00:29:05] April: So. Thank you, God, that everybody’s been okay so far. But now that you say this, I guess just because that is me, this is my experience, it’s always tapping into flow. But you pointing out that that might not be the case for somebody else is like. A lot of people.

    [00:29:22] Danya: Oh shit. Yeah. And I want to, let’s bring this back to, it’s like, it’s never the external situation that causes the feelings or thoughts in our body, but rather how our mind is perceiving and processing data.

    [00:29:36] Danya: And so oftentimes if we’re perceiving a threat, it’s going to cause us to go into that fear or anger response, right? So because look at it, some of us can have lots of money. And have like no fear response and other people can be like, Ooh, lots of fear response. So is it the money that’s causing it? No, it’s my perception based on my own identity, my beliefs, my past experiences that are causing me to have some sort of like blip of data that’s not processed through.

    [00:29:58] Danya: So for you, you’re like, yeah, cool plan. Just paraglide off the mountain. Great. For most people, they’re going to be like, what the F? Like they’re literally sphincter is going to tighten up and they’re going to want to vomit. Because it’s not the external that creates that. It’s my perception of that, that’s actually creating the experience within me.

    [00:30:14] Danya: And that’s, if we’re like, um, well, how do I know what that perception is? Then that’s when we start to uncover and unpack kind of like, there’s probably some past blips or past experiences that your brain still thinks is going on. That hasn’t. Processed through yet. And so can we clear those things?

    [00:30:28] Danya: Absolutely. But everyone has a different perception, but it’s never the actual external thing that’s causing that within us. It’s how our mind is perceiving data and reeling it back through our own identity, beliefs, and experiences that causes the sensation in our body. Make sense?

    [00:30:40] April: And I’ll be sharing you with you, our retreat calendar for next year.

    [00:30:44] April: Uh,

    [00:30:45] Danya: yeah, that’s kind of mine, but what you’re doing as well, though, what you’re doing April as well, is you’re exposing them, right. To like, I know even cold plunging. That can be a very different experience for people. But so for everyone here, let’s get some, some intangible. What happens if I do have a perceived threat?

    [00:31:00] Danya: What happens if I do? I mean, I’m scared of doing something. So use the power of your mind. Your subconscious mind doesn’t know the difference between what’s real or not real example, movie, or let’s say, I’m going to send you a video and you’re watching this video on a Tik TOK or something, and then the spider jumps out of your face, how many of us have thrown the phone or like, right.

    [00:31:16] Danya: Okay. But the spiders in your phone, it’s not coming out. We know that consciously, but our subconscious mind doesn’t know the difference between what’s real and not real. We’ve watched a movie and like, Oh my God, felt heartbreak or felt scared. Okay. So use that to your advantage. There’s two ways you can start kind of edging yourself as your comfort zone.

    [00:31:33] Danya: So for those of you who are thinking of scaling, going on stage, whatever that is, that’s causing that emotional physiological response. Here’s two ways you can hack it. One, prime your mind. So you can spend five minutes tapping into your senses of living the experience as if it’s habit. Get your mind on board.

    [00:31:47] Danya: Create a mind movie. Get your senses involved. Just like the movie you watch, your brain doesn’t know what’s real or not real. So create the experience because if it perceives it as change, it’s going to see it as a threat. So now if you normalize it in your brain over and over again, when you go to do the thing, your brain’s going, Oh, you’ve already done this before.

    [00:32:03] Danya: Okay. So it’s not a threat. It’s not a lion. The second thing you can do is start, start taking small baby action steps towards it because who the heck is going to move towards a lion that’s in front of you that’s trying to kill you? No one. So as I take small actions towards whatever thing is scary or presumed to be a threat, you’re telling your subconscious mind that this must not be a lion because why the heck would I take action towards it?

    [00:32:25] April: Totally. Totally. Um. It, and it also makes me now, now I want you to take our clients through this month, like, like creating that mind movie for them sitting, sitting in there in sales conversations. So I’m like, okay, let’s do, let’s create mind movies of sales conversations.

    [00:32:43] Danya: This worst case scenario too. And this is a thing too. Cause look, you’re, if you have a fear, expose the fear, what am I worried about happening? Well, great. Let’s just experience it because you’re going to recognize you’re not going to die from it. So I remember I had some people go through sales calls and what am I going to say the wrong thing? What if the hand can be great?

    [00:33:00] Danya: Let’s do the worst sales calls possible. Let’s say the stupidest shit possible. But just to show your brain, okay, they hung on to me. It’s not a big deal. But until you uncover the fear and expose it, and then almost like, not saying we have to do it, it’s not exposure therapy, but you’re just showing your brain, there’s, it thinks there’s a lion and it’s not a lion.

    [00:33:16] Danya: So what’s the fear? Can I uncover that fear and go to worst case scenario, even just in my mind, you don’t even have to do it. Like, let’s say I’m speaking on stage and my pants fall down. Okay. Then it’s not saying you’re going to manifest and bring that in. However, what you’re doing is you’re showing your brain.

    [00:33:30] Danya: It’s not a lion. It’s not going to kill me. So yeah, we can do some fun stuff around like, what’s our fear about sales calls? Let’s, let’s just show you it’s not gonna kill you.

    [00:33:39] April: Let’s play it out. That’s awesome. Okay. So as we, as we wrap up, let’s give our listeners like three different action steps that they can do from this show to actually understand where their current state is and how they can go about Changing that because there’s so much education on this podcast.

    [00:33:58] April: You guys please follow Dania. Um, she’s just absolutely incredible. As I know, you know, cause you’re still here listening to this, but let’s they’re like tuned out. This guy’s crazy. Like, Oh my gosh. Um, let’s break it down into some simple action steps that somebody can do right now as they are turning this podcast off and they’re going that they want to create some change.

    [00:34:21] Danya: Beautiful. Okay. So first step is awareness. So what I want everyone to do is just to have the awareness of like, what are our current external results? What is that your bank account, your environment, what you have and stuff. And now I want you to ask the question of like, what potentially is the belief or identity that’s created this result?

    [00:34:37] Danya: Knowing it all comes back to that. So if I can start to say, okay, where am I currently at right now? And what paradigm has been created from my own internal blaze? That’s going to give me awareness of where I am. Then I want everyone to look at their, where they’re going, where they want their desires. And I want you to ask yourself, what would the version of me be?

    [00:34:56] Danya: What would I believe about money? What’s possible business, et cetera. If I already had that, because if we don’t know where we’re at and we don’t know where we’re going, this is a common saying of what got us here, won’t get us there. So our current beliefs are kind of any goddess exactly where you’re sitting with right now.

    [00:35:09] Danya: Beautiful. If we want different, we have to go within and create shifts and changes within ourselves. So awareness of where we’re at and look at the, um, where you want to go. And so asking yourself, what would I have to believe to be true about that? Right. What’s the identity of me? Who has that? Start to unpack that because even a shift of like, Oh, well, I wouldn’t think money’s evil if I want a butt ton of money.

    [00:35:27] Danya: Like I think money’s abundant, whatever. You can start to have the awareness and that can already start to shift things to something that’s going to be really helpful. Everyone here is before they take an action or do a decision, ask yourself what’s the intention behind that action or decision. Is it rooted in scarcity, fear, worry, proving myself, validation, knowing where that’s going to get us, or is it rooted in groundedness, present abundance, whatever your intention.

    [00:35:47] Danya: If you can just seriously before even making a business deal or having a conversation with your mom or whatever it is, ask yourself, what’s the intention behind what I’m about to do that pause and the interrupt and the pattern can already create a shift of like, well, hold on, I don’t need me. Maybe you need to do this, or maybe I can do this differently.

    [00:36:04] Danya: Or I’m looking at it from a different perspective. If we can’t uncover what we’re not aware of, we can’t start changing it. The third thing is practicing that mind movie. So look, if we’re going, you’ve maybe exposed where you want to go, but now there’s some fear, there’s some physiological in your body.

    [00:36:19] Danya: Okay. So I want you to say, well, what’s the worst thing that could happen and just take yourself down that scenario. It’s not going to say it’s going to happen, but until we expose the fear or the resistance on our way to our desires, guess what’s always going to show up until we clear it. The fear and resistance.

    [00:36:33] Danya: So on your own, you can start to ask yourself, okay, well, let’s say I have a belief about money and, um, a prompt you can use is in order to make more money, I have to just fill in the blank, sacrifice more time, uh, travel a lot. I’ve got to hire a bunch of people on my team, whatever it is. Start to take some time unpacking the fears and beliefs that are currently driving your decisions and watch what changes you start shifting your perceptions on them.

    [00:36:57] Danya: Do you want us to go over a couple of like, um, uncovering the resistance questions really quick?

    [00:37:01] April: Yeah, that would be great. Yeah. Let’s wrap it up with that.

    [00:37:04] Danya: Okay. So let’s, because we’re talking about money, um, ask yourself this question a couple of times. I believe you’ve done this before. So there’s general beliefs like money is fill in the blank.

    [00:37:12] Danya: Money is what is money to you? Scarce, abundant, a tool, resource, hard to come by. Notice where your current beliefs are and just to remind everyone to you didn’t choose these you’ve learned them, which means you can unlearn them neuroplasticity shows us that as neurons fire together, they wire together so you can shift them, but we can’t shift.

    [00:37:29] Danya: We don’t know. I want everyone to ask themselves, what is it going to cost me to get to my desires? Notice what comes up there. Is it time? Is it money? A sacrifice? Is it nothing? Or what might be the consequence of getting my desires? And you’re like, there’s no consequence. Look, if we don’t have them yet, there’s some part of your brain protecting you from receiving it.

    [00:37:49] Danya: So let’s uncover what’s the fear. What’s it going to cost us? What’s the consequence of getting it? And then as you start to uncover these, ask yourself, is this useful? Is this belief, is this way of being useful? And do I know anyone else? If myself is from past evidence or someone in my circle or someone who I’m looking up to as a mentor that doesn’t believe this to be true, start just unpacking it.

    [00:38:10] Danya: Um, another easy one to ask yourself is being rich means what, or rich people are what very simple kind of prompts to start uncovering the subconscious because your subconscious has to answer the questions that you give to it. So just to getting a thermostat of where your current programs are around money, what’s possible, et cetera.

    [00:38:30] Danya: Now look at your current environment and say, okay. Does this even ring true? Like my current results is these, can I see how these beliefs are actually driving these decisions and creating these results? Great. If I want different, we got to do something different within first to create different without.

    [00:38:44] Danya: I want to keep like asking a thousand questions, but I know we’re like kind of kept on time.

    [00:38:48] April: Yeah, we have to wrap it. Um, but, and I want you like, I’m just sitting here absorbing. And every time you do this, I always re ask myself these questions. And, and I, and I do think, I mean, even if you’re listening here and you feel like this is something that you have mastered and, and that you’ve already been through, like we can always keep breaking through, we can always keep noticing and understanding ourselves and, and rewiring our neuropathways and all of these different things.

    [00:39:15] April: And so, and to, to those next levels. And the thing that is so. Important about this is, is where we started out in understanding that all the strategy in the world is not going to help you if you don’t believe that you deserve to be there or you can be there or it’s, you know, that you, you have this ability to be there.

    [00:39:37] April: If you have to prove it to yourself or somebody else, you’re already starting, uh, with a disadvantage and it’s, And it’s really, really difficult in, in the, there’s no joy in that journey. I just got to say it there. There’s just no joy in the journey. And most people are entrepreneurs to, to have joy, not that there is no end result to entrepreneurship. Let’s just like, let me say that again. There is no end. It’s the journey.

    [00:40:02] Danya: And so the experience of the journey, right? It’s like we can, we’re on the journey, but what’s our experience of the journey and recognizing that we get to determine that. So how many of us are building a business, but we’re miserable as fuck.

    [00:40:13] Danya: Or like we’re stressed out. We’re not even enjoying what we’re doing. We feel like we’re building traps. Like, well, hold on a second. Your business is a game and you’re the game. Like you, you create the game and you create the rules. So am I enjoying this journey? Am I, am I experiencing the journey I want to experience?

    [00:40:25] Danya: Like most of us create, came here to create lives of fulfillment, abundant and choices and autonomy and impact. How many of us are actually experiencing that though, right? Like, so it is a journey. I love how you said that because there’s no destination. Look, you hit a goal. What happens next? Next goal. Are you enjoying this?

    [00:40:42] Danya: Is your experience of this journey, something that’s fulfilling you and like feeling like present and you can enjoy moments of it, lots of moments of it, or is it stressful, chaotic pressure trap feeling we can shift that or we perceive it. So great end point.

    [00:40:55] April: Awesome. Okay. Well, if people want to find you, where should they connect with you?

    [00:41:01] Danya: I’m most active on Instagram. So my name, Danya, D A N Y A Douglas Hunt, and in there too, you can find a bunch of free resources. I think we’re going to link up for everyone here, the Morning Mindset Prime. So in that really quick, um, audio is you’re going to understand the neuroscience behind how to shift your state and why it’s valuable for you to create the life of your dreams.

    [00:41:21] Danya: Again, we talk about results in the beginning, what actually creates our results, will we get our mind and body on board? Your pathway to the action strategy is a lot less resistance than having your subconscious mind come up and try and protect you from change, AKA your goals. So that would be the most valuable thing for people here to do.

    [00:41:37] Danya: You start shifting your state in your mind now and just watch how things around you become a lot easier and more effective as you shift your mind and body to align with your subconscious desires.

    [00:41:45] April: Awesome. Well, we really appreciate you being part of our team and in our community and pouring into me and all of our clients and, and just the work that you’re doing and the science backed work that you’re doing, um, is, is what differentiates you from, from a lot in mindset coaches.

    [00:42:01] April: So I appreciate you so much. Thank you so much for being on the show. I can’t wait for this. and I will actually see you this week and in our community. I’m really excited.

    [00:42:16] Danya: Me too. Me too. Thank you so much for having me. Bye.


    How To Run LinkedIn Ads for Coaches and Consultants with April Beach and AJ Wilcox (Episode 308)

    How To Run LinkedIn Ads for Coaches and Consultants



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”)
    Have you been tempted to run LinkedIn Ads but don’t know where to start, what type of ads are available and if you have the budget to run them successfully? In this episode our friend AJ Wilcox is back on the show again, updating us on the latest changes to LinkedIn Ads and how you can make the most of them. We’ll dive into tactics, steps, and even how to plan your budget. You’ll know the latest cost per lead and so much more.  If you run a consulting business and you want to use LinkedIn to grow your reach and increase your sales, this show is a great one. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Understand the types of Ads available
    2. Understand which Ad type is best for you 
    3. Know what your budget needs to be and what you can expect from a solid Ads campaign
    4. Have simple steps to start using your LinkedIn Ads account effectively
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:44] April: Hi, you guys. I am absolutely delighted to bring. One of my friends, I want to call this guy my very good friend because I feel like every time I connect with him, we have such a great connection and such a great friendship.

    [00:00:57] April: But the truth is we’ve actually never really hung out in person, although I would love that. You know, this person that we’re going to bring back on the show today. is a LinkedIn ads expert. And if you’re thinking about LinkedIn, if you’re tired of Instagram ads and Facebook ads and you’re becoming more active on LinkedIn, as especially we’ve been going through this entire series on the podcast on how to build your business and generate leads through LinkedIn.

    [00:01:21] April: Well the next natural question we’re going to ask is what about ads? So if you’re thinking about running LinkedIn ads and you’re not sure how much they cost, you’re not sure what type of ads are available, you’re just not even sure how to get started. LinkedIn doesn’t make ads as easy as Facebook, like just click a button and boost this post.

    [00:01:42] April: And there is good reason for that. Because historically LinkedIn ads have been really pricey. However, because you’re listening here to the SeetLife Entrepreneur podcast and your products, meaning your programs that you’re building are highly valuable, then you are a candidate to run LinkedIn ads as long as the, we’re going to get into all the numbers, but as long as your product and your program has a minimum lifetime client value.

    [00:02:10] April: So we’re going to break out the numbers of what your minimum ad spread should be, what Your minimum product price should be how to expect that and estimate that within the lifetime value. And then our guest today is actually going to take you through the step by steps on actually how to set up your LinkedIn ads account.

    [00:02:26] April: So AJ Wilcox is back here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. He’s been on the podcast before. And every time I get feedback and messages about how helpful his Interview here. His show was, so AJ is a LinkedIn Ads Pro who founded B2 linked.com, which is the LinkedIn ads agency in 2014. He’s managed over $150 million in ad spend on the platform.

    [00:02:54] April: They’re officially LinkedIn partners. I remember when that happened, which was so cool for them. And he’s the host of the LinkedIn ads show. podcast. He’s managed five of the world’s top 10 LinkedIn ads accounts. So five of the 10 ads accounts in the world on LinkedIn have been managed by AJ and he’s a ginger and a triathlete and he lives in Utah with his beautiful wife and his.

    [00:03:21] April: Five adorable kids and his company car is a wicked fast go kart. You guys are going to love this guy. And I swear every time I talk to AJ, he’s on a treadmill and he, the man literally inspires me to be better at moving and working. So let’s see here. Who’s this podcast for? If you are looking at a place to generate leads and you have an ad spend and you want to be strategic about running ads and you’re considering running ads at the end of this episode, you are going to know the top type of ads you can run, the minimum ad spend, and how to get your ads accounts.

    [00:03:56] April: Set up. Also, AJ has a ton of free resources his b2linked.com, where you can go through a totally free checklist on how to set up your ads count. So without further ado, here is my friend AJ Wilcox. All of the show notes and links are found sweetlifeco.com. Just click on the podcast, and this is episode number 3 0 8. All right, let’s go. All right.

    [00:04:22] April: Hey, everybody. Welcome back to the podcast. My friend, AJ Wilcox is here again in the flesh. Well, the vertical or virtual flesh here, and we’re going to dive into all things LinkedIn ads. We recorded this show years ago, and then here’s a little secret. We actually recorded it again, like 10 months ago, and And I didn’t fit it into our content calendar.

    [00:04:43] April: So AJ is such a good friend. He agreed to come back. So you guys are getting absolutely the most up to date information on how to use LinkedIn for ad strategy. So welcome back to the SuiteLife entrepreneur family of guest experts.

    [00:04:58] AJ: Oh, yeah, so excited to be here again. Thanks so much, April. And for the record, my virtual body is very fit. It’s very skinny. It’s very strong. So don’t pay too much attention to what you see on the camera. It was my virtual body is awesome. My virtual flesh.

    [00:05:15] April: I love it. I love it. Uh, we do have, this is in video now, so people can watch like behind the scenes on YouTube, which is so cool. And of course our traditional audio broadcast here.

    [00:05:26] April: So let’s dive into all things running LinkedIn ads, including who are they good for, what type of LinkedIn ads people can run, and what is a budget that That somebody actually needs to be able to come to the table is to even make this worthwhile.

    [00:05:44] AJ: Perfect. All right. So lots of little pieces here. Feel free to steer me back on the right direction, but starting with who LinkedIn ads are good for. Um, just so you understand about the LinkedIn ads platform, we have the best targeting on the planet for reaching business professionals. So usually that’s going to be in business to business, but there are business to consumer applications that we can talk about, but the reason why it’s so good. Is because we can target people.

    [00:06:09] AJ: I mean, it’s really the targeting. This is why people come to LinkedIn and are willing to pay a premium to advertise there. We can target by job title and department and seniority. We can target by company name, uh, by company size industry, all of that. And, and it’s absolutely incredible. But like I mentioned, we pay a premium to be here.

    [00:06:29] AJ: The average cost per click, if you’re targeting anyone in North America is like 10 to 16 right now. So yeah, that’s 10 to 16 per click, not per lead, not per conversion, not per sale.

    [00:06:42] April: Yeah, that, and that’s what let’s make really, really clear. I remember years ago when we were recording this, it was like 25. And I don’t remember if that was cost per click or cost per conversion back then. Well, that was like three, four years ago when we first started talking together. So about 10 to 16 bucks to even get somebody to click on your ad. Okay. Wowzer. Now, what are we looking at for an average actual conversion or a lead?

    [00:07:10] AJ: Well, this one’s actually really hard to, to express because what we found, you know, for B2B, uh, I would say probably 10 years ago, used to be very like, Hey, let’s take cold traffic. Let’s show them some kind of a, an offer, some kind of a lead magnet, and then sales will follow up once we’ve collected their, their info.

    [00:07:29] AJ: And over the last several years. That strategy doesn’t seem to work anymore. Uh, marketing teams will take a look at these leads that come in that are cold and, uh, they’ll call it an MQL or a marketing qualified lead, but they find that there is a 1 percent conversion rate from MQL. To SQL, which is sales qualified lead.

    [00:07:49] AJ: And this all comes down to the fact that a cold prospect, they’re not going to respond to someone that they don’t already know, like, and trust. So yes, if you want to show like a lead magnet to a cold audience, you can probably get a cost per lead down to like 75, but. If you have a whole bunch of these leads and sales cannot get them to respond on email, they will not hop, you know, agree to a meeting.

    [00:08:12] AJ: Or if they do agree to a meeting, they don’t show half the time. It’s not the best way to conduct business. So we’ve shifted our whole strategy to where now we are very much like, let’s be helpful. Let’s brand ourselves. Let’s get people to know, like, and trust us first before we start asking them to fill out a form.

    [00:08:30] AJ: And if you do all that, right. Yeah. You’re, you’re going to pay for the same person. 10 to 16 a click to interact multiple times, but by the time you get the lead, they’re going to be on the phone saying, where do I sign, which is so much better than a cold lead who is saying, okay, who are you? Why are you any better than your competitors? Who are your competitors? Just. Totally different conversations.

    [00:08:52] April: Okay. So that, that’s just across the board in marketing for any of you guys that are listening. I mean, we used to run, it doesn’t even matter, just LinkedIn or wherever, just the practices it, what you just said, summarizes the changes in online marketing that we have seen over the last.

    [00:09:09] April: Frankly, five, six, seven, eight years, right? That that know, like, and trust factor is so much more important. And it’s fascinating how people are really honing in on that because they can’t afford not to on LinkedIn. They might be able to run like crappy ads with terrible leads that are disqualified on other platforms.

    [00:09:25] April: But on LinkedIn, when you’re paying that much, you are not going to literally take a lighter to, you know, 100 bill per lead that you’re paying. Yeah. Probably according to what that data shows, isn’t even going to show up. What a waste of money. And so what I’m hearing you say is there’s so much more that needs to go into that relationship building on LinkedIn for brands and individuals.

    [00:09:49] April: Like let’s kind of talk about. Let me kind of take us there. Next. I’m thinking of the questions our audience has, is, has, is, has, while you and I are chatting, is it better to run ads from a business page or a personal profile?

    [00:10:06] AJ: Ooh, I love this question. Okay. So if you would have asked me. Three months ago, um, that’s the exact question. I would have said, Oh, well on LinkedIn, we can only run ads from a company page. Um, you can’t run from a personal account, but what we got on June 20th, this year in 2023, uh, we got access to where we can now boost personal posts. And they call these thought leader ads, and I’m so excited about it because, you know, I’m sure that the crux of the question here is that when you’re representing a company, no one will interact with the ads.

    [00:10:39] AJ: They won’t like them or comment on them because there’s no reason to interact with the company’s ads. There’s no human face on the other side of that when you show ads from a person. All of a sudden there’s reason to interact. And every time you get an interaction, it brings costs down overall. So this is a less expensive platform to advertise on when you’re using these.

    [00:11:00] April: Okay. That makes me so excited. And now I’m really excited. We re recorded this updated version because personally for me. That would be exactly the strategy that I would want to know more about. So, now, even with these thought leader ads, though, it’s still, we’re still looking at 10 a click up to, you know, 75, 100 per conversion. Or are we looking for the same, the same pricing on these thought leader boosted posts?

    [00:11:25] AJ: Yeah, it depends on how they perform. But if you had like from a company page, it’s really often that your ads will get a click through rate. That’s a little less than half of a percent. And that 10 to 16 a click is kind of based off of like, if you’re just performing average, um, these thought leader ads, it’s a lot easier to get high performance, higher click through rates.

    [00:11:46] AJ: And so what we see is like. If you have a thought leader ad that’s getting a click through rate of let’s say, um, three quarters, three quarters of a percent, or maybe 1%, all of a sudden now your cost per click drops and you might be paying more like seven to 9 per click. So it does, it, it becomes increasingly more efficient.

    [00:12:07] AJ: The, the higher the engagement rate, your ads get.

    [00:12:10] April: Okay, cool. And then Nick’s question is, are these just conversation starter posts or do these posts actually have a call to action? Are we trying to get, I mean, obviously if you’re going to pay, you know, 10 for a click, we want to, we want to generate a lead with that, but do people run thought leader ads literally just to establish themselves as a thought leader? So there’s more visibility in that, or are they all? You know, being really mindful of collecting a lead with each one of those ads.

    [00:12:41] AJ: They are pretty limited in how you can collect a lead. So I see this very much as being like maybe the first or the second step in the funnel where you are getting someone to notice you.

    [00:12:52] AJ: And it’s more like now they’re starting to like you, uh, before they kind of come to trust you. So we’re a little bit limited. Like I said, you can’t attach a lead gen form to it. Um, it can be a single image. Ad or text only, or now video. They just gave us a video a couple of weeks ago. So if you imagine if you personally, if you go and post something on LinkedIn, that’s either a video or text only, or with an image, you could then boost that post through the ads platform.

    [00:13:21] AJ: But that means that if you’re trying to get someone to convert. That post has to link to something. And usually if a post links to something, it’s not going to get great engagement. And so you might end up having to pay more for that. So I do see it as being very much like, let’s get you introduced to the brand before we’re sending someone to us.

    [00:13:40] April: Yeah. So, so good. All right. Let’s kind of go back to some basics. Cause I could get in the weeds about all of that. What are the types of ads right now that are available to be run? I know last time there was like sidebar ads and now we have this thought leader ad. What are the general types of LinkedIn ads that a company can run?

    [00:14:01] AJ: Yes. So the first option is the, the newsfeed. And that’s where I suggest everyone starts inside the newsfeed. You can do single image. Um, you can do video ads. Those are kind of my top two, but then you can also do carousels where someone can like scroll through, um, multiple pictures. You can do document ads, which are like a document post where someone could put a PDF or slides of a presentation.

    [00:14:25] AJ: Um, like a PowerPoint that someone can also scroll through. So lots of different variations, but for simplicity’s sake, I would say start with either a single image because it’s easy to create or video because it’s so good at making an emotional connection.

    [00:14:38] April: Okay, cool. And link, I mean, videos are doing really well on LinkedIn and we’re seeing that we’re seeing that traction. So that makes perfect sense. Okay. So in addition to the feed. And I know that the feed ads are the ones you can really target, we can really curate, right?

    [00:14:57] AJ: Yeah, and all of them get to use the same targeting, but they all have downsides to them that are pretty significant. Um, the next two ad formats are over in the right rail, but they’re only on desktop.

    [00:15:10] AJ: So it’s like, They’re definitely ads when you see them, and because they definitely look like ads, they don’t look organic. Uh, they have really, really low click through rates, but they also cost less, which is kind of interesting. Um, one of those is called text ads. It was the original ad format that LinkedIn came out with in 2008.

    [00:15:28] AJ: Um, it has a click through rate that is so, so low. The average is like two and a half clicks out of every 10, 000 times they’re shown. So. What I like about these, they cost next to nothing. Um, so they’re so good at like getting your brand out there. If every time someone loads the page, there’s this little thumbnail image of your brand.

    [00:15:48] AJ: It helps your other ads. So I do like those quite a bit, but the other one’s called dynamic ads. And it has a. It grabs your picture. So if you’ve ever been surfing around and you see LinkedIn took your picture and put it in an ad, that’s a dynamic ad.

    [00:16:02] April: I always laugh because they always tell me April here, here’s the job you’ve been seeking for. And I’m like, wait, what? I, I own, I’m not seeking for a job. So clearly I have my settings wrong somewhere. I’m like, well, I don’t need to apply for it was either Europe, whatever we see you working at, you know, some company that I would never work for. Right. Okay. Fascinating. All right. So we have the feed ads, we have the kind of old school text sidebar ads, and then we have dynamic ads.

    [00:16:28] April: So let’s kind of go to, first of all, some basics. What is an initial value? And you might not be able to answer that. And I don’t want to. Forced you to answer something that we’d actually don’t have a clear answer on, but is there, is there a minimum value of a product that you recommend a company have or a minimum cost per client or value, um, that you would recommend for any company who is like, you’re going to generate a minimum 5, 000 bucks or 10, 000 bucks per buyer, um, on with ads, like this minimum product price.

    [00:17:04] AJ: Yeah. Yeah, I would say LinkedIn ads make a lot of sense when the lifetime value of your product or service is 10, 000 or more. We found, I mean, just like reason through it, if we have to pay 10 to 16 per click and people have to click several times before they, they make a purchase and lots of other people are clicking who will never be a customer.

    [00:17:27] AJ: When you kind of add that math together, you really do need a pretty high lifetime value for it to make sense. But once you dial it in, I mean, that’s the beauty of an ad platform is once you dial it in and you find a pathway to success, then you can just scale it. It’s you turn a knob up and you go.

    [00:17:41] April: And about how long is it taking? I remember in the past, it would take LinkedIn about 30 days to actually learn an ad. Is it? Is it still that same length of time to actually start getting traction and for LinkedIn to actually, you know, learn and become more intuitive or is that different now?

    [00:17:59] AJ: When with LinkedIn getting to know your ads, when you very first launch, they usually figure out how much they like the ad and how much they’re willing to show it within the first day and a half.

    [00:18:08] AJ: So we call that the learning period. But then of course us as marketers, if you’re making changes every single day and the platform is like, I don’t know what change they’re going to make next. And this one. Really messed things up. Um, we tend to tell people like try to go at least a week or two weeks in between changes just so LinkedIn can kind of get its footing and go, Oh, okay, this is where they fit. And this is the kind of attention I can give them.

    [00:18:34] April: Okay. And is there a minimum? Account buy in like you have to deposit a minimum of 10 K into an ad account or is it? How is their billing actually work, you facebook and other ads you hit a certain threshold and then you get billed Does linkedin require a minimum investment into ads or a minimum period of time?

    [00:18:56] AJ: They used to they they used to make you put at least five dollars into it to create an ad account Thank goodness that’s gone away in the last several years. Um Now anyone can go and start up an account, even if you never plan on running an ad. So I would say, even if you never want to run a LinkedIn ad, go create an ad account.

    [00:19:13] AJ: It’s totally free. You don’t have to put any money into it. Uh, very similar to Facebook. Once you show ads a certain amount, that’s when they bill your credit card. I think. Facebook is billing me like every 500 right now. LinkedIn’s I think every 200 so somewhat similar. You can run an ad on LinkedIn as long as you’re willing to budget at least 10 per day and which to some might seem high, but that’s kind of the baseline to get started.

    [00:19:40] April: And that isn’t high, right? Especially if our products are valued at minimum 10 K and up from there. And so as I was going back through our notes from the last time, Uh, I, I remembered you’ll hear my, my dog sparking cause that’s what they do. Um, I remembered there was in this process and I would love for you to take our listeners through the process of just getting into the ads account.

    [00:20:02] April: I think many of our listeners haven’t even set up an ads account yet. They don’t even know where to go. And there’s a code in there. I remember you saying it from last time. And I was actually looking for it because shame on me. I actually never did this after the last time we talked about it. There’s.

    [00:20:17] April: Some darn code I need to put into something. And I’m remembering AJ said to do this years ago. I mean, this was years ago, man, I’m terrible student and I didn’t do any of it. And so I want to make sure that you’re going through that again with our listeners, how to get into the ads account, how to set it up in whatever this tracking pieces that you’re, you can explain so much better than me.

    [00:20:39] AJ: Okay. Don’t worry, April. This is a no judgment, no shame zone. We’re all good here. Here’s what you do. Just go to linkedin. com forward slash ads. That’s the fastest way that I’ve found to get in. Once you get there, there will be some button there that says something like create an ad or set up an account.

    [00:20:56] AJ: They’ve changed it recently. And so once you do that, the account is just, it’s set up. You have to be logged into LinkedIn to do this. And so they’re like, Oh, okay, here’s the account set up for you. And. It’ll ask you three questions. What kind of currency you’re using that can’t be changed. So if, if you’re in Canada, like choose Canadian dollars and realize like that’s never going to change or us, us dollars all pretty self explanatory.

    [00:21:20] AJ: You also claim your company page and you do need a company page to advertise on LinkedIn. So if you don’t have that, go set that up. It’s really straightforward to do. And the third thing is the account name that can change. So you can call it whatever you want. You can call it April beach right now and then go ahead and change it to your company name later or whatever.

    [00:21:37] AJ: So now you have this account. One of the best things that just like you’ve alluded to April, one of the best things that you can do once you have an account is you can go and install what LinkedIn calls the insight tag. Over in the left, uh, the left hand bar, the left hand navigation, there’ll be one of the options as you go through, uh, will be the insight tag.

    [00:21:58] AJ: It’s a little snippet of JavaScript code. They want you to install on every page of your website. What it does is every time someone comes to the website, to your website, LinkedIn gets to see like, hey, is this a LinkedIn member or not? And if it is a LinkedIn member, they Keep track on the back end and start giving you this reporting.

    [00:22:20] AJ: LinkedIn calls this their LinkedIn website demographics. I think they should have called it LinkedIn analytics personally, but what it does is again, you don’t have to spend a dime on ads in order to get this feature. You can log into your LinkedIn account. Click this button. That’s called website demographics.

    [00:22:37] AJ: And it will show you what the professional makeup of your website traffic is totally for free. It’ll show you like, where is the traffic on my website coming from in the world? Uh, what job titles do they tend to have? What companies do they represent? It might show you like your top 15 companies that have visited your website. Um, lots of cool demographic data that you just can’t get anywhere else.

    [00:23:02] April: That blows my mind. Okay. So no wonder why subconsciously I was saying April, you have to do this. And yet I have had to do that. So I will get up off of this and do it right away. So we can get those insights now when it’s time to run ads.

    [00:23:16] April: Can they retarget those people? Do they allow us to do any retargeting like the Facebook pixel of people who have come before? Cause I know there’s been so much security and privacy around that. So how does LinkedIn you do that?

    [00:23:31] AJ: Okay. So that was an expert level question. I’m so glad you asked now that this insight tag is on your website. The other thing, or there’s actually three things that LinkedIn can do with it. But the first we covered is website demographics, the free reporting. The second is your retargeting, just like you mentioned. So you have to go and set this up now because If you haven’t set it up, LinkedIn is not going to remember what happened in the past.

    [00:23:54] AJ: So go set up right now. What you do is you set up a retargeting audience, uh, it’s, it’s under plan and audiences, and then you, you click, I want to create a new audience of my website traffic and you basically just, your first audience is going to be anyone who lands on any page of my website, go, and it’s going to start tracking them.

    [00:24:13] AJ: Once that audience has over 300 people built up, LinkedIn’s going to say, okay, This is now eligible to be used in ads and you can start retargeting your website traffic.

    [00:24:23] April: Wowzer. Okay. I am, I feel so cool that I asked an expert level question. All right. So this is, I mean, already, I mean, we’re already at 20 minutes and I, and I knew that there was a thousand things that I personally wanted to know in this. So kind of let, let’s recap where we’ve come so far. Uh, we talked about updates and LinkedIn ads. We’ve talked about a minimum ad spend. We’ve talked about the fact that you need to have a lifetime value of a client of at least 10 K. We talked about the importance of.

    [00:24:55] April: Building the relationship with the audience before ever running LinkedIn ads, which is frankly just a best practice anywhere if you’re asking me, um, but totally makes sense. I know a lot of companies come with a big, huge ad spend and that’s how they launch and that’s fine. But for our listeners who are subject matter experts, Facebook.

    [00:25:24] April: Besides Instagram, where they can reach qualified buyers that want to really invest in being better at whatever it is that they teach. And so having a minimum product of 10 K usually isn’t a problem. As long as they’re very good at what they do. You know, having a, having a 10 K offer is kind of like now to a day is, is that base point really standardized investment to work with any expert and.

    [00:25:52] April: We talked about LinkedIn ads count, which we’ll come back to that in a second. But my question for you, as I’m remembering and unpacking what we’ve gone through, do you see very many consultants or coaches actually running successful ads on LinkedIn? Are they still brands products in, in larger, what we would consider actual smaller businesses, which could have a hundred employees, you know? So.

    [00:26:19] AJ: Yeah, I do think the majority of advertisers right now Our bigger companies, because they’re the ones that LinkedIn has targeted specifically like, Ooh, if you’re over a certain number of employees, chances are you have enough budget for LinkedIn. So let’s target you. So I think more of the solopreneurs and, and the smaller companies haven’t been targeted as much.

    [00:26:39] AJ: They may not know about it yet. It doesn’t mean that they aren’t ripe for it. Uh, just. They’re probably not the majority of those advertising right now. So I think what that means is there’s big opportunity for those who are going to say, okay, I know it’s an investment, but I’m going to make it because there’s not much competition out there of people.

    [00:26:58] April: Like that’s kind of what I’m getting at. Because in the past on other social media platforms, ads of consultants and subject matter experts have become so oversaturated that they aren’t even showing them anymore. So for those consultants and, and experts and coaches that have programs where the life, I mean, and we’re talking about one product value being 10 K, many of our clients, the lifetime value of some of their.

    [00:27:22] April: Clients are well over a hundred thousand after they work through them, especially those of our clients that are licensing their courses to other companies. Those contracts are 1. 1 million plus. And so this seems like a really great investment for the right people. So they’re established businesses are good at what they do.

    [00:27:40] April: They have great products. The minimum client value is 10 K. And of course, the last one is, is you have cash to spend in and actually invest for thinking, invest as far as putting it out there for that ROI. And so I learned so much about that. And then let’s kind of in your, do I, does that sound right? As I’m recapping that.

    [00:27:59] April: That makes sense. This is good information. Totally. So I want to make sure I’m not leading anybody astray because based on what you said, I mean, that fits where our company is and that would totally make sense. And of course I bring guests on here of things that I want to know personally about too. So it works really well.

    [00:28:16] April: And then, and then we go into the ads account. And again, um, that is called an insight tag. What was, what was the exact name of that again?

    [00:28:28] AJ: Yep. The insight tag you install it. It’s a little piece of JavaScript code and pretty much every ad platform you use has one of these. So every ad platform you use, it’s going to be the same process.

    [00:28:38] AJ: Take this little snippet of JavaScript, put it in your pages code. No one ever sees it except for the web.

    [00:28:43] April: Yeah, that’s absolutely. Absolutely. Fantastic. Okay. Awesome. AJ. And as we wrap up, I know you usually work with, you know, midsize companies, well established businesses that have huge, huge revenues, but how, how can our clients connect with you?

    [00:28:58] April: What is the best place for our clients to follow you, uh, our followers to follow you? To learn from you and to kind of take these little breadcrumbs at all of your big, huge clients, let fall on the floor. We’ll just eat them up and learn along the way. Like follow along AJ.

    [00:29:18] AJ: Feel free to come mooch for real. Uh, if you follow me on LinkedIn, I share almost daily, some tips, some strategy. Something that’s going to help you with your LinkedIn ads. We’ve got three awesome ways that we can help advertisers. Uh, the first is if you just want to do it yourself, if you go to our website, be two linked. com slash checklist, we published, and I don’t know how many pages, but let’s say it’s like a 14 page guide to walk you through exactly.

    [00:29:43] AJ: How do I get started advertising on LinkedIn? If you can do it all on your own, great. It’s totally free. It’s ungated like go get that guide. Um, the other thing is if you want to keep doing it yourself, but you want help, you want. Uh, someone to kind of do it with you or consult with you. We have a low cost community called the LinkedIn ads fanatics community.

    [00:30:03] AJ: That’s fanatics. b2linked. com. And it’s like 79 a month gets you access to our four courses that take you all the way from like beginner to expert. Plus gives you access to the community where other like minded LinkedIn ads experts are all bouncing ideas and and sharing and of course the third way is the done for you like which is like It’s the bread and butter of what we do as an agency.

    [00:30:26] AJ: Uh, but if you’re ever curious, belinked.Com and there’s pretty obvious buttons there on where to click to, to fill out the form and get in touch.

    [00:30:33] April: You are, um, a wealth of knowledge and you’re always so generous with how much you give and how much that you personally have helped me over the years.

    [00:30:41] April: And I just can’t tell you how much I appreciate your friendship and your wisdom and, and always being willing to come in here on the show. How can we thank you? How, besides finding you and going to those links, we’ll make sure they’re in all the show notes. Um, you know, is there a way that our listeners can come back and pour into you so it’s not just one sided and connect with you, uh, and, and actually elevate your voice more? What could we do for you?

    [00:31:07] AJ: Well, I love that offer April. Thanks so much. And first of all, I have to say a huge thanks to you for sharing so much and helping all of us like small entrepreneurs figure stuff out. You’ve been an incredible inspiration to me personally. For giving back. I mean, I, I just, I love to hear your stories.

    [00:31:26] AJ: So if you go out and test LinkedIn ads and you message me on LinkedIn, cause that’s free to do. Um, let me know about like what, what you’re facing and what you’re doing, what successes you’ve had. I love that stuff. And I’m also the host of the LinkedIn ad show podcast. And so if you’ve got stories that I can help share, I, I, You know, I’ll, I’ll take those clips and put you on the air and stuff. So I think that’s probably the best way I could get feedback from you.

    [00:31:48] April: Awesome. All right. We will do it. I’ll make sure all those resources are in there. Thanks for jumping back in with me, re recording this with the most updated version and always being who you are. We really appreciate you, AJ.

    [00:32:00] AJ: Oh, you know, April, I’ll have you back anytime.


    LinkedIn Etiquette: Build a Brand that Resonates and Converts with April Beach and Salina Yeung(Episode 307)

    LinkedIn Etiquette: Build a Brand that Resonates and Converts



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 1-3 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want to generate leads using LinkedIn
    Are you committing any of the “deadly sins” of LinkedIn without realizing it? LinkedIn has become the go-to place for consultants, coaches and subject matter experts who want to generate quality leads and build a sustainable business. However, as the popularity of the platform grows, so has the onslot of terrible spam DMs and cold pitches. 
    In this episode we’re discussing the importance of LinkedIn Etiquette and our guest expert Salina Yeung, reveals best practices for positioning your brand, creating genuine connections, and actionable steps for your find your ideal clients, create content that converts, and connect with them in a way that highly converts. We also unpack an ideal posting schedule, creative ways you can build more trust and increase your leads. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Discover the “deadly sins” of LinkedIn and what not to do
    2. Know the exact posting ratio that Salina recommends for CTA posts
    3. Have a solid strategy you can confidently execute to generate leads and make valuable connections 


    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    00:00:46] April: Hi guys, and welcome to episode number 307, where we are diving into all things LinkedIn etiquette. So let’s talk about first, who is this episode for? So if you are a subject matter expert or a speaker, a consultant or a coach, and you are looking to generate quality leads, and you are willing to do what it takes to actually build relationships with people on LinkedIn, and you realize that by doing that, you’re actually going to increase your profit.

    [00:01:15] April: And if you’re like me, you’ve been on LinkedIn and you’re probably really tired of the spam messages. Just yesterday I had a, a well meaning young man send me a DM on LinkedIn and his only question was, do you have an Instagram for your podcast? Of course I was like, yes, of course. Here I have my Instagram channel for my podcast.

    [00:01:39] April: And I proceeded to receive an entire video about all the ways that I should be growing my Instagram. Now, I understand that leading with like tips and help is a really nice way to do things, but this guy had never commented on any of my posts. He had no idea who I was, what I did. He didn’t take two seconds to actually determine if I was somebody that even Wanted help growing my Instagram, and that’s where my frustration lies with LinkedIn.

    [00:02:08] April: Message me on LinkedIn if you feel the same way. I do want to receive those messages so I can connect with you. So in our process of building LinkedIn shows and having a series of LinkedIn here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast, I was on the hunt for people I really value and I really admire. On the LinkedIn platform that I feel like are communicating in a very substantially real way.

    [00:02:34] April: And you can tell that their LinkedIn success has definitely grown and it’s because of their skills in their LinkedIn communication and strategy. So in today’s episode. We get to bring in Selena Young. Now Salina helps you grow your business with LinkedIn and she is in a well established LinkedIn expert.

    [00:02:53] April: We’re going to be sharing everything we have here for you and all the show notes, and this is episode number 307. So you can cruise over. To SweetLifeCo.Com click on the podcast and this is episode 307 to find all the goodies that we have here for you. And if you are a subject matter expert coach or consultant, and you’re ready to scale your business to the next level, and you are ready to scale your business past the basics, then we would love to connect with you.

    [00:03:21] April: You can actually go over to the show notes as well, and you can download the six components of a highly scalable consulting and coaching business. It’s a. Complete list and a free guide that we would love to give you as our gift. You can find all of it by cruising over again to SweetLifeCo.Com. Click on the podcast and this is episode 307.

    [00:03:41] April: All right, let’s go ahead and dive in. I think that you are going to love what Salina says here and you’re going to resonate with her as well. All right, you guys. Welcome back to the show. I’m super excited to be here with my new connection, Salina, and Salina is all over my LinkedIn feed. Let me just say this.

    [00:03:57] April: I don’t know how I found her originally, but I have notifications on because I feel like she speaks a language that feels comfortable to me and comfortable with me on LinkedIn. So as I have been trying to grow my LinkedIn presence and being more active, I’ve really been taking your lead on how to it.

    [00:04:16] April: Best communicate in a real way that isn’t, uh, overly pushy or salesy or marketing. So anyway, yeah. So, uh, thank you so much for taking your time out to be here on the podcast with us and to drop in your wisdom. We’re all, we’re talking about LinkedIn etiquette today. So can you give us a quick background for our listeners of, you know, you’re the one that talks about this and how you got to this place.

    [00:04:43] Salina: Yeah, absolutely. Thank you so much for having me in your show. Like, it’s just so excited, like sweet live entrepreneur. Come on, everybody wants to be part of this. So I’m Selena Young. I’m the LinkedIn business strategist. So I started my business three years ago, um, teaching people all things LinkedIn, particularly how to basically monetize using the power of LinkedIn.

    [00:05:06] Salina: And me and April got connected because like one of my poses talk about how weird sometimes you’re just like so trusting about the whole, like, I think the audience on LinkedIn is really high quality, first of all. But like, sometimes you will just trusting people and decided to accept a stranger. And when they do, um, when we do accept it, the minute that we accept, we do not give you a permission to sell us right away.

    [00:05:31] Salina: And that’s the pitch slap that we talk about. That’s how we get connected. And today we’re going to talk about that a bit more.

    [00:05:39] April: Yeah. Yeah. And I think that was it. I think when I actually saw the words pitch slap written and then you have all your other connections and everybody agrees and there’s this whole chain of connections and everybody’s going, Oh yeah, the pitch slap.

    [00:05:51] April: Oh yeah, the pitch slap. I’m like, okay, these are my people. I want to know these people more. I want to hang out with these people and I want, and I want to learn from Selena. So let’s kind of dive into that. We’re talking about LinkedIn etiquette and LinkedIn best practices in, You know, where you have these deadly sins of linkedin that you share, where do you really start with people when they want to become more active?

    [00:06:14] April: They want to build their personal brand on linkedin. You know, what, what are these deadly sins that you just are like, please, let’s take note of this first.

    [00:06:22] Salina: Yeah, I love that questions a lot. I would start with thinking about the purpose and the goal you want to grow on LinkedIn. Like, is it to find clients?

    [00:06:32] Salina: Is it to land a media feature? Is it to basically start building connection? Maybe you just You know, starting out fresh, starting out on your business, then maybe networking. Right. But in a way that, you know, April and I talk about built a deeper connection with another person, like imagine you and them, it’s like a digital handshake.

    [00:06:53] Salina: Right. Instead of just like pitch slapping them with like. Hey, this is me. This is what I’m offering. This is my program. This is my website. Like, who are you? First of all, so I would start with your LinkedIn profile. I would warm up your relationship with that person through engaging with their content, like what we do, DMing each other, like understand about like, Oh, who you are, how do you help?

    [00:07:18] Salina: Who is your ideal, um, sort of avatar and then go it from there. And, and I think that is much more natural step than someone just like, Hey, April, uh, I’m Selena. I’m the LinkedIn business strategist. This is my website. Check it out. Uh, let’s book a call. I would be like, uh, wait a minute. Like. Please slow down.

    [00:07:36] Salina: Who are you? Right? So things like that will really helps to nurture the relationship and later down in the line, it’s exactly what I teach as well. It helps you with sales as well. It’s just take it longer to warm up the audience. But when they do decided to jump on a call and you guys are a match to work together, when you do on a sales call, it’s like a one call sales rather than like you already broke the initial trust and impression with the other person.

    [00:08:03] Salina: And then you take it from there, right? Yeah, so that’s, that’s how I see starting out on LinkedIn, figuring the goal, figuring the purpose.

    [00:08:12] April: Right, that’s such good advice. And I love that you said it’s gonna take longer, but with that, you’re so right, that when it’s time to convert into pre call, you know, cause we need to disqualify clients, just like we need to pre call.

    [00:08:24] April: Prequalify them is just as important and going through the process of connecting with people in the feed, connecting with people in the posts. And I love it when I receive a message from somebody who has at least like two of my posts or commented on something because they actually seem familiar to me and I’m not afraid even if sometimes, you know, they might be.

    [00:08:45] April: Pitch slapping me like as you call it, but I’m so much more open to it because I appreciate that they have taken the time to connect with me in the public feed. Absolutely. It just, it, you know, relationships sell. Yeah. And, and we can’t, well, maybe somebody would argue we can buy relationships, but really that level of trust comes with communication of conversation.

    [00:09:06] April: And a bit of time too. So for somebody who’s new onto LinkedIn, if they’re trying to find people to connect with it, do you have like a hack or a way that somebody can find the right people to connect with and start following so that they can start messaging people that could be there? Perspective clients.

    [00:09:24] Salina: Yeah, absolutely. I wouldn’t say a hack, but it’s more like really go down to what you just said about like who they are, right? Like if. They are targeting similar target audience. It’s easy to open up a conversation by saying, Hey, I really like your content, right? Just like April, you, you receive someone saying, Oh, I really like your content.

    [00:09:45] Salina: I really resonate. And exactly like, this is like podcast interview show. That’s this beautiful collaboration happened. Right. And just that instant, um, connection. And I think like sometimes we over. Engineering the part where people will not answer you, but it’s actually not true if you personalize in a way that it’s adding value to the other person, I think it’s ultimately is a big yes, whether it’s to jump on a podcast show interview like this, a collaboration or even to ask for the big ass of sales.

    [00:10:19] Salina: I think it’s, it’s very easy when you truly understand the other person who is their target audience, how you can help write things that, um, I find there’s two message, particularly really, really helpful. One started with, let’s say April, you and I are not connected on LinkedIn. I will go through your LinkedIn trying to figure out ways of the content that you’re creating on LinkedIn and say, Hey, I can add value to this.

    [00:10:44] Salina: This is something that you and I could work together on. That is one way of doing so. The other way of doing so is like really understanding, um. The offer that you are sharing, like, let’s say business coaching, you’re helping people to basically do business modeling that it’s very highly profitable.

    [00:11:03] Salina: Maybe, you know, another like big creator in the space on LinkedIn. Let’s say I know a lot of creators that is doing that. I would love to connect both of you together. That’s at value. But equally is not No. Something that people will find, Oh, that’s so salesy. Why are you messaging me? But there will be like, Oh, I’m open for this beautiful connection.

    [00:11:22] Salina: I would like to know the other creator that is doing exactly what I’m doing. And I can work with her to partner up or affiliate or things like that.

    [00:11:31] April: Right. And that is so valuable. And I love that you said that too, because it’s not just this and why I value your voice on this. Cause it’s not just necessarily this networking app.

    [00:11:42] April: It’s a place to truly build alliances and mastermind with other people and to connect. And I know that I would find that. you’re like, Hey April, you should know Joe or whoever, you know, and we try to do that. You know, I do that actually for our clients, but now that you’re saying that, I probably definitely don’t do that enough for my connections.

    [00:12:04] April: And so that’s something that I want to be better at. So as you’re saying this, I’m going, okay, I really need to look at my connections. Who do I value being like, you should know this person. And I know I value that. So I know that my connections would value that in, frankly, I just really never thought about that from a standpoint.

    [00:12:21] Salina: And you’re such a so so butterfly. I can tell people it’s like, yeah, I know, I know you through April. Thank you so much, April, for this. And then like, it helps you with like this snowball effect of business opportunity as well. Right? Like when someone think about business coaching, the first person think about is April because you already helped them so much.

    [00:12:41] Salina: Initially to make all those beautiful connection. Right. And I love that sentence that people say, if you want to go fast, go alone. If you want to go far, go together. And that’s, I think the together component, it’s what the most precious thing about LinkedIn. Um, people talk about business all the time and they carry a mindset of like, Oh yeah, we’re like creating this, um, partnership, we’re creating this. Opportunity either as business or a career, um, it’s, it’s normal in this space.

    [00:13:14] April: Yeah. And I think that for, I mean, I’ve been down LinkedIn probably since, uh, 2008, 2009, a long, long time ago. I’m aging myself. Right. But I think that for me, In the last couple of years, recognizing the value of really great genuine connections that we haven’t been able to really make on other social media platforms and people I can learn from and people I can contribute to.

    [00:13:41] April: And I love that you said that because that is the exact. Intention of why I know that many people are here. Like you were saying, they’re very valuable connections here and contributions, clients, collaborations, partnerships. And, and so I love that those are some of the ways that you lead with for your connections.

    [00:14:01] April: So let’s talk a little bit about some. Direct messaging, direct messaging, things that people should not do on LinkedIn.

    [00:14:12] Salina: Oh, love that. There’s so many, but I would start with the two, uh, of my least favorite. So I got a lot of people asking me to like send them a recommendation endorsement, and those are usually strangers.

    [00:14:27] Salina: And I’ll be like, who are you? Why would I endorse you? Endorse your skill. If I have not even like. Work with you before recommendation either. And I think this is like a big no, no on LinkedIn because you’re giving a task first to someone completely stranger. You don’t even build the initial, um, like sort of like, um, relationship.

    [00:14:49] Salina: And on top of it, you just like basically hurting your own personal reputation in this space because. But imagine if it’s a job, right, your future employer will call that person up or DM in that person. Hey, can you vouch for Selena for X, Y, Z? And that person will be, I don’t know who they are, but yeah, I endorsed them previously.

    [00:15:09] Salina: It’s hurt them the reputation for both ends, right? Because you’re the one that giving and you’re the one that asking. So I would say this is the number one. No, no, from my end asking stranger for endorsement and recommendation on LinkedIn.

    [00:15:23] April: Okay. I love that. And, and yeah, it’s, it’s your personal credibility too. And one of the things that we shared before we started recording is I’ve had people go through and kind of click certain endorsements for me, though I appreciate that I do who they are. And so, you know, then, then they would send a message, say, Hey, I just endorse you for this. And I would have this guilty conscience of like, Oh my gosh, I didn’t, I didn’t, but that has actually bothered me for years where I’m like, Oh, thank you. But I have no clue who you are or what you do, whether or not you’re good at it or what that is. So

    [00:15:59] Salina: I think when some LinkedIn guru started to give tips about this, and I think like people start doing it, but without like a purpose or like strong goal of doing it. Right. So yeah, don’t ever feel guilty, April.

    [00:16:13] Salina: It’s not your fault. It’s. Their fault, like they shouldn’t even start it with, you know, endorsing people that they don’t know and not really cultivating and like building that relationship first.

    [00:16:25] April: Right. Okay. Great. Thank you for my release of that. Uh, so now let’s kind of go into frequency of direct messaging as far as with people you do want to become your clients.

    [00:16:41] April: Do you have a recommended way that you, that you’ve known they have done the best practices, right? You’ve connected with them in the feed, you’ve built a relationship with them and you’ve added value. You’ve done all the things that you’ve said. And sometimes that, that jump to, Hey, what’s the next step feels like a pretty big jump to people getting prospects on a call.

    [00:17:03] April: Do you have any recommendations on how to convert? From the, the relationship just into the actual sales prospect.

    [00:17:10] Salina: I love that question so much. I literally just create a video, particularly around that topic. Um, it’s called the LinkedIn Grove strategies, just 15 minutes per day. So like obviously it’s like a 10 minute video.

    [00:17:25] Salina: It’s really long. I go nitty gritty, but I will put into like three buckets. One we talk about like April and I talk about the engagement piece, I think is a really, really big piece. And then engagement could actually go first before even connecting with another person. Just like the point that you talk about, right.

    [00:17:42] Salina: April you said. I remember this face like it’s on my feed. She supported my content. That instant connection will allow me to just accept that connection invitation. If that person is sending me in the second sort of like bucket that they’re doing right and the last one, I know what you mean by like, Oh, how do I actually jump into the conversation of sales?

    [00:18:05] Salina: Right, I would actually take a step back and think about more in terms of your content. And I think. Content on LinkedIn. It’s such a like opportunity that a lot of people is not using. In fact, there’s only 5. 5 percent of the entire user on LinkedIn is posting on LinkedIn consistently, which means it’s so easy for you to dominate the new newsfeed.

    [00:18:28] Salina: And the funny thing is like, if I’m thinking about my corporate. Like, uh, days, right. When I’m still working for LinkedIn during corporate days, I don’t actually engage a lot, like I would actually consume content. I don’t like people content. I don’t comment on people content, but I’m still interested to hear about what, like April, you have to say, what about sweet live entrepreneur?

    [00:18:51] Salina: What, uh, what about your offer, but not necessarily interacting in the comments section. Right. So I would actually go back and really dial into your, like. Conversion when it comes to content, did you really at the end of the sort of like content, is there ways to connect with your audience? That is really like relatable.

    [00:19:15] Salina: Is there like problems that you’re trying to help other people solve? And then at the end of it, the CTA needs to be extremely clean. And my preferred one is usually DM and then the word, which is the word. It could be your program name. It could be April, your name. It could be like. Things that you hope your clients to solve, right?

    [00:19:34] Salina: Like it could be LinkedIn. Then it will be DME, the word LinkedIn, and let’s have a chat. And in that way, it just helps. Instantly to create that really easy flow of conversation of more transactional because they, you know, the other person is interested to talk to you to know more about your offer. And then from there, the transactional conversation is much more easier.

    [00:19:58] Salina: And there is an ending point of it, right? Whether you want to take them on the sales page directly to buy a course or directly to book, um, sales consultation call with you VSL, whatever that is, it becomes much more natural. So I will start with that.

    [00:20:16] April: Great tip. So, so far we’ve talked about authentically connecting in the feed. We’ve talked about adding value. We’ve talked about connecting our connections to each other. And providing value just because we’re good people and we want to and we know two people that would know each other and they could be great and actually leading with that place of I want to serve, I want to give first and now your tip about this content is so well, Smart because there are a lot of people that want to create content, but there’s something about LinkedIn.

    [00:20:49] April: Maybe it’s because we’ve been in the Instagram, Facebook content space for so many years, and it’s just a totally different audience, different objective, a different culture, a different like all of it is different. And so there there seems to be this disconnect LinkedIn versus other social platforms that People may be on.

    [00:21:11] April: I know that our clients struggle with that, and those are things that they bring up, which is why I’m so grateful to have you on the show and talking about this. And it’s really how to create content that is conversional. And so with that being said, because I just know our listeners and I Anticipate the questions are asking, how often do you recommend creating or posting not just any content, but that content that asks for a call to action content.

    [00:21:38] Salina: Oh my goodness. Love that. I would say it’s a ratio. So for, for instance, it’s a easy ratio to follow. It’s let’s say you post every single day, which is what I recommend Monday to Friday. If it’s possible, then I would say you can have one post that is a ask post, which is you really like. Calling out your audience.

    [00:21:57] Salina: Hey, like attention. Mine is like entrepreneur and corporate escapee. If you want to like create a follower, the brand, this is my offer. If you’re interested, let’s have a chat. And automatically we, we mentioned about the conversion, right? Because this is a ask. You need to understand that those type of lead generation posts will not get you engagement, a lot of engagement, just like other posts.

    [00:22:19] Salina: Like if it’s a storytelling post about like. April, how you started your business, how you like created this amazing podcast show. Why do you create it? It’s obviously getting more eyeballs and more attention and engagement and people are more likely to engage, like commenting like, Oh, this is such a good show.

    [00:22:37] Salina: I’ve been support a huge supporter. Yeah, yeah, yeah. Continue the conversation. Whereas if you are direct asked, the conversation is less. But I can guarantee you, whoever that is listening to us right now, that ass is so important because without ass, no one knows exactly what you’re selling. And also it’s a direct ask that it’s just like, you know, I already at so much value throughout the entire week, like with educational polls, how you can basically achieve what you want with the goals.

    [00:23:06] Salina: Obviously the, the goals that you want, right? Little mini bite side tips. And then from there you just like, Oh, if you want to learn more, obviously with each day, just two to three minutes of digesting, my content would not get you to where you want it to be. If you want to like 10 X your income or like help to land, um, media feature using LinkedIn, this is the program for you and that ass is important.

    [00:23:30] Salina: So I will. Do that ratio if not if you’re posting twice or three times per week, then you can do two asks Um for the whole month and that could be ranging from you can do testimonial as well There’s so many ways of the big ass that you can do not just like hey This is my hand, take my hand. This is my program, but there’s also ways of like using soft styling, using your client testimonial to talk about those results, and then from there to, um, do the big ass of DM you about the work that we just talk about, or this is the sales page, go ahead and learn more.

    [00:24:05] April: Wow. That we could have done a whole episode just on that.

    [00:24:09] Salina: Know.

    [00:24:11] April: Oh my gosh. Um, definitely need to have you back on the show. Uh, this. information is really valuable. And I appreciate so much that you lead with this. You practice this, you, you know, function through this day in and day out on all your LinkedIn content.

    [00:24:27] April: I’ve learned so much already about being okay with posting five days a week. I’ve heard that, you know, you don’t need to do that, but I actually. Have enough content that I’ve wanted to share five days a week. And I felt like, honestly, it was this overkill. I was like, Oh my gosh, I’m going to bury all these, you know, followers on LinkedIn.

    [00:24:45] April: So I love that you said that. And that’s really encouraging. And then just about how you’re asking for the ask that is, uh, that. That is so, um, you know, people are overusing the word authentic. So I actually try to avoid using that word so much now, but it’s direct and it’s intentional and it is starting with sharing why somebody needs to be there in, in, in coaching.

    [00:25:12] April: I’ve coached entrepreneurs never. 27 years. But in coaching that I feel like the number one thing that we do is we serve, serve, serve. And we don’t come anywhere near asking for somebody to take the next step. I think we do that a lot. And so I love that you said that. Especially women. Right. Like, let me help you. Let me throw up more great information all over you or whatever that is, you know? Yeah.

    [00:25:37] Salina: There’s a stigma that we’re like, Oh, we just wait. No, no more waiting. Just do the asking. Cause when you do ask results just come so naturally.

    [00:25:47] April: Yeah. Yeah. And I would just end with this to our listeners. You know, how many of you guys are out there posting great content, but there are still a, you know, people.

    [00:25:58] April: Might not actually be sure how to buy you or what to buy you for or what that next step is and you’re so good at sharing and teaching and contributing and transforming your audiences and giving all this great content and yet you, you have a group of followers that actually might want to engage with you and you are not giving them opportunity to say, Hey, I’m so glad that you know, you’re here.

    [00:26:24] April: This is what happened with, you know, April when she worked with me and this is what it is, and these are the end results that, you know, we provide, you know, Are you ready for that? Do you want that? And so I just want to encourage our listeners and people tuning into this show that, you know, selling, um, Myron Golden, I don’t know if you listen to Myron, but I love Myron.

    [00:26:43] April: He’s a business leader. Myron Golden says selling is a gift, right? And when we have a solution that we know delivers people or companies measurable, predictable, transformational results, then therefore it’s our obligation to make that available to them. And I think that there is so much of a. Of a, of a practice of free content.

    [00:27:07] April: Free content, or even, you know, slightly paid content. And so I appreciate so much your ratio because we don’t wanna be over salesy. We don’t wanna be. Yes. And so I think we overcorrect so much. We actually don’t sell anything sometimes.

    [00:27:18] Salina: I know. Yeah. And I love what you mentioned. It’s like, to me it’s like a act of love. An act of service. We’re not a product pusher. We’re just like, if. You and I are a match to work together. That’s an act of love. That’s an act of service. I inviting you to work with me, right? Just like them, the process that you mentioned, we just like qualify your leads.

    [00:27:40] Salina: That’s an act of service. Knowing you and I are a good match to work together. If it’s not, then I’m sorry. Let’s, let’s say bye right here. And then later down the road, when you and I are ready, let’s, let’s go ahead and work together, right? So,

    [00:27:53] April: yeah. Yeah. And actually doing our potential prospects a favor and saying, you know what? I’m not the right one for you, but here’s somebody else who could be, or, you know, using that very clear language into what our brand is.

    [00:28:05] April: Like I, I’m not for everybody for sure. And so, I mean, when I speak on stages, I even speak on stages and flip flops. I mean, some people don’t want me, that’s just who I am. I’m not going to know who I am. Right.

    [00:28:16] Salina: So that’s me every day. Okay. Right.

    [00:28:20] April: So I was just. Speaking of podcast movement a couple of weeks ago, and you know, I showed up in my flip book, but that’s just who I just always who I’ve been.

    [00:28:26] April: Right. Yeah. I feel like. There. I feel like that’s I feel like exactly like you’re saying. I love what you said that that is also a gift to disqualify people with our content with our messaging. And when we go in for that, making that service available to them, just being like, yeah, you know, this is you’re not either ready for this or this isn’t a good fit.

    [00:28:46] April: Yeah, I think that’s it. I think that’s awesome. And if

    [00:28:52] Salina: I can add two actionable points in terms of what you just said. If someone just like, the big ask is to really leverage the link you have on LinkedIn. Which shouldn’t be just putting a company website, but instead it could be the most important CTA you want.

    [00:29:08] Salina: That is related to your sales goal. Let’s say you’re now launching a masterclass, a free workshop, put it right there. Like don’t waste your real estate. The second really good place to put is your feature section is completely for free. It’s the most clickable area on LinkedIn. And my question is why not utilizing it?

    [00:29:28] Salina: It’s free traffic, free place to basically go through your funnel. So make use, make good use of those two plays.

    [00:29:36] Salina: And I’m going to go change my general website link on my LinkedIn profile right now. I feel so bad, I’m sorry.

    [00:29:44] April: What do you mean? That was gold for

    [00:29:47] April: me. Don’t what. Well, I’m so grateful that you said that because, yeah. So basically we use our lead magnet or whatever that event we’re hosting in that first action step into our ecosystem of services.

    [00:29:58] April: Yes. Golden. I’m going to add it to the list. I’m totally going to do that. Absolutely. Right now. Thank you so much.

    [00:30:06] Salina: Perfect. I love actionable steps that you can take and implement, you know. Yeah, we do too. We eat them up. So how can people really connect with you? And just your content is so good. I want to make sure people know how to find

    [00:30:20] Salina: you.

    [00:30:21] Salina: Yeah, on LinkedIn. Really? I’m most active there. If you DM me like most. Most of the time I’ll be the one that responding. If not, my VA would definitely reroute you to me. Uh, but LinkedIn is the pace, uh, place to go. I do, however, started, um, YouTube channels. If you want to learn something more longer form of training, I have few trainings to get started on LinkedIn, how to basically use LinkedIn, uh, for your business.

    [00:30:48] Salina: We also talk about LinkedIn premiums, which is a big topic that everybody asks all the time. Um, me and. April talk about the LinkedIn adequate. I actually have a specific dedicated show that is talk about a tan deadly scene. So if you want to like go through that, that will be really helpful, but it’s really expanding on some of the really great nugget that we just talk about today.

    [00:31:10] April: Oh, my gosh. Okay. So that’s all on your YouTube is over there. And awesome. Okay. And we’ll make sure that the links to find you are in the show notes for this episode for sure. And so people can connect with you further. And I appreciate so much your time and being here and contributing and being such a leader in this space.

    [00:31:29] Salina: Thank you you so much for having me on the show. I have such a fun time like geeking out talking all things LinkedIn with you.

    [00:31:36] April: I really appreciate your wisdom. Thank you so much.


    How to Use LinkedIn Events For Maximum Leads with April Beach and Jen Corcoran (Episode 306)

    How to Use LinkedIn Events For Maximum Leads



    LinkedIn Events are a great way to generate leads, as long as you know the strategy and have the steps to execute. In this episode, we’re diving in with LinkedIn Expert Jen Corcoran to learn the ins, outs, dos, don’ts of LinkedIn Events. 
    There are three phases to using LinkedIn Events and actions to take in each phase including, how to create the event, how to promote the event and what to do after the event. Jen covers important steps to follow. Additionally we also cover strategies for creating an event on your business vs personal profile, how to grow your email email, how to promote paid vs free events, and skills for direct messaging with people who’ve been interested in your event but haven’t actually taken the steps to register. If you’ve been using LinkedIn Events and not getting great traction, this episode is definitely for you. 
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    1. Know how and where to create LinkedIn events
    2. Understand the pre-event promo strategy and how to expand your reach
    3. Have a process for followups that will increase conversions
    4. Understand how paid events are currently working and when you post a paid opportunity 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:46] April: Hi there. Welcome back to the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast. Especially those of you guys who’ve been with us for six years. I appreciate your listenership so much. In this particular show, we are continuing our series all about LinkedIn, how to generate leads on LinkedIn, how to use LinkedIn really the best way for your business.

    [00:01:05] April: And this one is all about how to use LinkedIn events to generate a maximum number of leads. So, If you’re in this place where you are a subject matter expert, a coach, or a consultant, you, by the way, are the exact people that this show and our company is built for. And everything that we’re doing here is to tap in and help you uncover strategies that you can take away.

    [00:01:26] April: As a matter of fact, this podcast has been known for delivering proven business trainings and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for. So you’re certainly in the right place. Now, if you have been trying to use LinkedIn events, like me, frankly, I’ve been doing LinkedIn events, but now that I have been through this episode that you’re about to hear, I realized that I was missing a lot of details in the steps.

    [00:01:48] April: And so Jen Corcoran, who is our expert here on the show today, is a queen when it comes to LinkedIn lead generation. And so she’s going to actually unpack the steps of how to correctly set up a LinkedIn event. Did you know that you can actually create an, a LinkedIn event from your company page and connect and collect email addresses? I had no idea.

    [00:02:11] April: But there are certainly pros and cons to that because you usually have less followers on your company page than you do a personal page. So in this show, we’re going to pack all, unpack all things LinkedIn events, and we are going to take you through how to set it up, where to put it, how to communicate before the event.

    [00:02:27] April: And then I asked Jen a couple of really specific questions about paid events. And those of you guys who have like paid lead magnets or Paid live virtual events, even if they’re low ticket items. How do those work with LinkedIn events? And what is the strategy behind that? So the end of this show, you are going to know the three steps to actually set up program and fill your LinkedIn events.

    [00:02:51] April: Jen even talks about how she gets thousands of invites out from her LinkedIn account to attend her events. And she breaks down her communication processes and how she actually doesn’t spend hours. That just seems like it would take forever to me. And she unpacked how it doesn’t actually take that long to connect further with people on LinkedIn through direct messaging in the most clear, non sleazy, genuine way possible.

    [00:03:18] April: And we’re going to unpack all that here on the show. So if you’d like to dive in, stay tuned with me here and you’re going to have all of the show notes by visiting SuiteLifeCo. com. This is episode number 306. So you can just click on the podcast, click on episode number 306 and everything that you have been told will be waiting there for you.

    [00:03:38] April: So glad you’re here. Let’s go ahead and dive in. Hi, everybody. Thank you for tuning in with us here. This is my friend Jennifer, and I met Jen because I actually convinced her to come in and teach a masterclass to our clients last spring. She was absolutely incredible, and everybody loved her, and she was teaching about newsletters at the time.

    [00:03:58] April: And so she has definitely become a go to LinkedIn person for myself. And my team and for our clients as well. And so I’m really glad that we are bringing her here on the Suite Life Entrepreneur podcast, because I need to learn a lot about what Jen is talking about here today. Jen, you want to take a second, just give a little bit of background and introduce yourself.

    [00:04:22] Jen: Sure. Thanks so much for having me. I’m really happy to be on this podcast with you. So I’m a LinkedIn consultant and I specialize with helping mainly introverted. sensitive and empathic female entrepreneurs. So my approach is a bit more sensitive than the main kind of hustle hype approach. So I’m more about feeding in integrity and feeding in flow.

    [00:04:45] Jen: And I love events in my past life. I was an event manager, so I genuinely love connecting people. And I think LinkedIn events is an amazing feature. It’s probably my. Favorite feature and bit of content in terms of ROI. So I’m really excited to be chatting about it today with you, because I don’t think enough people tap into the power of the, of the event feature or know how to like find it or leverage it. So yeah, I’m really excited to be chatting about it.

    [00:05:15] April: I am excited too because I was just sharing with you because, you know, before we recorded here that I just posted an event about a free event that we’re doing and so I just created it and exactly as you said, the process of going back and finding it and seeing where it was in, in the actual LinkedIn interface first of all, that was confusing to me.

    [00:05:35] April: And then the second thing is to be completely honest, I really don’t have a full blown event strategy. To promote events on LinkedIn. So I was, I was really excited that you agreed to come on and, and talk about that. So let’s, let’s start out by chatting about the LinkedIn interface and just really even, how do we even, how do people set up an event?

    [00:06:01] Jen: So you’re right. It’s not very intuitive. I personally wish there was like a tab at the very top menu that was for events, but there isn’t. So the easiest way to do it is on the desktop versus the mobile app. And just bring up your profile. Click on your home feed and if you scroll down on the left hand side you’ll see various shortcuts.

    [00:06:25] Jen: So you’ll see like recent shortcuts, so things you’ve been, content you’ve been looking at recently. You’ll see groups and then below you’ll see events and you’ll see a little plus. sign. And that’s how you start to create your event from your profile. It works pretty much the same on your company page.

    [00:06:43] Jen: You have to kind of scroll and find it down in the menu. It’s not obvious, but once you’re there, the good news is once you click through on the plus, they’re very easy to populate. It’s basically. Nice cover image. I always create them with camera, and then it’s literally the name of the event, the date, the time, the duration, a little description and the link.

    [00:07:06] Jen: So pretty easy to set up and you can tag in any relevant speakers. If you’re doing an event, you know, a webinar you can tag them in, which is great. The difference really from doing it on your profile and your page, they’re basically the same, but from a business page you get an additional option of getting people to sign to and register so you get their email.

    [00:07:30] Jen: You can’t do it from your personal profile, but on the company page you can set up an extra registration form, so they have to fill that out to be able to Join the live or watch the replay and then of course you can download their emails after so you can email them So that’s the beauty of doing it from your page over your profile and on the flip side People buy people more and you’re going to have a lot more connections on your personal profile So if you’re sending it from your company page and you’ve got a completely different name people mightn’t be as quick to accept Whereas if they know you They’re going to probably accept to your profile. So they’re both great. The page is especially great if you want to download emails.

    [00:08:17] April: Okay. So now I have a question about that. Would you recommend, because with our event and with all the events I’ve done, I set them up on my personal profile. Would you recommend creating two events or duplicating it and one from the company page or.

    [00:08:32] April: Maybe creating it because I love the idea of getting the emails because that’s what we’re going to talk about next the events We usually host or in zoom or you know someplace else and there’s an offline link and there’s another it’s like two or three Degrees away for people that actually register and get to the event. So First of all, do you recommend creating the event in two places or not?

    [00:08:55] Jen: One is enough. You know, if you really want to download the emails, do it from your company page, you’ll always have that option. I think if you duplicate it just gets a bit messy and it’s just a bit more time consuming for you. And yeah, I think in relation to the external link that when you set up a LinkedIn event page, you’ve got various dropdown options.

    [00:09:17] Jen: So you can either, Do an external link to something in person like an Eventbrite, or it could be a Zoom, a virtual event, or you’ve got the option of LinkedIn live or a LinkedIn audio. So when it’s an external link like a webinar or you kind of always have to nudge your attendees. So I think the first kind of nudges in the description part of the event, put the event like at the very top and go, Hey, have you like clicked all the way through?

    [00:09:48] Jen: This is the link and then not be shy to click on manage attendees and DM them all. And I know it sounds like quite labor intensive, but it’s really not. If you have a little short and sweet kind of message like, Hey Mary, thanks for signing up for my event. Just want to make sure that you’ve signed all the way through.

    [00:10:07] Jen: Here’s the link. Excited to see you there. And you just literally bang that out to the attendees. It doesn’t take that long. And it’s a great way to. Make sure that they have gone all the way true because 50 percent of the people won’t and they’ll be like, Hey, Oh God, I didn’t realize, thanks for that. Or, you know, you’ll start a conversation with all your attendees.

    [00:10:27] Jen: So it just gets everybody excited because with the event feature, it’s not super intuitive. People can accept an event and then they can forget because they can’t really find out where, where are those events. So I think it’s, it’s a great thing to do is to definitely personally. DM people before and I always DM them after as well.

    [00:10:49] April: Such great tips. Okay, so let’s go back to kind of unpacking this step by step. So it is… Okay, to have offline events on LinkedIn. And, and so I, I, I think most events that unless it’s a LinkedIn audio or something, or even a LinkedIn live. Yeah. So they’re going to have the external link there. Um, great tip to add the external link to the event description, not just leaving it in there that says link to the event.

    [00:11:14] April: I’m going to go back right away and make sure our event is updated to include that. So yeah. So that next step really is DMing people that said they’re going to attend. Yeah. And I love your quick little script that you said, Hey, I can’t wait to see you. Just wanted to make sure you, you went all the way through and registered.

    [00:11:34] April: Um, do you find that people are open to that? I like, I don’t like direct messages on LinkedIn, so I’m always super careful before I DM somebody and I probably am an over creation of anti DMing. Um, so I think I’m on the total opposite side of that. But I do see the value in that in it. Is that one of your secret recipes to get so many people to actually follow through and come to your event.

    [00:11:58] Jen: Definitely. And I think most people will remember that they signed up. It was something they want, but they are grateful and they’ll come back and say, well, thank you. Sorry. I missed that, you know, and then it just gets you into a nice. Genuine conversation of I’m really looking forward to it. Or, you know, people will say, Oh, I’ve shared it with my friend or I’ve shared it in a group.

    [00:12:15] Jen: And you’re like, wow. So you start to get into a nice conversation. And I think of it as like warm outreach, you know, they’ve signed up, whether they remember or not. And even if they, you know, a lot of people will come back and say, do you know what, I can’t make it now. So if it’s come up and I’ll say, don’t worry, I’ll DM you the replay after.

    [00:12:32] Jen: So again, it’s another nice conversation and you have another opportunity to touch base after. Only rarely do I get people go, Oh, I never signed up for that and I’ll be like, Oh, you did? It’s the event page. I can send you the replay and you know, don’t worry about it, you know. So, it never goes awkward. I don’t think anybody like, feels like they’re being sold to or anything because it’s generally some kind of a training event and even if they don’t remember, I position it in a good way that they go, Do you know what, actually, I think I will go.

    [00:13:04] Jen: Or I will check out. Okay, so yeah, I think it’s always like warm outreach. It doesn’t feel spammy the people they’ve signed up for whatever reason They like you they like their company, you know, do your company they like the topic So for some good reasons split decision they accepted the invite or they’ve actually seen you posting about it and actively Start to join the at the event page.

    [00:13:26] Jen: So um Yeah, with an event. I do promote them in various ways. Of course, we’ve got the LinkedIn event page, but I’ll always like email my list. I’ll always share on LinkedIn anyway, on my personal home feed, on my company page in my LinkedIn group. So I, I try to really share about the event so that people are, You know, familiar with it. They’re not like, what is this?

    [00:13:52] April: Yeah. And I think that’s a really good point is making sure that we’re feeding it. We’re not just totally relying on LinkedIn that we’re using all of our marketing channels, especially when we’re doing events that are really an important part of our marketing and campaign and launches.

    [00:14:05] April: So what

    [00:14:07] April: about, so we, we have the event, do you share the event multiple times between when you created it to your personal feed? So if somebody is having an event in. You know, let’s say 10 days from now about how many times would you reshare that event back to your feed saying, Hey, don’t forget, I’m hosting this cool event.

    [00:14:28] Jen:

    [00:14:28] Jen: Well linkedIn themselves, they kind of advocate that you should be create the event page about two to four weeks in advance. So it’s much kind of. You know notice that you can for me I would probably just share the event once or twice I create separate graphics that would probably have more impact than the actual event page So i’d share it in different ways, but it’s the same content, but it will look visually different And the main thing for me is I will invite my first degree connections to the event page manually.

    [00:14:59] Jen: So You can invite a thousand first degree connections every five days, which sounds like a lot, but there are, there is a hacky way of really inviting people quick onto your event page where you can invite them at like 50 at a go. So when you kind of click into the filters, My favorites, one is school, one is company, these don’t really work for me when I’m targeting like coaches or consultants, I target by location, if it was like a local event you can do that, or I mainly target by industry, so I select, you know, the right one for me, it’s usually professional training and coaching, and then At the very top, LinkedIn will populate, it will start to bring up all the, the coaches and trainers and everything.

    [00:15:47] Jen: And you can manually do one by one, which is very like time consuming, boring, but at the very top left, there is a little box. And if you click that, it selects 50 at a time. So if you’re 50, 50, 50, 50, you really can invite a thousand people really quickly. At the moment, I’m I’m running a, a virtual summit for sensitive people in October.

    [00:16:14] Jen: So I’ve got an event page for that and I’ve set it up a few weeks in advance. So I’ve already invited, I think 3000 people every week. I’m like, Oh, I’ve got my credit back. Let me invite another thousand more because that’s the way I get maximum people. And I think if you’re lucky, you get about 10 percent accept, which is really good.

    [00:16:34] Jen: If you think of like, you know, the rate of kind of exchange of an email list, it’s, it’s, you know, it’s. Pretty good. So yeah, I wouldn’t just rely on just creating the page and posting it and that’s it Because you’re only gonna get a handful of people whereas the way I do it manually inviting them I always get a hundreds of people on every event and it’s hundreds of leads So it’s worth it.

    [00:16:58] Jen: And then if I’ve got a speaker I say to them, can you invite? A thousand people from their network and I make them a tiny little training showing them how to do it And then it just gets maximum bums on seats.

    [00:17:10] April: Wow Okay I was going through with our event and like looking at everybody’s title sorting them out title like click click click I think I sat there for a good 45 minutes and only invited what I felt like was a ton of people which was 88 that I felt, and I was skipping people.

    [00:17:26] April: I’m like, no, they’re not the perfect person. Um, so this makes me feel much better that there’s a much more efficient way and another reason why I was so excited to have this conversation because I was thinking, this is not sustainable. . Yeah. How, how do I do this? I, I have very little time to be doing be this.

    [00:17:43] April: Okay. Very cool. Now, so after. Wait, I have one question here. What about events that are not free? What about paid events? What about events that are, uh, yeah, paid? Um,

    [00:17:58] Jen: if I’m honest, it’s the same kind of process. I still would invite a thousand of my first week connections and Still have to nudge people to sign up manually to the link.

    [00:18:10] Jen: You, most people, well, 50 percent of the people will not click true. They’ll think they’re signed up and you’re like, no, you have to click through this particular link. So, and the same, I would have different visuals. So I don’t think I would do. Anything different? Um, I, if it was a paid event, I would definitely want access to everybody’s email.

    [00:18:31] Jen: So I would definitely do on my company page more so than my profile. But I think other than that, it would just be. The exact same way of marketing it and just giving yourself as much lead up time like I definitely did two to four weeks. There have been some free lives that I’ve done, you know, a week out, um, but with a paid, I would definitely do two to four just to drive that kind of visibility and reach and not just rely on, you know, a few days, whereas, you know, for a free event, you can get a lot of people jumping on at the last minute. So it’s a bit different.

    [00:19:05] April: And with paid events. You know, because they think that almost all of them are going to be free because that’s just the way it works, really. So with paid events, I’m guessing it’s probably important in the description to say the cost of this ticket is, you know, 50 bucks or 500 or whatever it is. Do you feel like LinkedIn is a good place to also market paid trainings in the events page or really just lead gen?

    [00:19:31] Jen: I’ve done both, you know, I think I primarily lead with free and I think like you said people are used to free and then, you know, they come along to a live or a webinar and then you kind of plug your paid services there. I think in general, I do see a lot more people free events on LinkedIn, whether it’s, you know, a LinkedIn live or an audio, you kind of give that free value first and then they buy into you.

    [00:19:56] Jen: I think you could do paid one, but you wouldn’t want to be doing it all the time because people will just feel like you’re advertising. But if it’s like a one off, if it’s like, maybe it’s something you’re doing once or twice a year, I see no harm in it. But I think if you were to do it all the time, People will just get in their head that you’re someone that’s constantly selling.

    [00:20:20] Jen: So you want to really stand out as somebody who’s, you know, giving value. Of course, you can plug sales calls and things at the end of your free stuff. And of course, you’re not going to get as many people onto a page when it’s just, it’s just sadly, just the way it is. There’s so much stuff online that they like to come in and test out the free first, but I don’t see any reason why you can’t, you know, I’m thinking of one paid event that I know is being promoted at the moment on LinkedIn, but I don’t know if it has an event page.

    [00:20:52] Jen: So I’m going to go away and have a look. I’ve seen people, it’s, it’s a conference and people are posting about it and they’re definitely, you know, they’re definitely saying the price is whatever, 250 pound and then there’s attendees are sharing. But I don’t know if they’ve got an event page. If they do, I’ll let you know.

    [00:21:08] April: That’s fascinating. Yeah. Yeah. Send me a message and let me know. Cause I was thinking about we, you know, we have clients in ourselves where we do, sometimes we do paid workshops, paid live events, and sometimes they aren’t that much. They’re usually 47 to 97 because it prequalifies and, you know, buying into like.

    [00:21:27] April: Even though less people, we already know a register for it, but when people pay, they pay attention and they usually convert into, you know, better clients. And so I was just curious about that. And then before I have a few clients actually that have promoted, you know, a thousand dollar workshops and have done really, really well with that.

    [00:21:46] April: And that kind of goes into my next question for you be in there. Very niche specific, right? These are super specific for a super. Targeted industry to learn a super specific skill. They aren’t just informational. They’re actually training skills, workshops, and they’ve done really well with that. Um, and part of what they do, which I want to hear you unpack this too, is it’s in the follow up, right?

    [00:22:12] April: So it’s the follow up 24 hours before for people that clicked that they did want to attend but haven’t paid the money. And they have like this 24 hour almost like Post cart closing type of a DM that they do. And they say that that does really, really well. So whether it’s following up before the event happens or following up afterwards, sharing the replay, you know, I would love to know, first of all, how much time that usually takes you opposite, especially if you’re, especially if you have 500 people attend your event.

    [00:22:44] April: And do you have any sort of tips on following up to get people, whether it’s to register or to schedule a sales call or just to watch the thing?

    [00:22:54] Jen: Yeah, I would definitely follow up with all of them and I promise it doesn’t take that long. If it’s just a short and snappy message and you just bang it out to all the attendees. So I would always, you know, follow up first with the replay because you know, not everybody has got on. So I would just be like, hi. Um, John, um, hope you enjoyed the event earlier on if you didn’t manage to see it, you know, I couldn’t see everyone that was live Here’s the replay and that’s the you know The first message and then you just start conversations people come back to you and say oh I couldn’t because I was with my mom or I was walking the dog You hear everything you start to get into a natural conversation Or people will say loved it and if they loved it i’ll say oh, what was your biggest takeaway and then?

    [00:23:39] Jen: That usually prequalifies people because they usually say, Oh, they, because you said this and I really need help with that. And then straight away I’m like, Oh, did you book one of the sales calls? Or here’s the link to book. So for me, it’s always good to prequalify rather than just firing my sales call and get everyone and you know, they’re not the right fit or it’s never going to happen.

    [00:24:01] Jen: So yeah, the replay is always. The good conversation starter because even if they were there, some people maybe have to hop off 10 minutes early and they’ve like, oh, brilliant. I missed the end. Um, so yeah, just share the reply, get into conversations. It’s very rare that people ignore you. I think after they, you know, you send them something.

    [00:24:22] Jen: Like that, you know, they’re, they’re like, Oh, I’m going to watch it. And then you can touch base a few days later with them all again. And just say, Hey, good to know. Did you watch it? What were your takeaways? So it’s that kind of nudging and nurturing and then, you know, pre qualifying the right people. And if people, if that’s.

    [00:24:40] Jen: kind of where they want to stop the journey for now. That’s fine. You’ve kind of built a little bit of a relationship and maybe they’re completely new to you and there’s somebody that you can invite to your next event. Others will be, you know, further down the line. They already know they need LinkedIn help and you’re just getting them on a call.

    [00:24:58] Jen: But it all happens with the DMs for me. That nurturing before, during, after, you’ll get people, even while you’re doing the event saying, where’s the link? And you’re like, well, you don’t see that obviously till after, cause you’re doing the bloody event. So you’re like, well, I can’t DM you now. So yeah, it’s always the DMs.

    [00:25:17] Jen: If you don’t do the DMs, it’s a missed opportunity because you’re only gonna like add a handful of people come back to you. Whereas if you DM them all, you’re going to get such a good response rate. So yeah, the magic for me is always in the DMs and it doesn’t have to take long. I promise you just click on manage attendees.

    [00:25:37] Jen: It brings them all up, whether they’re first degree connection, second, third. Don’t need to be connected to them. You can just message them so they don’t need to be a connection and you just bang out the little message. So I do it always in batches. The way you’re doing this podcast, I will just go in and say, well, message to them all in a batch, step back, and maybe it’s the end of the day.

    [00:25:58] Jen: Then I’ll go in, there’s conversations again, do it in batch. So yeah, not spending all day on it because you’d be driven mad.

    [00:26:07] April: For sure. And, uh, and. And I, that’s a good like business basics reminder for me, because now that I’m becoming more active on LinkedIn, I realized I need to like block calendar schedule my LinkedIn time because I’m like, you know, leaving the office, going to the kitchen. I feel like all of a sudden I’ve been the last five days. I’ve been.

    [00:26:29] April: So I definitely need to schedule out my schedule time and when I will be doing my LinkedIn work. And, you know, as we wrap up, I have to say that one of the reasons why I really appreciate you so much besides the tactics and the strategy and the wisdom that you get is that you’re so. Real about how you connect with people.

    [00:26:48] April: And when you talk about how you do messages in the DMS, it feels so good to me. And I think that’s why you and I connected. And it frankly doesn’t feel like the way that a lot of people do messages and a lot of messages I have received on LinkedIn. And I really appreciate that about you. And it’s something that I would feel good about doing because it’s just a conversation.

    [00:27:10] April: It’s just an actual natural conversation. There isn’t anything, you know, pushy about that. So I just, I wanted to share that with, with our listeners and just tell you personally, just thank you so much for leading in that way. Cause it’s. really, really helpful. Um, so now one of the things that we wanted to give our listeners today, which doesn’t directly relate to LinkedIn events, but is a profile optimization tool.

    [00:27:38] April: And I really recommend all of you guys go connect with Jen on LinkedIn. And we’ll have all of her links and everything in the show notes. And we’re also going to connect to this free profile optimization tool so we can level up your LinkedIn personal brand. Can you talk a little bit about that tool and why that’s important?

    [00:27:58] Jen: Yeah, sure. So it’s basically, it’s a chat list. It’s about seven, eight pages long and it just walks you to your profile and areas to optimize so that you’re showing up more in search and you’re just looking more at the part because if you do go to an event, your profile really is the gateway to everything.

    [00:28:16] Jen: So if you create an event, you’re attending an event or you’re You know, you’re chatting to people who are also attending. People are going to check you out and they’re always going to go, who is this person? So it’s always, it’s like going into any physical event or virtual event. People are always going to check you out.

    [00:28:31] Jen: So we want you to be looking good first and that will give you confidence. And that’s really where I started. My LinkedIn journey was optimizing my profile and when I felt like it really sold me and it felt more me and I looked to the part it made me more confident to send ems to connect and for me I love events on LinkedIn whether I’m hosting like a LinkedIn live or an audio or even a zoom I always encourage attendees to connect with each other you know I will say to all of my like if you’re going to any of my events have a look at the other people because It’s a safe container for you to reach out and send those DMS because they don’t always come natural for us.

    [00:29:12] Jen: And I think the more you exercise that muscle, then you’re kind of like, it is just a chart and maybe it’s because I’m Irish, but I’ve always just thought, why is the big deal? Wellington is literally having a conversation and I’ve never thought of networking as networking. I reframed it as my hair in my head.

    [00:29:29] Jen: It’s having chats with people and I think so many people build it up like networking is so, you know, serious, so professional. And I think on LinkedIn, especially for business owners, we have the joy of showing up whatever way we want. We’re not constrained by our old corporate roles where we had to be a bit more, you know, buttoned up and professional.

    [00:29:49] Jen: Whereas now, you know, for me, if anybody DMs me, I love a good gif like, yeah, I wouldn’t think that sending them in my corporate days, it would have been like, you know, best regards it’s, you know, like super formal and I just think LinkedIn is what you make of it, you know, it’s just, you know, it’s, it’s like a massive online network where you can have like, you know. Networking conversations, little mini events the whole time.

    [00:30:17] April: So valuable. So valuable. And so are you. Uh, what is the link? If it’s a pretty link, we’ll put it in the show notes anyway. But, um, you, well first of all, tell people exactly how to find your profile on LinkedIn. Let’s start with that.

    [00:30:30] Jen: Okay, so thanks again, I feel, for all your lovely words. So yeah, I’m Jen Corcoran, so it’s C O R C O R A N. Find me on LinkedIn. My company page on there is called My Super Connector. So yeah, just find me either my personal profile or my company page. You can check out my previous events, stalk them, see if you learn any tips from them. She’s so good. You guys, you totally have to stalk her.

    [00:30:57] Jen: And then we’ll share the link to the profile upgrade also in the show notes. But do you want to share the link as well? If you know that off the top of your head too, we can

    [00:31:06] Jen: click funnels.

    [00:31:08] April: Okay. Yeah. I knew it was like an ugly link. I didn’t know. We had a pretty link for it. Uh, we’ll put it in the show notes for you guys, everything here, how to connect with Jen.

    [00:31:16] April: Uh, you guys can go over to suite life co. com. Click on the podcast and, uh, Jen’s episode will be right there on the top. You can also search our podcast website. Anytime, just search the word LinkedIn and this podcast and other podcasts that we have done will populate for you. So there’s a ton of resources there for you, Jen.

    [00:31:37] April: Thank you so much. Just appreciate how you’ve poured into our clients. What you’ve taught me and being here on the show. So I really value you and I appreciate you. Thank you. Thanks for having me.


    How to Use LinkedIn Polls to Generate Leads with April Beach (Episode 305)

    How to Use LinkedIn Polls to Generate Leads



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 1-5 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want 
    This episode is perfect for both new and already-running business owners who are eager to get to know their audience better on LinkedIn. Think of LinkedIn polls as a super tool that lets you ask questions and find out what people really think! Maybe you are planning to start something new and want to know what others like, or perhaps you are curious to see if you’re sharing the stuff that really matters to them. By using LinkedIn polls, you can discover exactly what your audience is interested in, helping you make smarter choices for your business. 
    We are diving deep into the world of LinkedIn polls with the help of expert Tanya Bhattacharya! We’ll explore step-by-step how to create polls that are just right – not too boring, not too tricky, but interesting and fun for people to answer. It’s like creating a little quiz that helps you understand what people like and what they are interested in. April and Tanya will also share how you can use these polls when you’re launching a new program or trying to reengage your LinkedIn audience.
    We reveal the best kind of questions to ask in your polls to get the most helpful answers. It’s like having a magic question box that helps you find out what your friends are thinking! 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    • Know how to use polls to generate leads
    • Understand the strategy of polls
    • Have sample poll questions you can use in your polls
    • Be able to create a poll and execute this strategy right away
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:44] April: Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 305 here on the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast. This episode is for those of you that really want to know how to use it LinkedIn. You have been working to generate leads on LinkedIn, establish thought leadership and connect with the right people on LinkedIn. And so in this show, we’re diving into all things, how to use LinkedIn polls in order to help you do that.

    [00:01:09] April: But let’s talk about who this episode is for. This episode is for those of you guys who are established business owners. And even those of you who are just researching who your ideal. We have talked about polls. We’ve talked about quizzes a lot here on the podcast. As a matter of fact, I just shared a whole entire training on how to create quizzes as lead magnets for your business.

    [00:01:31] April: This goes hand in hand with that. This is a great opportunity for you to do something that actually takes very little effort. but helps you identify the right audience, the right people to connect with. And it’s going to give you a gauge of whether or not you’re already connected to the right people on LinkedIn.

    [00:01:51] April: So if you are in phase two or three or four of my lifestyle business roadmap, this is a great episode for you to listen to. If you already are rolling with LinkedIn, you probably don’t need this episode. No worries. You can go onto another strategy, and dive into LinkedIn ads with my friend, AJ, or LinkedIn company pages with my friend, Michelle. Those are all episodes that we’re dropping right around now.

    [00:02:14] April: If you are not sure where you are in your phase of business growth, just cruise over to SweetLifeCo.com/quiz. And you can take a really short little quiz and you can know exactly where you are in business and exactly what you should be working on right now.

    [00:02:29] April: So let’s talk about what you can expect from this show. We have Tania Bhattacharyya here on the show and she was introduced to me from somebody else on LinkedIn that says, this girl is great at LinkedIn marketing. You need to bring her in. We actually brought her in to host a little mini masterclass for our clients and our client intensive last week and every single one of our clients were able to implement the strategy that she’s talking about here.

    [00:02:56] April: On today’s show, we are going to dive into how to use polls and she even goes through the step by step of what content you should put in your polls and exactly what to do after you post a poll. And we talk about how you can use polls as part of your launch strategy. If you were launching a new program or an offer or a reopening of something, this could be a really great strategy for you.

    [00:03:19] April: So all of the show notes, including how to connect with Tania, please go connect with her on LinkedIn and the resources she has here can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo.Com. Just click on the podcast button. And this is episode 305. Let’s go ahead and dive in together.

    [00:03:37] April: All right, you guys, we are here with a new friend. This is my friend Tania, and she was actually in our community working with our clients last week. And when I first met her actually I was referred to her by somebody else through LinkedIn for the purpose of LinkedIn growth LinkedIn lead gen And when I first met her there’s literally a million things that she could have come on this podcast and in our community and actually taught on but we honed it down on one particular activity one strategy and we’re gonna unpack this strategy for you here today on the show and it’s all about LinkedIn polls in.

    [00:04:18] April: So anyway, we’re going to dive into all that and the step by steps of how to do it today on the show. But welcome to the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast, Tania. I’m so glad you’re here. Do you want to share with everybody a little bit of background about you and how you got started doing what you’re doing?

    [00:04:31] Tania: Yeah, absolutely. Well, thank you first of all, so much for that warm welcome. It’s so good to be here. I love chatting about, you know, all things. LinkedIn and entrepreneurship. So I got here, you know, as we all do through a kind of roundabout way, I didn’t think I was going to be an entrepreneur growing up. I went right into the nonprofit field. So I was always a, you know, do gooder. And I ended up working for a women’s addiction treatment program, for 12 years, doing all things, fundraising, marketing, alumni, you know, all that kind of good stuff.

    [00:05:03] Tania: And, you know, eventually I became the executive director and, you know, we were a small scrappy sort of startup nonprofit. Well, I wouldn’t say startup, but we were a scrappy nonprofit for sure. And so, you know, we were, I was trying to figure out ways to really get our name out there to really build relationships, to really like. Grow influence and trust in our community without a huge budget and without like hiring a giant marketing team and a PR firm and all that kind of stuff.

    [00:05:30] Tania: So I challenged myself to use LinkedIn to share, you know, one interesting story per week to connect with a couple of local, you know, business influencers, you know, corporate giving folks, you know, people who work for local foundations and just sort of like start to build my voice as a local nonprofit ed.

    [00:05:49] Tania: And slowly but surely, You know, magical things started to happen. And I really want to say like slowly, but surely it didn’t happen right away, but it was a slow build and a slow burn. And after about, you know, a quarter or so, you know, we started getting inbound, like inquiries for, you know, major gifts. We started getting Organic PR opportunities.

    [00:06:12] Tania: We started getting organic referrals and all these things that I used to have to really pound the pavement for, or just sort of happening all throughout, all just through LinkedIn. And so I’m a huge, just like advocate and evangelist for LinkedIn. I think it is such an underused platform still. I think it is still unsaturated and there’s so much we can do to really connect with the movers and the shakers that can really like supercharge our business, our mission driven business.

    [00:06:37] April: Yeah. And I love your story and thanks for your honesty about the fact that, I mean, it was slowly but surely and, and I think there’s a lot of people that just really expect fast, you know, fast results and a lot of things and, and Hey, you know what? Maybe some people have passed fast results, but I’m like you, my results have not always been overnight and, and to be honest and why I really appreciate you coming into our community and coaching our clients and, and having this conversation here with me and is because I still, I’ve been on LinkedIn since 2008 or something like that.

    [00:07:10] April: I still don’t feel like I know how to use LinkedIn. I still feel like I go there, like I love hanging out on Instagram. I can post pictures of my kids and my hiking and all this other stuff and kind of behind the scenes podcast stuff. But on LinkedIn, I just don’t really feel like I have still found my groove.

    [00:07:28] April: And I feel very, this is like really, to be honest, I feel very different than a lot of businesses on linkedin because I don’t work for a corporation. I never have a day in my life you know, there’s there’s all of these different really big companies on there and I kind of just really feel like I haven’t found my people yet to be honest and so doing things like what you are going to share here on today’s show.

    [00:07:55] April: I think a lot of our listeners might feel like I do and you know, they are subject matter experts. They are consultants. They are coaches They are, you know service providers, but they don’t really you know They don’t work for a big tech company and and they aren’t an employee. They are the coo and so how do we?

    [00:08:14] April: As individual, very small micro businesses utilize LinkedIn to build relationships with not all the people, but the right people. And that’s what I love about LinkedIn polls. And what I learned a little bit last week when you were working with our clients. And I know what we’re going to talk about today too. Cause I really feel like it’s. For people like me.

    [00:08:37] Tania: Yeah. I’m so glad that you said that. I think a lot of people feel that way and I think one of the biggest reasons why people feel that way on LinkedIn is there’s a lot of lurkers on LinkedIn. Like, I feel like on Instagram people are like, yeah, like there’s, people are just going to like comment and like and message and it’s just not as serious, you know, people just like are all in.

    [00:08:54] Tania: Whereas on LinkedIn there’s like a little bit of like a reservedness. You know, it is a business platform. I mean, at least that’s what I’ve been noticing. I think of LinkedIn as sort of a 24 7 365 like, you know, networking event that you can always kind of pop into. And at a networking event, I mean, think about your behavior.

    [00:09:12] Tania: You’re not just going to like be wild and crazy and be talking to everyone. You’re going to be kind of like. Checking it out, lurking a little bit, getting comfortable. And I think people are that way on LinkedIn too. But that doesn’t mean they’re not watching. That doesn’t mean they’re not like just waiting for something to, you know, sink their teeth into once that becomes available. And I think polls are a great way to find that signal and get people to raise their hand instead of lurking on the sidelines like we do on LinkedIn.

    [00:09:37] April: Awesome. Okay. So let’s dive into LinkedIn polls. I’m so excited to talk about this today. First of all, let’s go back to like some basics. Why use polls? What, like, what kind of a poll? Why are we going to use a poll? What’s the purpose of a poll?

    [00:09:50] Tania: Yeah. The purpose of a poll is like, it’s a, it’s a native, like integrated way. In LinkedIn, where you can ask your audience any kind of question, it can be a fun, silly question, like, what is your, you know, Hogwarts house?

    [00:10:04] Tania: It can be a question that has everything to do with a offer that you’re putting out there. Like for example, one of my primary offers is a LinkedIn content. Sprint where we, I help people batch content, like in a very concentrated period of time. And so one of the things that I might ask in a poll is like, what stops you from batching your content?

    [00:10:22] Tania: Right. And I can have up to four answers or instead of the, if, you know, like if I don’t want to live in the barriers, I could ask about the dreams and the goals and aspirations, like what could be possible for you or what would be an ideal scenario for you if you didn’t have to worry about content for six months, you know, what would you spend your time doing?

    [00:10:39] Tania: And I could just have four, like. Fun things, you know, like hang out with my family or launch this new thing, you know, whatever. So it’s a way to get your audience sort of, , in the arena in a way, get them participating. It’s a way for them to get them to raise their hand and get really good information about your audience. Kind of like a market research thing, that you can then use to follow up with people.

    [00:11:04] April: So cool. So cool. Okay. So how do we go about actually creating a pool poll? Like what are, what are the steps to go about doing this? I love your example of your offer, your program, and then asking people what’s stopping them.

    [00:11:18] Tania: Yeah.

    [00:11:19] April: Because anybody who answers just based on that is already prequalify themselves to say, Hey, listen, I’m already your ideal client because I’m struggling with this and it’s one of these different ways, but these are one of the things I’m struggling with. So I really love how you did that. My wheels are already spinning based on what you said, but how do we go about getting started to do?

    [00:11:38] Tania: Yeah. Yeah. Well, just from a very tactical level, if, if folks are not as used to using LinkedIn, if they’re kind of like, they haven’t been on there in a while, it’s as easy as going to like start a post and it will see start, , create a poll as one of the options you see there. Like it. You know, the options just right off the top of my head or something like, you know, post a picture, post a video.

    [00:12:00] Tania: Yeah. Create a poll is one of the options on there. And so you could, you know, there’s a place to very easily put the question. And then the default option is to have two answers, but you can have up to four answers. And I always like to have the fourth answer be something like other, tell me more in the comments.

    [00:12:17] Tania: So that way you get people really, you know, if something doesn’t. If they have another idea, you know, you always want to give them a space to be able to do that. And then you can have the poll go for, you know, something like a day, three days, a week, or two weeks. And I found the kind of the special sweet spot is about one week.

    [00:12:33] Tania: It gives it enough time to really like, it gives it that, that long shelf life that LinkedIn posts have. And it’s not so long that people have completely forgotten that they voted in the poll. So I like to do, you know, one week. Yeah.

    [00:12:48] April: Okay, cool. And one of the things that you were saying, which I didn’t know is that when you, if I were to see your poll and vote in it, my response is actually confidential.

    [00:12:58] Tania: Yes. This is one of my favorite parts about the LinkedIn poll, you know, because I think a lot of people get nervous, like nobody’s going to vote in my poll and then I’m going to look like a, like a loser, you know? And, and that’s a whole nother thing that, you know, I could talk on and on and on about. But the reality is, you know, people are not, you know, think about your behavior.

    [00:13:16] Tania: Like if you’re scrolling LinkedIn and you see somebody with, you know, just a poll that Has a couple of responses. You don’t think negatively of them. So don’t be nervous about putting out a poll and not getting as many responses as you want. You know, this is all about practice. This is all about just like putting yourself out there and building the muscle, right?

    [00:13:34] Tania: But, you know, I kind of went on a tangent there. So we were talking about the confidentiality piece. Yeah. Like I remember once I put out kind of a vulnerable poll. I was like, what’s, what stops you from showing up and, you know, playing bigger, right? Building a brand, you know, showing up with your authentic voice, something like that.

    [00:13:54] Tania: And I was like, nobody’s really gonna like put them, LinkedIn, but people did. And the reality is, like you said, People can see what the results are of your poll in terms of percentages. They can see like a, like a bar graph of how the answers came out in terms of percentages, but they can’t see who voted how, which is really great.

    [00:14:13] Tania: But as the poll creator, you can see how. Everybody voted. And my favorite, probably my favorite part of the poll is LinkedIn makes it really, really easy for you to just like with one click of a button next to each person’s, you know, kind of picture in your poll, there’s a little button that you can click to send them a message right away.

    [00:14:34] Tania: And in that message, it will include an attachment of the poll. So even if it’s been, you know, a week since they voted, even if it takes you a little while to get. to get to your follow up after a poll. It’s totally fine because that poll will show up in your message and you can just say something like, Hey, April, like I, thanks so much for voting in this poll.

    [00:14:53] Tania: I see you voted for, you know, answer B, whatever that is. And then you can actually start a dialogue. You can share a helpful resource. You can ask if they would like for you to send them. You know, a very specific resource that you have created just for them based on how they voted in that poll, right?

    [00:15:12] Tania: Which of course they’re going to want because they already told you this is something they’re struggling with, right? Or something that they desire.

    [00:15:19] April: Yeah, it’s so smart. So the strategy is creating the poll. And I mean, as users, I think it’s important for us to know that it’s confidential, which is really good. And I love as the poll owner that we get to see all the responses, but then the strategy you’re saying is then sharing and there’s a follow up strategy. After it’s not just the poll. It’s not for information But then you can message and share the actual results of the poll at the end of the poll with everybody who took it which I love that because that is such a natural next step conversation to have what besides like sharing the poll results and you’re saying so asking if they would like you to share a resource based on their outcome instead of just being like, here you go.

    [00:16:05] Tania: Yes, yes, yes. Something that I hear a lot from people and that I struggle with myself is like really, really not wanting to be spammy, salesy, icky. Because we all get those messages from people that we don’t know trying to sell us something and it gives us that ick factor. Nobody wants that. that. Like I can’t imagine that that’s really working for anybody, really.

    [00:16:26] Tania: And so something that makes me feel a lot better about this process and, and, you know, and I think on the other side, it feels, it feels good too, is, you know, let’s say somebody voted in my poll that they don’t. Batch content because they have writer’s block. I don’t know, I’m just coming up with something.

    [00:16:44] April: Right?

    [00:16:44] Tania: I could say, Hey, like thanks for voting my poll. I see you, you know, voted for writer’s block. I totally get that. A lot of people said that as well. I actually put together this whole like mini podcast episode about what to do when you have writer’s block. Um, would you like me to send you that link?

    [00:16:59] Tania: You know, and that way I’m not just like going forward and just like sending them something that, you know, maybe they’re too busy right now. Maybe they are taking a vacation right now. Maybe they just don’t want it for whatever reason. I don’t know. But the act of them saying, Oh, actually, yeah. Like that’s so nice.

    [00:17:16] Tania: Like. Yes, I would like that. It creates that permission based conversation and it, it makes it feel good on both sides that you’re moving forward in a conversation that both parties want to have, you know? And then, so what I would recommend is having some kind of mini resource for each of the answers that are in your poll and it doesn’t have to be complicated.

    [00:17:37] Tania: It doesn’t have to be a whole pod. It could be a short blog. It could be a short loom video. It could be, you know, like a one page PDF. It does not have to be complicated, but something that’s targeted to how they voted in that poll. So you have something immediately for them. Right. And just as a, you know, example.

    [00:17:56] Tania: When I did this during my last launch, I had 60 people vote in my poll, and about, like, a little bit more than half of them said yes to my inquiry. And so that’s about, like, uh, you know, like a baseline. It’s like a second version. Yeah, that’s, that’s, that’s just like an example number that you can go with.

    [00:18:13] Tania: Not everybody’s gonna say yes, and that’s okay, because you’re just whittling it down to the people who really are interested, and really the people who you’re gonna have the most, kind of, productive, fun. Valuable sort of like conversation with in the DMs.

    [00:18:29] April: Okay. And, okay. So let me ask you some questions that are in my head and I’m trying to imagine what our listeners or what their questions are right now as well. And if you guys have questions about this, if you have questions for Tania, please connect with her on LinkedIn and, you know, if we’re going to make sure her resources is in there too and just, and ask her directly too, if we miss some of your questions, some, some basics, how frequently could somebody post a poll?

    [00:18:56] Tania: Yeah. Honestly, you could do one like pretty frequently. I personally would probably limit it to about, you know, maybe two per month. You know, and it kind of depends on your posting cadence. Like if you post every day, then yeah, you know, absolutely. Two per month is, is no, no biggie. I tend to teach this kind of strategy to folks who are, they tend to be like in the trenches.

    [00:19:21] Tania: They are oftentimes like, like nonprofit. Eds or they’re just, they’re very busy. They’re not trying to spend all their time on LinkedIn. So I kind of teach a strategy of posting once per week. And because of how LinkedIn is set up that, that can be enough, right? Not so much for other social media platforms, but again, on LinkedIn, for a variety of reasons, like that can be enough.

    [00:19:41] Tania: And so if you’re posting once per week, you know, maybe once a quarter. You know, do this poll strategy because again, like you said, very astutely, like it’s not just about posting the poll. There is some followup involved and the, the, you know, the real riches, right, are always in the followup. Like the good, like the good energy is always in the follow up. That’s really where you get that conversation going. So don’t, you know, if this is going to be like, I recommend really making sure you have time to do that follow up. That’s really important.

    [00:20:13] April: I was, that’s what I was thinking. And I was saying this and you know, I I’m working right now on trade tab. Break out my, my LinkedIn time. And as you’re going through this, I’m thinking, wow, okay. I would want to make sure that I didn’t post a poll unless I knew that I had that built in time to actually finish it up and follow it up. And yeah, the fortune is always in the followup. So that’s a really, really good point.

    [00:20:34] April: And then the other thing, , as you’re saying this. Is there’s a couple for our listeners you guys this Strategy would pair well with a strategy that we did I think it was episode 303 where I was teaching you guys how to create a quiz as a lead magnet Go back and look at that and take some of the questions from that and put it into this poll here that that Tania is telling you about Yeah, but this working so well hand in hand with launch.

    [00:21:01] Tania: Yes.

    [00:21:02] April: And it’s like a sweat equity funnel. You have to put in the time. You have to be willing to build the relationships. You have to want to have conversations with people, but this in conjunction with a launch just seems. So organic to me, it just seems like a no brainer why all of us frankly wouldn’t be doing this

    [00:21:24] Tania: Yeah, it’s it’s a tool that kind of lets the warmest people emerge, you know Cuz sometimes like we’re just we don’t know who like we’re just looking for signs and signals and this is like a very strong signal right that That somebody would be interested.

    [00:21:37] Tania: And if you can create a poll that is very much rooted in the transformation of the program that you’re launching, it’s like a, it’s like a win. It’s like a no brainer. It’s like a win win. It just works.

    [00:21:50] April: Right. That’s gold. That’s gold. Okay. So as we wrap it up, let’s kind of recap what we talked about and give our listeners three action steps or four action steps or whatever you want to do to leave here right now, not, you know, to not just think about this, to actually go and take action on what you have taught them here today.

    [00:22:08] Tania: Yeah. So like three, three action items. Okay. Yeah. So the first thing I would do is think about, you know, a program that you’re launching right now, an offer that you’re really wanting to sell right now, whether it’s. You know, whether you’re a coach, consultant, service provider, other type of business owner, think about that program promise. Like think about the transformation that you create for your clients and the problem that you solve. And then think about a question that you would want to ask folks that gets at the root of that, the heart of that.

    [00:22:34] Tania: And probably the easiest thing would be like, what’s a barrier that stops you from doing this on your own kind of thing. Again, another option is to ask them like, what would be the dream if you could accomplish this? But sometimes the barriers are just a little bit more. Concrete, they’re a little bit more easy, you know, to figure out.

    [00:22:51] Tania: So I would first of all, figure that out, like figure out that question. And then, you know, three, like two to four answers that fall under that. So again, in my example, cause I always think examples are helpful. My program promises around like batching six months of LinkedIn content. So the barriers I would include are like. Writer’s blog, not having time, my creative process doesn’t allow for it, and you know, I’m afraid my content won’t stay relevant if I batch for that blog, you know, those are just examples.

    [00:23:21] Tania: So think about what those would be in your example, in your program. The second thing that I would do, I mean, literally I would just find like a week in your calendar where you have, where you can, where you know you’ll have the time to kind of like have these DM conversations, right?

    [00:23:38] Tania: Um, and really that you’re going to want to We are going to want to have that time the week after you post the poll. So just like, think about that. , and I would just. do it, right? I would just put that poll up. I would just start it. And this is a test. Like, if you only get three people voting, like, that’s okay.

    [00:23:54] Tania: That’s, that’s still great. You have three people that you know, you know, are struggling with a problem that you, um, you know, solve. So that’s a great thing. And the third thing that I would do or kind of action item that I would take is, you know, LinkedIn is organically going to show your poll to people, you know, people that you know already, then you’re connected with people that, uh, you don’t know, but are connected to the people who are voting.

    [00:24:21] Tania: Like it’ll have that sort of just like networky effect, but. Don’t be afraid to share the poll in other places other than just LinkedIn, right? So in your post, there’s a little, it’s going to look like three little dots on the top right of your post. You can click on those three dots. And a dropdown is going to come up and you’re going to select copy link to post.

    [00:24:46] Tania: And then in your clipboard, you’ve got a direct link to that poll. So if you send out a weekly newsletter, you know, like promo the poll in that, in that newsletter, right? If you’re a member of any Slack channels, you know, Facebook communities. If you have a group of business besties that just, you all support each other, a pure mastermind.

    [00:25:06] Tania: Like there’s so many networks that you’re in that just aren’t LinkedIn. And this is a way to bring. Fresh people who maybe don’t check LinkedIn all the time, who maybe just missed it, um, to bring them to your poll and kind of, you know, manufacture a little bit of additional engagement, which is just going to increase the overall engagement of your poll.

    [00:25:25] Tania: Right? So that would be the third thing I’d say is like, don’t be afraid to kind of go off LinkedIn to. Increase the engagement on LinkedIn for your poll, right? Oh, and then obviously the fourth one, which I know you just said three, but the fourth one is don’t forget to follow up. Like if you’re not having these DM conversations, like, you know, it’s still a good thing to do the poll. It’s not like a waste of time. But again, like we said before, the riches is in the follow up. So. Yeah. Don’t be afraid.

    [00:25:51] April: Yeah. These are all, this is a great training. Thank you so much. And in every, every time I hear this and every time I hear this, say this, and, and again, like when you taught this in our business mastermind a week or so ago, immediately I had.

    [00:26:06] April: All of these things and I was ready to take action, but I knew this week I wouldn’t have time to write. And so for me, for me, like I’m hanging onto that. That’s my, you know, I, I believe time’s more valuable than money. So I’m like, okay, when am I going to actually build in my time? But I think that people will get stuck on the, what question do I ask?

    [00:26:24] April: And just to remind you guys, go back to all of your offer engineer training. What exactly, like Tonya said, like what transformation do you deliver? What is the end result of that? And what are the pains and the problems that you’re, you are helping people solve it and what are their struggles? Why aren’t they there already?

    [00:26:40] April: Why do they need you? , so just, just some good reminders and you can sort the podcast website for all the trainings on offer engineering. If you guys are stuck there too. So. Tanya, you have this batch, this LinkedIn batching thing coming up, and I know you want to share a resource with our listeners as well, and you guys please move forward and connect with Tania too for her time and just blessing her for being here and pouring into us. Tell us about that resource where people can interact with you more.

    [00:27:09] Tania: Yeah, definitely. Definitely. Well, like, like you said, April, like definitely a great place to find me is LinkedIn, but I know in the show notes, we’re going to include a link to this kind of thing. Freebie I have, which is 14 free prompts that you can use to inspire your ongoing LinkedIn posts, right?

    [00:27:26] Tania: And I think, I think polls might be one of the 14. I mean, that would make sense, right? But there’s all kinds of things that you can kind of like ask yourself to really let the, the most impactful LinkedIn content emerge. So definitely check that out. And, yeah, I’d say those are two really great ways to, to connect.

    [00:27:46] Tania: Yeah, I appreciate your time so much. We’ll make sure all of the details are in the show notes, and then, we’ll of course be posting this on LinkedIn as well. Thank you so much for coming in here, and you guys, Tanya teaches much more than polls. That was just like one little thing that she, that she talks about that we wanted to bring to you today, so it’s an actionable strategy that you can implement right away. But, , she’s a great, great resource if you are looking for, other support. I appreciate you so good to be here.


    How To Grow Your LinkedIn Company Page with April Beach (Episode 304)

    How To Grow Your LinkedIn Company Page




    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-5 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) 
    Wondering what to do with your LinkedIn Company page? Join the club. LinkedIn Company pages have been generally inactive and ineffective for growing brands and capturing leads. Over the years you may have created a company page and it’s just sitting there… or maybe you’re posting to your company page and hoping the spaghetti will stick and measurable growth will miraculously happen. If so, this SweetLife Entrepreneur™ episode is for you…
    On a hunt for tangible LinkedIn Company page strategies, I came across Michelle J Raymond, who is an international LinkedIn Company Pages expert and LinkedIn B2B Growth Strategist. Michelle also wrote the first book on LinkedIn Company pages! Perfecto… we found exactly who were looking for. 
    In this episode Michelle breaks down the potential of LinkedIn Company pages and how you can use a simple strategy, which she unpacks on this episode,  to leverage LinkedIn Company Pages for your business: 
    • Why businesses of all sizes need a company page
    • How much time to allocate to your company page
    • What content works best on company pages
    • How do you grow your page followers fast
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    • Change your mind and hurry over to build your company page
    • Have simple steps you can implement right now to grow your Company Page audience
    • Understand what goes on your Company Page vs. Personal Feed

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] April Beach: Hi, you guys. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 304. So if you’ve been a long time listener, you know that all the show notes and everything we’re going to share with you can be found by visiting SweetLife.

    [00:00:57] April Beach: Simply click on the podcast and you can search episode number 304. I’m April Beach, host here on the show, and I’m really glad that you’ve tuned into this episode. I can tell you that I really needed to hear and learn what today’s guest brought to the table for us. If you have been trying to grow your business on LinkedIn and maybe you’re like me, I’ve had no idea, honestly.

    [00:01:19] April Beach: Raise your hand. How to use LinkedIn company pages. Yes, we use them, but there really wasn’t a big strategy behind it. And LinkedIn didn’t have a huge reach. Well, if you’re like me and you actually want to know how to utilize your company page to build your brand, increase your sales, gain followers, and build relationships with important people.

    [00:01:41] April Beach: That are going to grow and scale your business. Then this episode is for you. Today’s guest literally wrote the book, the first ever book on LinkedIn company pages. And in today’s episode, she’s going to share with you and me how much we are leaving on the table. Literally how many things that we could be doing that are simple tweaks to your business page that we’re just walking away from.

    [00:02:04] April Beach: It’s like burning cash. You’re going to be blown away by the strategies you hear on today’s show. And what you’re going to walk away with is a simple process to know how to use your LinkedIn company page to build your brand, increase sales, gain recognition for your company and become more known. In addition to that, we even talk about the connection between your company page and your LinkedIn personal page and why that’s important.

    [00:02:27] April Beach: So if you’re looking to grow your business on LinkedIn to gain recognition and to have a strategy that’s actually so simple, you can actually. Hand of the strategy that you get here on the show today to a team member to implement for you. It’s amazing. Or if you’re flying solo, this is a very simple strategy that you should be able to easily implement on your own for your LinkedIn company page following the steps that our guest is diving into today here.

    [00:02:56] April Beach: So we have Michelle J. Raymond on the show. She’s amazing. I was introduced to Michelle by a mutual friend, and if you aren’t yet, Please cruise over and follow Michelle on LinkedIn. Again, it’s Michelle J. Raymond. Let her know that you heard this episode. You’re going to want to connect with her for sure after this.

    [00:03:13] April Beach: It’s just an amazing amount of information that is truly going to be able to be implemented in your business and make a significant difference today. So if that’s what you’re looking for, you’re in the right place. Let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode.

    [00:03:27] April Beach: Hi everybody and welcome back to the show. I’m here with my new friend, Michelle, and Michelle was introduced to me by another new friend, which is not always the way we meet, like the coolest people is introductions from other people. And. Michelle and I are going to dive into all things LinkedIn company pages. And one of the, one of the most amazing things that has happened since I’ve been connecting with Michelle is that I realized that our company page is really lacking.

    [00:03:56] April Beach: One of the biggest reality check is basically, I really didn’t know what I was doing with LinkedIn company pages. Like I knew I didn’t know. And then I just talked to Michelle and tapped into all of her genius and realize how much I’m really leaving on the table because of my lack of understanding. So I’m really excited that, that you are here to help me and all of our listeners really understand how to dive in and utilize LinkedIn company pages more. So welcome to the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast and thank you for being here and sharing your wisdom.

    [00:04:25] Michelle J Raymond: It is my absolute pleasure and if it makes you feel any better, don’t worry, you’re in the majority, not the minority. They are vastly understood and put it this way, I wrote the world’s first book on it just three years ago.

    [00:04:39] Michelle J Raymond: Now think about that. LinkedIn has been around for 20 years. There’s been no resources. It’s at all up until three years ago, which is just ludicrous. So hopefully we can help your listeners here today with some actionable tips that they can take away and move a little bit more into the, you do know some things about company pages that you can implement and help grow your business.

    [00:04:58] April Beach: Absolutely. I’m so excited. So tell everybody a little bit how you said you wrote the first book on LinkedIn company pages. I mean, that is pretty crazy that nobody had actually figured it out yet until you did that. So how did you fall into that?

    [00:05:14] Michelle J Raymond: Fall into it is the right words. So three years ago I set up my own business and not even that was intentional, it was accidental. So I’m an accidental entrepreneur, which I hope some other people can relate to. But picture this, one day I win a 2 million deal from a LinkedIn post for the company that I was working at. about a week later, I had to quit on the spot because the boss reneged on that deal. So imagine going from the highs of a 2 million win to I quit on the spot, never planned on quitting.

    [00:05:46] Michelle J Raymond: And that whole mess that that was, but I just decided I wasn’t going to work for anybody else ever again. I’d had a run of bad bosses and I just figured I might as well work hard for myself. And so I did that. And after, you know, six months of trying to figure that out, I end up. On LinkedIn training, because I’d been using LinkedIn to sell for the last six years at that point.

    [00:06:07] Michelle J Raymond: And so I thought I could help other people because it was March, 2020, you know, that little thing called COVID that sent the world into lockdown. That’s when I set my business up which turns out it was a good thing, but essentially I help people. And I went to the first person, offered them training and they said, can’t you just do it for us?

    [00:06:23] Michelle J Raymond: And I said, is that even a job? Like I didn’t even know April, I’m not going to lie. I didn’t even realize that people would pay other people to do social media. That’s the craziness in hindsight, but I’m not even making that up. And the thing was company pages are a way that you can get a third party to do your LinkedIn for you without breaking any of the terms and conditions.

    [00:06:43] Michelle J Raymond: So I started to do that for one client. Then I looked around and went, no one else is talking about this. So I’m just going to own that spot. And three years ago, people thought I was crackers. There’s no other words for it. They just thought, where’d I come from? And why was I talking about this thing that absolutely everybody else was just.

    [00:07:03] Michelle J Raymond: Slamming and that’s where it started. It got me noticed for being known for that one thing. And it’s just got me so many opportunities since. But that’s how it all started. It was crazy. But here we are now.

    [00:07:16] April Beach: It, you know, there’s the guy, there’s so many gems from what you just shared in your story. But just for our listeners also, this is totally a sidebar, but it shows the importance of being known for something and being known for one specific thing, even though Michelle and I, and you that are listening, you all, we have a million different things we could do.

    [00:07:36] April Beach: But the becoming known for one thing and leaning into that and the power of that. And so that’s just a, that’s a, we could just end the podcast right there on that, but we’re not going to, I mean, that, that’s a, that’s a gem lesson right there. Right. It really, really shows that importance and then we can be known for something else next and something else next. And we just keep reinventing ourselves. Don’t we, you guys.

    [00:07:56] Michelle J Raymond: Yeah. And that’s where I’m up to right now. Reinventing because, you know, I was known for that one thing and it’s opened so many doors. But now I’m going through this next evolution phase, which is exciting because being known for that one thing got me onto a podcast, which was picked up because someone saw me write a comment on LinkedIn and then someone in New Zealand listened to the podcast and then they reached out and they’re like, do you want to write a book together?

    [00:08:20] Michelle J Raymond: And like the whole thing, it went from Vienna to Dubai, to New Zealand, to me in Sydney. How crazy is that? That’s the power of LinkedIn. And that’s why I fell in love with it so long ago.

    [00:08:31] April Beach: Oh my gosh. I love your story and I’m so grateful that you’re here. Thank you so much for being here to share with us. All right. So pages, company pages. I mean, I, I think that I have had company pages since I don’t even know, before 2010 probably. And they have just sat there. We’ve been trying to use our company page in the past couple of years, but I have no idea what to do with it. So why is it important to have a company page?

    [00:08:58] Michelle J Raymond: Yeah, look, and this is the thing. Company pages realistically have been around for a long time, but it’s only been over the last few years that I think that they’ve got the attention they deserve from LinkedIn themselves. Now, why is that? Thanks to COVID, everybody brought their advertised Spend off other platforms and brought it to LinkedIn, you need a company page to run ads.

    [00:09:19] Michelle J Raymond: And so they are cashed up and this is one area of growth for them. Now that works out for all of us who only do organic strategies, i. e. not paid because we get the benefits of all of these additional features. And so LinkedIn have put more resources, they’ve made them more actionable, but why should you use it?

    [00:09:38] Michelle J Raymond: Go and Google your business name. That’s my simple answer. We piggyback and leverage off LinkedIn’s credibility and Google loves LinkedIn. And so your company page will show up in the first, probably five results maximum, sometimes one or two, depending how much content you’ve got out on the internet.

    [00:09:56] Michelle J Raymond: Picture that first page results, top five, your LinkedIn company page is going to land there. Now you’ve got two choices. You can ignore it. Or you can basically roll out the red carpet if someone clicks on it and give them something that really welcomes them and shows them who you are and what you do as a business. That’s what I help people with. I want them to roll out the red carpet.

    [00:10:19] April Beach: Wow. I had no idea. I just never even thought about that. But now that you explained that, it makes complete sense. And so in the past, I know that besides the SEO part of it that you just mentioned in the past, it was really hard to get followers to company pages and they don’t have a lot of exposure.

    [00:10:38] April Beach: And the SEO within LinkedIn itself just didn’t seem that it was being shared with a lot of people. Can you speak a little bit to, you know, if there are so few people that actually see this. Other than some other benefits. I know we’re going to learn from you. Like why take the time? Why, why spend the time to curate the content for this page?

    [00:10:56] Michelle J Raymond: They were super hard to grow. When I first started, they were like snails pace. I would have to tell people, you know, plan six to 12 months before you see anything, and I can assure you when someone’s paying you for a service. They don’t want to wait six to 12 months to see a result. The good part that LinkedIn’s done is one of the new features that they rolled out a while back is that we get invitation credits so we can invite our first degree connections.

    [00:11:20] Michelle J Raymond: That’s people that we’re connected to. We can invite them to come and follow the page. Now we went from 100 to 250, so it’s a really easy way. That you can build a niche community. Now, this isn’t a place where you’re gathering friends and family and former colleagues or aunties and uncles, or, you know, relatives that aren’t interested in your business.

    [00:11:40] Michelle J Raymond: We’re building a niche community, much smaller, a higher concentrate of people that are interested in what you do and what you offer. And that’s the main difference between our personal profiles. So one’s highly concentrated and one’s a bit more of a numbers game of lots of people that we’ve connected along the way.

    [00:11:58] Michelle J Raymond: And they just work differently. And I think that’s an important piece for people to understand they work differently. So you can grow really quickly. You can do a lot with a page that’s got a couple of thousand. And if anyone’s ever used a review website, like TripAdvisor, Yelp, any restaurant review website.

    [00:12:18] Michelle J Raymond: That’s what we do before we make purchases. It’s completely normal for us to go and research companies. So they might like me or they might like you, April, personally, and have followed our content. When it comes to handing over that money, we just want to make sure that the business is credible as well. And so this is where your company page supports what you do with your personal brand.

    [00:12:39] April Beach: Oh, it all makes so much sense now that you explain that. Can I ask you specifically about those invite credits? Can you share just a little bit more about how those work? Because I know that people have heard about them and, and just a little bit more clarity on that.

    [00:12:52] Michelle J Raymond: Yeah. The thing is, I don’t think most company pages are taking full advantage of this and it is the fastest and easiest way to grow your page. And so what happens every month you get 250 invite credits that can be used across of all of your page admins. So you might have multiple people helping to manage your company page and spread that work around.

    [00:13:12] Michelle J Raymond: So what happens is you invite people and here’s the kicker. For every person that accepts, you get an invite credit back again, which is awesome. So be targeted higher chance of acceptance. You get another turn brilliant, but here’s the other side. They expire at the end of every month. So if you don’t use them, you lose them.

    [00:13:31] Michelle J Raymond: So keep an eye out. It’s really simple. Just go to the page admin view. And in the top right hand corner, you’ll see invite connections. And what makes this even more brilliant? Is LinkedIn introduced some filters for us. So whether you target people by a geography, by an industry, or maybe you went a particular school, then you can do that within these filters.

    [00:13:52] Michelle J Raymond: So again, they help you be targeted. They help you form that niche. And that is where the brilliance starts to come into play.

    [00:13:59] Michelle J Raymond: Oh, that’s so cool.

    [00:14:00] April Beach: I did notice the filtering on there and was playing with some invite credits in the past, and I think it’s really cool how they give you the credit back when somebody accepts it.

    [00:14:08] April Beach: It’s just saying, yes, somebody actually really does want to know about your brand and follow you and be part of this community. So that is super exciting. So let’s kind of go into how do you even have Post on this company page. What do you put out there? What kind of content should we share on a company page versus in our on our personal linkedin profile?

    [00:14:29] April Beach: I really I don’t think that people understand and know and what I’ve seen in the past. And I feel like we’ve done the same thing, too, because we didn’t know any better was just kind of sharing some of the same stuff And, and I understand now already just in what you’ve shared with us, that that is definitely not the right approach.

    [00:14:47] April Beach: Look,

    [00:14:47] Michelle J Raymond: it’s not the worst. I’d rather that than nothing because again, if someone finds you or discovers you on Google or the LinkedIn search bar, then at least they find something and not just the ghost town. So not the worst thing, but here’s my three, two, one strategy, April, which I’ll share, which makes it super easy for anyone running a company page to know what to post.

    [00:15:08] Michelle J Raymond: And the last thing we want. We do not want them to be broadcast channels all about the company. No one wants to read that. It reads like ads and everybody just scrolls as fast as possible past ads. So don’t do it listeners. But here’s the three, two, one strategy. So three plus two. Plus one equals six.

    [00:15:26] Michelle J Raymond: Okay. So we’re talking about six posts in total, and I’m going to show you how we break down those six posts. Now, for some of you, you might only be able to do one post a week. Totally fine. You might be able to do two in an ideal world. I’d recommend three, if you can get those done. So how are we going to do it?

    [00:15:44] Michelle J Raymond: We have what’s called good to know posts. So three out of those six are good to know. And what do I mean by good to know? These are the posts where you highlight what you know is going on in your industry that would really help other people. If you’re a subject matter expert, doesn’t matter the topic you have access and to, or probably have done a lot of research in your particular area.

    [00:16:07] Michelle J Raymond: Instead of other people having to do that same research, you become the place that they come to learn. And so this is what I call good to know. So trends that are going on. Maybe there’s been legislation changes for some people. Maybe there are things that are impacting that particular business, like changes to technology.

    [00:16:24] Michelle J Raymond: You know, chat GPT is probably a big one that’s. That’s, you know, just being all over the place, but how is that impacting your particular area? And so you start to build up your credibility and to be known for that thing. And then, but if we just talk about that all the time, April, not going to lie, that gets a little dry, a little boring.

    [00:16:42] Michelle J Raymond: And that’s when people are like, okay, you know, but what kind of a business are you? And this is where we start to come into the, what I call good to feel. So this is. What is your business? What do they stand for? We know that buyers are drawn to people who share values, purpose driven companies are getting, you know, a lot more say these days.

    [00:17:04] Michelle J Raymond: So start to show us some of the things that makes your business different to others. What do I mean by this? If you’re doing work out in the community, show that. Show us some photos of what goes on behind the scenes. You know, it can be as simple as grabbing your phone, taking a selfie or a video when you’re out and about, and just explaining to people that this is part of your process.

    [00:17:26] Michelle J Raymond: We want to see behind the curtains, like the wizard of Oz, you know, who’s behind that curtain. And this is what the good to know, sorry, good to feel posts will show people. So then we get that affinity for the business and we get to start to filter out who we want to work with and who we may not want to, but that leaves the lucky last post out of those six, which is the most important one, even though it’s the least that most people skip over.

    [00:17:51] Michelle J Raymond: And you know what it is. The good to buy post for the love of God, please tell people what your business does and make it really clear so that people don’t have to guess what you do. I have so many people that I’m connected to on LinkedIn that post regularly that I learn a lot from. I even like them a lot, but I have no clue what they actually sell to people to be able to refer business or to buy from them. And I’m sure you see that a lot as well.

    [00:18:22] April Beach: I think I do that a lot. Not only see that a lot.

    [00:18:26] Michelle J Raymond: Yeah.

    [00:18:27] April Beach: Wow. It is. It is so true.

    [00:18:30] Michelle J Raymond: We get stuck in adding value. There’s this thing don’t sell on LinkedIn. And the problem is we can absolutely sell on LinkedIn. That’s why I’m there. I help businesses grow using LinkedIn.

    [00:18:41] Michelle J Raymond: But the problem is when we do it all the time and get the ratio out of whack, say we were doing it six posts, we were just saying, bye, bye, bye. No one wants that. But the problem is we’re doing all this value, building up our credibility, people like us, and then they’re just confused. They’re just like, well, what would I actually spend my money with you?

    [00:19:00] Michelle J Raymond: Now, when we keep it in the three to one ratio, people don’t mind because they’ve seen, you know, your things, they have an affinity for your business. And then they’re like, shut up and take my money, but they don’t know where. And so this is what I’d like to help people. It’s no longer a broadcast at people.

    [00:19:16] Michelle J Raymond: The content style is very similar to what you do on your personal page, but. Don’t forget the good to buy posts. It is critical, even on your personal posts. It won’t reach as many people as part of the game, but it will reach the right people. And that’s the important piece. We don’t want to walk away and leave money on the table.

    [00:19:36] April Beach: Wow. Okay. So three good to knows, two good to feels and one good to buy.

    [00:19:43] Michelle J Raymond: Don’t forget that one.

    [00:19:44] April Beach: That was a game changer for me, an absolute game changer for me. So let’s talk about the frequency of this and, and how often you think that we should be company or posting to our company page.

    [00:19:56] April Beach: I don’t think

    [00:19:57] Michelle J Raymond: there’s any one answer because every business is different. So let’s say it comes down to resources. Now for a lot of businesses, if you’re a solopreneur or a micro business, you don’t have a team that’s doing all of this for you, so you’ve got to do it yourself. I would kind of do the 80 20 rule. Most of your content should go over on your personal profile with, you know, just the smaller share go over on your company page.

    [00:20:21] Michelle J Raymond: So we’re going to take it over in that particular case, ideal world. Even with my paying clients, we’re only doing three times a week. We’re putting our efforts into elsewhere on the platform, you know, forming relationships, nurturing relationships, and putting content out personally. So just keep it ticking over.

    [00:20:37] Michelle J Raymond: Don’t get stressed. It’s okay to repurpose to your point. I have no problems for that, but what we do is we just put a bit of a gap in between when you’re repurposing, unless it’s time critical for say an event, any other posts, just put some space between it. And then that way people will just kind of go, I haven’t seen that before.

    [00:20:56] Michelle J Raymond: And you’ve kind of got two different audiences. And on LinkedIn, we often see the same thing twice. And what do we do? We just scroll by and just go. What’s the silly algorithm. We don’t blame the person. And so I’ve got a concept that might help some people to keep going. Create your LinkedIn company page is going to be your greatest hits library.

    [00:21:16] Michelle J Raymond: And what I mean by that and I’m going to be showing my age here, but when I was younger, I used to buy CDs and you would buy a CD, which have say 25 songs on it and three were great. But you had to buy the whole thing just to get those three. Well, we’re not going to do that. We want all killer, no filler.

    [00:21:34] Michelle J Raymond: So we just want the three good tracks on the company page. And don’t worry about trying to keep up with the rest. When you take away the volume component and up the quality, it becomes so much easier to do. So yeah, create it as your greatest hits library and it’s so much easier.

    [00:21:50] April Beach: Ah, I’m going to, it used to be cassette tapes for me. I’m really going to age myself.

    [00:21:54] Michelle J Raymond: I’ve got those too, the mixtapes.

    [00:21:57] April Beach: The mixtapes. We used to hit record when the radio was playing live to try to catch the song in the beginning. Oh my gosh. Yeah. This is, that is really, really interesting. Okay. So the greatest hits I honestly, I always like try to throw myself under the, well not try to, I always end up throwing myself under the bus here on the podcast, especially when I’m learning so many new things.

    [00:22:17] April Beach: I honestly think that we have just been saying, okay, we don’t know where else to put this content. We’re just going to put it out on the company page. It was, we have so much content because of the podcast. We’re like, sure, let’s just put it on the company page, put it on the company page. And so I think that we’ve been sharing a lot of content, but there was certainly been no strategy behind it other than sharing, you know, this weekly podcast.

    [00:22:37] April Beach: This is a game changer. And now I can see why you wrote the first book on LinkedIn company pages. And also why so many people are coming to you to help grow their business and their brand on LinkedIn. So I’m absolutely incredibly helpful, Michelle. I know that many of our listeners want to connect with you, want to know how to get your book because I mean that if this is what we’ve just picked up and you know, 20 minutes, then what is it going to be if they, if they actually dive into all your genius, how can they find you and connect with you?

    [00:23:10] April Beach: Well, the

    [00:23:11] Michelle J Raymond: easiest place to find me is always on LinkedIn and it’s Michelle J. Raymond. And that J is there deliberately not to make my name longer, but to make it easier for you to find me because there’s lots of other Michelle Raymonds. So Michelle J. Raymond and the book is called Business Gold and it’s on Amazon.

    [00:23:26] Michelle J Raymond: But if you go to my profile, there’s links there and always happy to point people in the direction, but ultimately it’s everything you need to get you started. Started with your company paid. So we’ve covered a little bit here today, but for those of you who want to be stepped through the book is great. It’s a two hour read. It will set you off at success for the future.

    [00:23:44] April Beach: Wow. Thank you so much for your wisdom and your experience and your excellence and everything you’ve taught us here today. We’ll definitely be applying this. I know in our business, and we’re really excited because you get to come in and teach our clients in an intensive coming up.

    [00:23:58] April Beach: And I know our clients are really excited to be able to work with you. So just. Thank you so much for all the change that you’re making in all of our businesses. And we really appreciate you.

    [00:24:07] Michelle J Raymond: It is my pleasure. I wish everyone all the growth this year. It’s a tough year, but I know they’re in good hands with you. So yeah, I’m excited to be working with you guys and just show people that this is just another tool that you can leverage to help your business grow. So yeah, excited to see what we can do.

    [00:24:24] Michelle J Raymond: Me

    [00:24:24] April Beach: too. Me too. It’s excellent. Thank you so much.


    3 Steps To Build Your Business From Podcasting Without Running Ads, Even With A Small Audience with April Beach (Episode 303)

    3 Steps To Build Your Business From Podcasting Without Running Ads, Even With A Small Audience



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want 
    You’re a podcaster or you’d like to be, but you’re wondering how to make money for your business from your show, especially in a market that feel saturated. In this show April records live from Podcast Movement 2023 and she is delivering to you the exact talk she delivered on stage at Podcast Movement! 
    If you have a small list, or you’re new to podcasting. If you don’t want advertisers or you don’t have enough downloads for them to pay attention to you. And, if you’re wondering how we’ve generated over a million dollars in sales directly attributed to this how, this episode unpacks it all. 
    This show also comes with: 
    • Slides from April’s talk at Podcast Movement 2023
    • 1 hour training and worksheets on how to create an intuitive quiz for your show
    • Powerful resources for building aligned offers 


    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    • Know how to create a show structure that make you the centerpiece, even with guests
    • Have a funnel you can apply to your show
    • Know how to create offers that your listeners can’t refuse
    3 Steps to a Profitable Podcast – Podcast Movement Friends – https://www.sweetlifeco.com/pm
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us: www.sweetlifeco.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Rev